BREEAM Manual 2014

Transcription

BREEAM Manual 2014

blank page
Terms and conditions
Disclaimer
This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any
testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this Scheme Document must be conducted in accordance with
BRE Global Limited’s approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and
associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or approved parties (“Approved Party
(ies)”). Any party wishing to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval
must apply to BRE Global Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, in order to qualify as an Approved Party;
a fee will normally be charged. BRE Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts
no responsibility for any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action to
prevent such unauthorised use or distribution.
Copyright
The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the
contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded
and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted
material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for
commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright
status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or
documents.
Trade Marks
BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and
may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited.
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2014
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
i
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Acknowledgements
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group
staff members, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM Assessors
and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways.
BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method
and contribute towards a sustainable built environment.
ii
About BRE Global Limited
BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body
offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market.
BRE Global Limited’s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.
We aim to achieve this by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Researching and writing standards
Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability
Developing world leading sustainability assessment methods
Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators
Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events
Developing and delivering training
BRE Global Limited’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing
laboratories.
BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world leading brands including:
1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world’s leading environmental
assessment method for buildings
2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services.
BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE
Group.
BRE Global Limited
Bucknalls Lane
Watford
Hertfordshire
WD25 9XX
T +44 (0)333 321 8811
F +44 (0)1923 664 910
E [email protected]
www.breglobal.com
www.greenbooklive.com
iii
blank page
Table of contents
i
Acknowledgements
ii
About BRE Global Limited
iii
Table of contents
v
List of tables
viii
List of figures
xi
About this Scheme Document
xii
Introduction
1
Introduction to BREEAM
2
BREEAM UK New Construction
5
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme
7
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version
10
12
Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version
15
Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version
16
Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version
17
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings
18
BREEAM rating benchmarks
19
Minimum standards
20
Environmental section weightings
22
BREEAM assessment issues and credits
23
Calculating a building's BREEAM rating
24
The BREEAM evidential requirements
26
Management
31
Man 01 Project brief and design
32
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning
38
Man 03 Responsible construction practices
42
Man 04 Commissioning and handover
48
Man 05 Aftercare
53
Health and Wellbeing
58
Hea 01 Visual comfort
59
Hea 02 Indoor air quality
75
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories
87
v
Hea 04 Thermal comfort
90
Hea 05 Acoustic performance
96
Hea 06 Safety and security
Energy
115
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
116
Ene 02 Energy monitoring
127
Ene 03 External lighting
133
Ene 04 Low carbon design
136
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage
144
Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems
148
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems
152
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment
158
Ene 09 Drying space
163
Transport
166
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility
167
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities
174
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities
178
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity
186
Tra 05 Travel plan
192
Water
195
Wat 01 Water consumption
196
Wat 02 Water monitoring
207
Wat 03 Water leak detection
211
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment
215
Materials
218
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
219
Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection
234
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials
237
Mat 04 Insulation
245
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience
250
Mat 06 Material efficiency
255
Waste
vi
110
258
Wst 01 Construction waste management
259
Wst 02 Recycled aggregates
268
Wst 03 Operational waste
273
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes
278
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change
280
Wst 06 Functional adaptability
285
Land Use and ecology
288
LE 01 Site selection
289
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
293
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology
299
LE 04 Enhancing site ecology
307
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity
311
Pollution
316
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants
317
Pol 02 NOx emissions
325
Pol 03 Surface water run-off
332
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution
348
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution
351
Innovation
Inn 01 Innovation
Appendices
354
355
358
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types
359
Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings
361
Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings
363
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments
364
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments
369
Appendix F – TBA
374
Appendix G – TBA
375
Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates
376
Index
378
vii
List of tables
Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues
5
Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
12
Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks
19
Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level
20
Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings
22
Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation
24
Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating
25
Table - 8: Evidence types
27
Table - 9: Minimum values of average daylight factor required.
60
Table - 10: Daylighting uniformity criteria.
61
Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met.
62
Table - 12: View out building specific requirements.
63
Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.
64
Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.
65
Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met.
66
Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
68
Table - 17: VOC criteria by product type
77
Table - 18: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings
96
Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings
98
Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings
98
Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law Courts buildings
99
Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types
100
Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions
102
Table - 24: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale
116
Table - 25: Innovation credits
117
Table - 26: Best Practice Energy Efficient Measures in Laboratories
153
Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy
load from significantly contributing systems.
158
Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. 168
viii
Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types
174
Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type
178
Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types
186
Table - 32: Table - 2Default occupancy rates by building type
189
Table - 33: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption. 197
Table - 34: Water efficient consumption levels by component type
200
Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from
manufacturers’ product information to complete the assessment.
201
Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type
219
Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points
220
Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking
226
Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type
227
Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings
230
Table - 41: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows
237
Table - 42: Applicable materials (building and associated hard-landscaping)
240
Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM ‘responsible
sourcing of materials’ points.
240
Table - 44: Green Guide rating points/element
246
Table - 45: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to
consider.
250
Table - 46: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks
259
Table - 47: Diversion from landfill benchmarks
260
Table - 48: Construction waste groups
264
Table - 49: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high-grade aggregate specified per application (where
present) that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate
268
Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value
294
Table - 51: Broad habitat types(Source: Countryside Survey 2007)
299
Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land
Cover Parcels plots’ in Great Britain.
301
Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity
312
Table - 54: Default system operational design life values
320
Table - 55: Average annual leakage rates for the UK
320
Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP
323
Table - 57: Excess oxygen conversion factors
328
ix
Table - 58: Definition of flood zones by country
x
345
List of figures
Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark
3
Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline
Plan of Work 2013
8
Figure 3: Example of certificate at design stage
376
Figure 4: Example of certificate at post construction stage
377
xi
About this Scheme Document
This document is the technical guide for the 2014 version of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. It describes an
environmental performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in the UK can be assessed and achieve a
BREEAM New Construction rating.
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM
Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM
Operations Manual, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM licence. This document should be used by nonBREEAM Assessors for reference purposes only.
xii
Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document
This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the
publication date for each issue of this document is provided below.
Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions are not
identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available separately. BREEAM
Assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM Assessor's Extranet. The list of changes is also available to
other parties on request; please email [email protected].
Scheme document
Issue number
Date of Issue
SD5076
0.1 (DRAFT)
11/02/2014
xiii
blank page
Introduction
Introduction
1
Introduction
BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s first sustainability rating scheme
for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in building design,
construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a
network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps
clients measure and reduce the environmental impacts of their buildings and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets.
To-date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 260,000 building assessments across the building life cycle and it is being
applied in over 50 countries.
Aims of BREEAM
To mitigate the life cycle impacts of buildings on the environment
To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits
To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings
To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains.
Objectives of BREEAM
To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact
To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of
buildings and the wider built environment.
To define a robust, cost-effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations.
To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of
buildings.
To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of buildings with
a reduced life cycle impact on the environment.
To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives.
BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles:
Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts.
Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality.
Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions.
Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous
performance standard for defining environmental quality.
Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered.
Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the ‘local’ context including
regulation, climate and sector.
Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding and
accessibility.
Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label.
Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy
and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs.
Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the
‘Sustainability of Construction Works’ prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical Committee
CEN/TC 350.
Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the
underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market
capability).
2
Introduction
The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE
Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These
schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators
(NSOs), across a range of countries.
For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.com.
The UK BREEAM Schemes
BRE Global Limited is the National Scheme Operator of BREEAM in the UK. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM
schemes, each designed to assess the environmental performance of buildings at various stages in the life cycle, and these
include:
BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings
BREEAM New Construction for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings
BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use
BREEAM Refurbishment for domestic and, from summer 2014, non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments
Independent BREEAM Assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment
using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools.
Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate
provides formal verification that the Assessor has completed an assessment of a building in accordance with the
requirements of the scheme and its quality standards and procedures.
A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a building’s BREEAM rating, at the time of certification,
accurately reflects its performance against the BREEAM standard.
Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of a building can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain
the certification mark, (see below) or by searching the BREEAM buildings listings on www.greenbooklive.com. Examples of a
BREEAM UK New Construction certificate can be found in Appendix H.
Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark
Ensuring quality and consistency
All BREEAM Schemes are developed and operated by National Scheme Operators in accordance with the Code for a
Sustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirements
which define an integrated approach to the design, management, evaluation and certification of the environmental, social
and economic impacts of the built environment.
3
Introduction
The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the
requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a
common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, whilst
ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices.
The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM
Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board.
To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain scheme
operations accredited to International Standards. In the UK, BRE Global Limited is accredited by the United Kingdom
Accreditation Service (UKAS) to:
BS EN ISO 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) for
BREEAM Assessors.
BS EN 45011 (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAM
assessment process.
BRE Global Limited is also certified to ISO 9001 for all its BREEAM related activities.
As a certification body accredited by UKAS, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The
operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review.
The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are
acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly.
The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited’s
standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the
development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.
4
Introduction
The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification scheme for new
buildings.
The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the environment in a
robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by clients and their project
teams at key stages in the design and construction process.
This enables the client, through the BREEAM Assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and
reflect the performance of their new building against best practice in an independent and robust manner.
This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of
environmental issues see Table - 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label (section 3
describes how a BREEAM rating is calculated).
Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues
Management
Health and wellbeing
Project brief and design
Life cycle cost and service life
planning
Responsible construction
practices
Commissioning and handover
Aftercare
Energy
Visual comfort
Indoor air quality
Safe containment in laboratories
Thermal comfort
Acoustic performance
Safety and security
Transport
Reduction of energy use and
carbon emissions
Energy monitoring
External lighting
Low carbon design
Energy efficient cold storage
Energy efficient transportation
systems
Energy efficient laboratory
systems
Energy efficient equipment
Drying space
Water
Materials
Water consumption
Water monitoring
Water leak detection
Water efficient equipment
Waste
Public transport accessibility
Proximity to amenities
Cyclist facilities
Maximum car parking capacity
Travel plan
Life cycle impacts
Hard landscaping and boundary protection
Responsible sourcing of materials
Insulation
Designing for durability and resilience
Material efficiency
Land use and ecology
5
Introduction
Construction waste management
Recycled aggregates
Operational waste
Speculative floor and ceiling
finishes
Adaptation to climate change
Functional adaptability
Pollution
Innovation
Impact of refrigerants
NOx emissions
Surface water run-off
Reduction of night time light
pollution
Reduction of noise pollution
6
Site selection
Ecological value of site and protection of
ecological features
Minimising impact on existing site ecology
Enhancing site ecology
Long term impact on biodiversity
Innovation
Introduction
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New
Construction scheme
Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme via the BREEAM Assessor is essential for
ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new build procurement process. Without this, the ability to cost
effectively optimise the building’s environmental performance and achieve the desired BREEAM rating will be compromised.
Appointing a BREEAM Assessor or Accredited Professional early in the project will help in achieving the target rating without
undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and potential solutions.
7
Introduction
Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work
2013
8
Introduction
Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and the
RIBA Outline Plan of Work 2013.
This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM Assessor.
Clients can view up-to-date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Accredited
Professionals at Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com.
It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the
opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the procurement process. This means that the client,
design team, principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play
throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified
BREEAM rating.
The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this, BRE
Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM Assessor and/or BREEAM Accredited
Professional no later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner where practical. This
will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low
or no cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible.
9
Introduction
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction
Scheme
This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to:
1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating
2. Enable BRE global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM Assessors assessment report, in accordance
with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited
3. As an aid for BREEAM Accredited Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in terms of defining,
monitoring and successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating
4. As a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being BREEAM assessed.
The scheme document is split into six parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Introduction (section 1)
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version (section 2)
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildingsScoring, including minimum standards (section 3)
The BREEAM evidential requirements (section 4)
Assessment criteria (sections 5 - 14)
Appendices (A - H).
The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK New
Construction Scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to H provide additional scoping guidance for specific building and
project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check whether this is the correct BREEAM
Scheme to use for their project.
The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building’s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the
BREEAM rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section
weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and ‘credits’, including BREEAM ‘Innovation credits’,
and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating.
Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, actual building performance must be determined by
the BREEAM Assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools.
The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and
forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a
description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of building information produced
during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing
forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment.
The Assessment criteria section includes the 51 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each
issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates compliance
(using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available BREEAM credits.
The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose
which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM
issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be
achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in the section Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings).
Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows:
10
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme
Introduction
1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issue
forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards.
2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures/mitigates.
3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good/best practice performance level benchmark(s) and criteria. Where the
building complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM Assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM
credits can be awarded. Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where a building demonstrates that it meets
Exemplary Level Criteria, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details).
Up to a maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.
4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This
can include tables of benchmarks or building type specific performance criteria.
5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the
main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular building or
project type, e.g. shell only.
6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM
credits achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance
on how non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria.
7. Evidence: This section describes the type(s) of project information that must be provided by the design team/client and
given to the BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the building’s performance against the assessment criteria and
so justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. Section 4, the BREEAM evidential requirements provides
further guidance on evidential requirements.
8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment
criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be
of use in addressing the issue.
The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM 2014 scheme or its assessment
criteria.
1For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues may not be
applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a laboratory.
11
Scope
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
scheme version
The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new nondomestic buildings at the design and construction stages. ‘New Construction’ is defined as development that results in a new
standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or use for the first time upon
completion of the works.
This BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United Kingdom
only.
Type of buildings that can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New
Construction 2014 scheme version
The non-domestic building types which can be assessed and rated using this scheme version are outlined in Table - 2.
Additional guidance for some of the building types listed is also provided in the appendices (refer to the footnotes).
Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
Sector
Building type
Commercial
Offices
General office buildings
Offices with research and development areas (i.e.
category 1 labs only)
Industrial
Industrial unit – warehouse storage/distribution
Industrial unit – process/manufacturing/vehicle servicing
Retail
Shop/shopping centre
Retail park/warehouse
‘Over the counter’ service provider e.g. financial, estate
and employment agencies and betting offices
Showroom
Restaurant, café and drinking establishment
Hot food takeaway
Education1
Pre-school
Schools and sixth form colleges
Further education/vocational colleges
Higher education institutions
Healthcare2
Teaching/specialist hospitals
General acute hospitals
Community and mental health hospitals
Public (non-housing)
Description
1For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and
Education buildings.
2For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types.
12
Scope
Sector
Building type
Description
GP surgeries
Health centres and clinics
Prisons1
High security prison
Standard secured prison
Young offender institution and juvenile prisons
Local prison
Holding centre
Law Courts
Law courts
Crown and criminal courts
County courts
Magistrates’ courts
Civil justice centres
Family courts
Youth courts
Combined courts
Multi-residential
accommodation/Supported
living facility2
Residential
institutions (long
term stay)
Residential care home
Sheltered accommodation
Residential college/school (halls of residence)
Local authority secure residential accommodation
Military barracks
Other
Residential
institutions (short
term stay)
Hotel, hostel, boarding and guest house
Secure training centre
Residential training centre
Non residential
institutions
Art gallery, museum
Library
Day centre, hall/civic/community centre
Place of worship
Assembly and
leisure
Cinema
Theatre/music/concert hall
Exhibition/conference hall
Indoor or outdoor sports, fitness and recreationcentre
(with/without pool)
Other
Transport hub (coach/bus station and above ground rail
station)
Research and development (category 2 or 3
laboratories - non-higher education)
Crèche
1The Prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks or a hybrid
of building types.
2For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential
buildings for further detail of scope
13
Scope
Mixed use developments and building types
Developments which consist of a number of separate buildings of differing functional types, or a single building containing a
number of different functions e.g. office and retail or retail and GP surgery, will typically require an assessment and therefore
BREEAM rating and certificate for each individual building or functional use within a single building.
This is necessary as BREEAM defines differing criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building type,
function and use. Therefore to maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a separate
assessment score and rating are required for each building type function or use in the development,
Further guidance on how to define mixed-use developments for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment can be found in
Guidance Note TBC – Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units),
Similar building types (or units) on the same site
It is possible to assess and rate a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building
development, within one BREEAM assessment report. Further guidance on this type of assessment can be found in Guidance
Note TBC – Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units),
Shell and core/speculative buildings
Non fitted-out ‘speculative’ new buildings, often referred to as shell and core buildings, can be assessed using the BREEAM UK
New Construction scheme. Further details on the application of the scheme to these types of new building can be found in
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments.
Simple building developments
Less complex building types can be assessed using a set of ‘simple buildings’ criteria, defined within this BREEAM UK New
Construction Scheme.
Further details on the application of this scheme to ’simple buildings’ can be found in Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK
New Construction simple building assessments For each individual assessment issue, guidance on ‘simple buildings’
compliance is provided in the Compliance Notes section.
14
Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme
version
Scope
Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK
New Construction 2014 scheme version
Building types not listed in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version – Table - 2: will fall into one of
two categories, those where a current but separate BREEAM New Construction scheme document exists and those which
currently do not have an existing, up-to-date scheme document.
Other current BREEAM New Construction schemes
Data centres: 2010 version
There is a separate BREEAM UK New Construction 2010 scheme version and technical manual for Data Centres (SD5068); the
2010 version should be used for the assessment and certification of data centres in the UK.
Other building types not defined
If a particular building type requiring assessment is not listed above or in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
scheme version – Table - 2: , it can still be assessed using BREEAM UK New Construction. Such building types will require the
development of a set of tailored assessment criteria, i.e. a BREEAM Bespoke assessment. In such instances BREEAM Assessors
and clients should contact BRE Global for advice and information on how to proceed.
15
Scope
Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK
New Construction 2014 scheme version
This BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts arising from a newly
constructed building development (including external site areas), at the following life cycle stages:
1. New Build Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
2. New Build Post-Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
Design Stage
The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new building’s performance at the design stage of the
life cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of operations on site. The BREEAM rating at this
stage is labelled as ‘interim’ because it does not represent the building’s final, new construction BREEAM performance.
To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is
available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the building’s performance against the criteria defined in this
Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed
design stages.
Post-Construction Stage (PCS)
The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating confirms the final ‘as-built’ performance of the building at the new construction stage
of the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works.
There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage:
1. A post-construction review (PCR) of an interim design-stage assessment
2. A post-construction assessment (PCA)
A PCR serves to confirm that the building’s ‘as built’ performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at
the interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment
and rating is required, a full post construction stage assessment can be conducted.
16
Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme
version
Scope
Building life cycle stages not covered by the
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version
The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is not designed for, and therefore not appropriate to assess the environmental
impacts of buildings at the following life cycle stages:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Existing building refurbishment and fit-out (see Appendix TBC for more information)
Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (refer to the BREEAM In-Use scheme)
Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)
Infrastructure projects (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)
Part new-build, part refurbishment projects
TBC
17
Scope
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings
18
Scope
There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new construction project assessed using
BREEAM, these are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The BREEAM rating level benchmarks
The minimum BREEAM standards
The environmental section weightings
The BREEAM assessment issues and credits
How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building is summarised on the following pages. This is
followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating.
The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2014 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are as follows:
Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks
BREEAM Rating
% score
OUTSTANDING
≥ 85
EXCELLENT
≥ 70
VERY GOOD
≥ 55
GOOD
≥ 45
PASS
≥ 30
UNCLASSIFIED
< 30
The BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly
constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of new nondomestic buildings in the UK.
In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Outstanding: Less than top 1% of UK new non-domestic buildings (innovator)
Excellent: Top 10% of UK new non-domestic buildings (best practice)
Very Good: Top 25% of UK new non-domestic buildings (advanced good practice)
Good: Top 50% of UK new non-domestic buildings (intermediate good practice)
Pass: Top 75% of UK new non-domestic buildings (standard good practice)
An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to meet either
the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to
achieve at least a Pass rating.
.
19
Scope
Minimum standards
To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a ‘balanced score-card’ approach to the assessment and rating of building
performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded, i.e.
non-compliance in one area can be off-set through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating.
However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not over-looked in pursuit of a particular
rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas e.g. energy, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in
mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as
levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level.
To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards,
detailed in Table - 4 below, applicable to that rating level complied with.
Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level
Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level
BREEAM issue
Pass
Good
Very Good
Excellent
Outstanding
Man 01: Project brief
and design
None
None
One credit
(Stakeholder
consultation
(project delivery))
One credit
(Stakeholder
consultation
(project delivery))
One credit
(Stakeholder
consultation
(project delivery))
Man 03: Responsible
construction practices
Criterion
2
None
Criterion
2
None
Criterion 2
None
Criterion 2
One credit
(Considerate
construction)
Criterion 2
Two credits
(Considerate
construction)
Man 04:
Commissioning and
handover
None
None
None
Criterion 9
Criterion 9
Man 5: Aftercare
None
None
None
One credit
(Seasonal
commissioning
One credit
(Seasonal
commissioning)
Ene 01: Reduction of
energy use and
carbon emissions
None
None
None
Five credits
Eight credits
Ene 02: Energy
monitoring
None
None
One credit
(First sub-metering
credit)
One credit
(First sub-metering
credit)
One credit
(First sub-metering
credit)
Wat 01: Water
consumption
None
One
credit
One credit
One credit
Two credits
Wat 02: Water
monitoring
None
Criterion
1 only
Criterion 1 only
Criterion 1 only
Criterion 1 only
20
Minimum standards
Scope
Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level
BREEAM issue
Pass
Good
Very Good
Excellent
Outstanding
Mat 03: Responsible
sourcing of materials
TBC
TBC
TBC
TBC
TBC
Wst 01: Construction
waste management
None
None
None
None
One credit
Wst 03: Operational
waste
None
None
None
One credit
One credit
LE 03: Minimising
impact on existing site
ecology
None
None
One credit
One credit
One credit
21
Scope
Environmental section weightings
Environmental weightings are fundamental to any building environmental assessment method as they provide a means of
defining, and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues. BREEAM uses an explicit weighting system derived
from a combination of consensus based weightings and ranking by a panel of experts. The outputs from this exercise are
then used to determine the relative value of the environmental sections used in BREEAM and their contribution to the overall
BREEAM score.
This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it’s supporting
procedural documents. These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built
Environment. The same ranking of impacts used in BREEAM underpins the scoring mechanisms in the BRE Green Guide to
Specification and the BRE Environmental Profiling Method for construction materials.
Table - 5 outlines the weightings for each of the nine environmental sections included in the BREEAM UK New Construction
Scheme.
Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings
Environmental section
Weighting
Fully fitted out
Shell only
Shell and core only
Management
12%
12.50%
11%
15%
10%
10.50%
Energy
15%
14.50%
15%
Transport
9%
11.50%
10%
Water
7%
4%
7.50%
Materials
13.5%
17.50%
14.50%
Waste
8.5%
11%
9.50%
Land Use and Ecology
10%
13%
11%
Pollution
10%
6%
11%
Total
100%
100%
100%
Innovation (additional)
10%
10%
10%
Each of the above environmental sections consists of a differing number of assessment issues and BREEAM credits (as
described below and defined in detail in the technical sections of this Scheme Document).
22
Scope
BREEAM UK New Construction consists of fifty one individual assessment issues spanning the nine environmental categories,
plus a tenth category called ‘innovation’ (described below). Each issue addresses a specific building related environmental
impact or issue and has a number of ‘credits’ assigned to it.
‘BREEAM credits’ are awarded where a building demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for
that issue, i.e. it has mitigated an impact or, in the case of the health and wellbeing section, addressed a specific building
occupant-related issue, e.g. good thermal comfort, daylight or acoustics.
The number of ‘credits’ available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for
a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple ‘credits’
available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building
performance are rewarded with a higher number of ‘credits’.
It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance
against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range
of embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define
overall targets, it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy
objectives for individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and
credit levels in this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs.
Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation
It is one of the aims of BREEAM to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAM does this
by making additional ‘credits’ available for the recognition of sustainability related benefits or performance levels which are
currently not recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAM is rewarding buildings
that go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability i.e. where the building or its procurement has
demonstrated innovation.
Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance and, in
addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices.
There are two ways in which BREEAM awards ‘innovation credits’ to recognise innovation in building design and procurement.
The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue i.e. going beyond the standard
BREEAM assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance
criteria. The second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project’s BREEAM Assessor to have a
particular building technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the
application is successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an ‘innovation credit’ can be awarded.
An additional 1% can be added to a building’s overall score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved. The maximum number of
’innovation credits’ that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for
‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building’s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be
awarded at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Inn 01 Innovation section for more detail.
23
Scope
A BREEAM Assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. An indication
of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The PreAssessment Estimator is available from the BREEAM website www.breeam.com.
The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table - 6
1. For each of BREEAM’s nine environmental sections the number of ‘credits’ awarded must be determined by the BREEAM
Assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the technical sections of this document).
2. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved is then calculated for each section.
3. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting. This gives
the overall environmental section score.
4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score.
5. The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have
been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved.
6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved (up to a maximum of
10%).
Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation
BREEAM Section
Credits
Achieved
Credits
Available
% of Credits
Achieved
Section
Weighting (fully
fitted)
Section
Score
Management
10
22
45%
0.12
5.45%
Health and
Wellbeing
8
10
80.00%
0.15
12.00%
Energy
16
30
53.33%
0.15
7.99%
Transport
5
9
55.56%
0.09
5.00%
Water
5
9
55.56%
0.07
3.89%
Materials
6
12
50.00%
0.135
6.75%
Waste
3
7
42.86%
0.085
3.64%
Land Use and
Ecology
5
10
50.00%
0.10
5.00%
Pollution
5
13
38.50%
0.10
3.85%
Innovation
2
10
20.00%
0.10
2%
Final BREEAM score
55.57%
BREEAM Rating
VERY GOOD
24
Scope
Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating
Minimum Standards for
BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating
Achieved?
Man 01: Project brief and design
Y
Man 03: Responsible construction practices
Y
Ene 02: Energy monitoring
Y
Wat 01: Water consumption
Y
Wat 02: Water monitoring
Y
Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials
Y
LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology
Y
25
The BREEAM evidential requirements
This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliance
with BREEAM issues.
Why does BREEAM require evidence?
BREEAM is a third party assessment and certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards. Operating
to international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAM are run in a consistent and reliable manner. The
BREEAM Assessor's assessment report and the BRE Global Quality Assurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM,
ensuring consistency of, and confidence in, the BREEAM rating awarded by the assessor.
To maintain this consistency and credibility all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project
information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international
standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a
certification outcome is challenged.
The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role
It is the BREEAM Assessor who determines the BREEAM rating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor’s
audit against the criteria defined in the Technical Manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM certificate issued by BRE Global
provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) has
been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to give
confidence to the client in the assessor’s performance and processes in determining a BREEAM rating.
It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a
competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that
the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All
evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produce by the assessor and made available on request
from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks.
Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and
certification. BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in a Guidance Note to be
provided on the BREEAM website.
Evidence types
Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many
instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of
demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required,
although some issues do require specific documents to be provided.
The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to
demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance with multiple criteria.
To assist project teams and the BREEAM assessor in their collation of building information at each stage of assessment, the
different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below.
These evidence types fall broadly into three categories:
26
1. General evidence type
2. Specific evidence type
3. Other evidence type.
For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types.
General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project. One or a
mix of these types of building information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the BREEAM issues
and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment.
General BREEAM evidence types are listed below in Table - 8, and are not specifically listed in the ’ Evidence‘ section found
within each BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the
assessor to ensure that the evidence provided demonstrates compliance.
Specific evidence is defined building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for the
BREEAM credit sought. In most cases it will be the only type of evidence capable of verifying compliance. Where specific
evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the Quality Assurance checks will identify
non-conformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would be a copy of the building regulations
output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01.
When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the ‘Evidence’ section for both final and interim
stages of assessment. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific evidence requirements.
Although the ‘Evidence’ section of each issue highlights the evidence required to demonstrate compliance with particular
criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with that criteria. Additional ‘general
evidence types’ may be required to confirm full compliance with the criteria. For example Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance
with criteria 1-5 at the design stage, a copy of the Mat 01 tool is listed in the ‘Evidence’ table. However, in addition to the Mat
01 tool, further evidence is required to demonstrate how this tool has been completed, i.e. general evidence types such as
building specifications confirming the materials to be used.
Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client/design
team is not listed in Table - 8 or the ‘Evidence’ table for each issue. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification,
undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or
better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence.
Table - 8: Evidence types
Ref
Document/evidence
type
Description/notes
E1
As constructed
information
Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed.
This will comprise a mixture of ‘as-built’ information/drawings and surveys from
specialist subcontractors and the ‘final construction issue’ from design team members.
E2
Building information
model (BIM)
The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information/evidence of
compliance.
E3
BRE Global
correspondence
reference number
For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessors technical
query.
E4
BREEAM Assessor’s
site inspection
report
A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site/building to
confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor’s site inspection report will be
distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form of evidence of
compliance in its own right, and it may include photographs taken by the assessor as
part of the survey.
27
Ref
Document/evidence
type
Description/notes
E5
Building contract(s)
The contract (or excerpts/clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for the
construction of the project. In some instances, the Building Contract may contain design
duties for specialist subcontractors and/or design team members.
E6
Certificates of
compliance (third
party)
Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC
(environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration),
Considerate Constructors etc.
E7
Communication
records
Formal communication records between/from relevant project stakeholders and/or
other third parties confirming an appointment, action or outcome. This may be in the
form of a letter, meeting minutes, email correspondence, publication or another form
of media (see also additional guidance on following pages).
E8
Communication
strategy
The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate
effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both
informally and at information exchanges
E9
Computer aided
modelling
results/outputs
Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing,
ventilation modelling etc.
E10
Construction
specification
The specification for the project/building. 1
E11
Construction stage
data/information
For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning
records/reports etc.
E12
Contractual tree
A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the parties
undertaking the roles required on a project.
E13
Cost information
Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.
E14
Design drawings2
Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated architectural,
structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage designs.
E15
Design programme
A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It is
aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative
nature of the design process, particularly in the early stages.
E16
Design
responsibility matrix
A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project and
when. This document sets out the extent of any performance specified design.
E17
Feasibility study
Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the site or in a
1For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report.
2Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified
legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).
28
Ref
Document/evidence
type
Description/notes
specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be addressed.
E18
Final project brief
The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept Design and any
briefing decisions made during this stage.
E19
Other third party
information
For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data/details, manufacturers’
literature, government /EU standards or codes, EU labelling.
E20
Professional
services contract
An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing,
feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice.
E21
Professional
specialist reports
Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys/studies/test results, e.g.
contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report, site
investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan, low and zero carbon technologies study,
transportation analysis, commissioning reports, passive design analysis report, free
cooling analysis report, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan
etc.
E22
Project Execution or
Quality Plan
The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration between the project lead and
lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project
team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to
develop the design.
E23
Project programme
The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities
of a project.
E24
Project roles table
A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages during
which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles.
E25
Project strategy
The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the design and,
in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples
include strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operational,
fire engineering, building control, technology, health and safety, construction, travel plan,
sustainable procurement plan.
E26
Risk assessment
The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a project and
how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for managing each risk.
E27
Schedule of services
A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the project
which is incorporated into their professional services contract.
E28
Strategic or initial
project brief
The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project
objectives, the client’s business case and, in certain instances, in response to site
feasibility studies.
29
BRE Global Ltd endeavours to ensure that BREEAM requires only types or categories of information which already exist as a
result of the design and procurement process for a new building. This information should therefore be readily available from
the project team and easily referenced. The assessor is responsible for auditing the evidence as it is provided to them and is
not required or expected to tailor evidence; doing so is likely to result in non-conformities and a delay in certification as the
conflict of interest that may arise is investigated.
Communication records
Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the author’s identity and role, the date and
the recipient(s) identity. Formal letters of correspondence must be on company/organisation headed note-paper with a
signature (electronic signatures are acceptable). Meeting minutes must include date, location and attendee information
(names, organisations and roles), along with a record of the meeting and agreed actions.
Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment – Design
stage
At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or emails to demonstrate intent to comply with
BREEAM criteria (provided they meet the requirements for the communication records above). Such evidence must also make
clear the actions and evidence (or an understanding thereof) that will be undertaken and provided to ensure the projects
ongoing compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment, i.e. post-construction. This is to ensure that the party who
makes the commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliance
with BREEAM at the final stage of assessment.
Whilst letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and
established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity
or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be
available to confirm compliance.
Written commitments at the final stage of assessment – Postconstruction
Evidence supplied at the post-construction stage must be reflective of the completed building and must therefore
demonstrate what has actually been implemented. For example if sub-meters have been specified at design stage, evidence
at the post construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate evidence may
be a photograph or as-built drawings showing the location of the sub-meters. Letters of commitment cannot be used to
demonstrate compliance at the final, post-construction stage of assessment. The only exception to this is where the criteria
require an action to take place post-construction, i.e. after handover and possibly during the building operation. An example
could be a letter from the building owner/occupier making a commitment to conduct post-occupancy evaluation. As with
letters of commitment at the design stage, the BREEAM Assessor must not award BREEAM credits where they have a reason
to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect a formal documentation, e.g.
a schedule of services and/or professional services contract.
30
Management
Management
31
Management
Number of credits available
Minimum standards
4
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage an integrated design process that optimises building performance.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Stakeholder consultation (2 credits)
Sustainability Champion (2 credits).
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit – Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)
1. Prior to completion of the Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2), the project delivery stakeholders have met to identify and
define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for each of the key phases of project delivery.
2. In defining the roles and responsibilities for each key phase of the project, the following must be considered:
a. End user requirements
b. Aims of the design and design strategy
c. Particular installation and construction requirements/limitations
d. Occupiers budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems
e. Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals
f. Requirements for the production of project and end user documentation
g. Requirements for commissioning, training and aftercare support.
3. The project team demonstrate how the project delivery stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation
process has influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief, including if appropriate, the Project Execution Plan,
Communication Strategy, and the Concept Design.
One credit - Stakeholder consultation (third party)
4. Prior to completion of the Concept Design stage, all relevant third parties have been consulted by the design team on
the minimum consultation content.
5. The project must demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation exercise have
influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief and Concept Design.
6. Prior to completion of the Technical Design (RIBA Stage 4), consultation feedback has been given to, and received by, all
relevant parties.
Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law Courts and Major Transport Node building types only:
(criterion 7)
7. The consultation exercise used a method carried out by an independent party.
One credit - Sustainability Champion (design)
8. An a Sustainability Champion has been appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAM performance
target(s) for the project. The design stage Sustainability Champion is appointed to perform this role during the project
preparation and brief stage, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013.
9. The defined BREEAM performance target(s) has been contractually agreed between the client and design/project team
32
Management
no later than the Concept Design stage.
10. To achieve this credit at the interim (design) assessment stage, the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) must be
demonstrably achieved by the project design. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessor’s design stage certification
report.
One credit - Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress)
11. The Sustainability Champion criteria 8, 9 and 10 have been achieved.
12. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAM performance target(s)
throughout the design process and formally report progress to the client and design team.
To do this the Sustainability Champion must attend key project/design team meetings during the Concept Design, Developed
Design and Technical Design stages, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013, reporting during, and prior to, completion of
each stage, as a minimum.
Checklists and tables
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Stakeholder consultation (project delivery) - (1 credit)
1. Criteria 1 to 3
Stakeholder consultation (third party) - (1 credit)
2. Criteria 4 to 6
3. Criterion 7 is not applicable.
Exemplary level criteria
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for
this BREEAM issue.
Sustainability Champion (design) - (1 credit)
4. Criteria 8 to 10.
Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) - (1 credit)
Country specific
33
Management
Ref
Terms
Description
CN3
Country specific
guidance
No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
CN4
Minimum
consultation content
Minimum consultation content will be dependent on the building but would
typically include the following:
1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics)
2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building
occupants and visitors/users)
3. Management and operational implications
4. Maintenance resources implications
5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic/transport impact
6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the
community/appropriate stakeholders, if relevant/appropriate to building
type.
7. Compliance with statuary (national/local) consultation requirements.
In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes:
8. How the building/grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and
provide a range of social spaces appropriate to pupils’, students’ and other
users’ needs.
In the case of building types containing technical areas/functions, e.g. laboratories,
workshops etc., minimum content also includes:
9. The end-users broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate
sizing, optimisation and integration of equipment and systems.
CN5
Assessing and
awarding the
available credits for
a Sustainability
Champion
There is an additional credit for appointing a Sustainability Champion during the
construction and handover phase (see BREEAM issue Man 03 Responsible
construction practices). The key aim of the credit in Man 03 is to encourage and
reward contractors and project teams that appoint a Sustainability Champion and
therefore ensure continuation of the sustainability objectives during the
construction phase and that the constructed building meets the client's target
BREEAM rating.
CN6
BREEAM related
performance
targets
If, at Post Construction, the BREEAM performance targets set at the end of the
Concept Stage have not been achieved, the credits awarded at the interim ‘design’
certification stage for appointing the BREEAM Sustainability Champion must be
withheld in the final assessment. See Relevant definitions.
General
Methodology
None.
34
Management
Evidence
Criteria
Interim design stage
Final post-construction stage
All
One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-3
Consultation plan setting out the process and
scope of the consultation.
As per interim design stage
Additional information
Relevant definitions
BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP)
An individual qualified and accredited by BRE as a specialist in built environment sustainability, environmental design
and assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities,
set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally
assessed. For a list and contact details of BREEAM Accredited Professionals visit http://www.greenbooklive.com/
BREEAM related performance targets
BREEAM performance targets refer specifically to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. This does not
necessarily include individual targeted BREEAM issues/credits, which may be traded over the course of the project as it
evolves. In agreeing a BREEAM target it is recommended that individual BREEAM issues, credits and criteria are
targeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costly
alterations to the design at a later stage.
Communication strategy
The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as a strategy that sets out when the project team
will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various
parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges.
Consultation feedback
This is feedback which focuses on the stakeholder suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation
outcomes. This includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed
design and building operation/use.
35
Management
Independent party
With respect to compliance with the criterion relating to using an 'independent party', the client/design team needs to
demonstrates that either:
1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation exercise, using a
compliant method. Examples of independent third party compliant methods include the Design Quality Indicator 1
(DQI),and the Achieving Excellence Design Evaluation Toolkit (AEDET) in Healthcare buildings. Or alternatively;
2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building e.g. the project
architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the
consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the
design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of
independence.
Key design team meetings
Key design team meetings can be defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the
building’s proposed, design and its construction in accordance with the design (and therefore the building’s
sustainability impacts and BREEAM performance), are discussed and made. These meetings would typically include
representatives from at least three of the parties listed below.
1. Representatives of the client/developer
2. The principal contractor
3. The architect
4. Structural engineers
5. Building services engineers
6. Cost consultants
7. Environmental consultants
8. Project management consultants.
Key phases
The definition of key phases of project delivery includes the following:
Concept Design
Developed Design
Construction
Commissioning and Handover
In Use occupation.
Project delivery stakeholders
The purpose of criterion 1 is to reflect the need to consider the input of all the major project stakeholders from the
earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives.
Project delivery stakeholders therefore include the client, the building occupier (where known), the design team and
the principal contractor. With regards to contractors’ involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating
sustainable design solutions, commenting/inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design
solutions and their impact on programming, cost etc.
BREEAM recognises that traditionally for some projects the contractor for the works might not be appointed at the
early stages of the project and therefore compliance with criterion 1 would not be possible. In these instances, to
ensure the aim of the criteria is upheld, provided that a suitably experienced person with substantial
construction/contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved prior to appointment of the
contractor, criterion 1 will be met. A suitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for
this stage or a construction project manager.
Project Execution Plan
The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines a Project Execution Plan as a plan produced in collaboration between the project
lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project
Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to as a
'project quality plan'.
1The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk
36
Management
Relevant third parties. (see criterion 4)
This includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Actual/intended building users (if known) including facilities management (FM) staff or those responsible for the
day-to-day operation of the building and grounds.
2. Representative consultation group from the existing community (if the building is a new development in an
existing community) or for a community still under construction.
3. Existing partnerships and networks that have knowledge and experience from existing buildings of the same
type.
4. Potential users of any shared facilities, e.g. operators of clubs and community groups.
AND the following where relevant:
5. In educational buildings, representatives of Local Education Authority, Board of Governors etc.
6. Local or national historic/heritage groups (over and above any requirements relating to statutory consultees).
7. Specialist service and maintenance contractors/representatives where the building function has particular
technical requirements in complex environments, e.g. buildings containing laboratories.
Sustainability Champion (design)
With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, an Sustainability Champion is an individual qualified
and accredited to provide the design team with advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design and
environmental assessment (including BREEAM). They will facilitate the team's efforts to successfully schedule activities,
set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve the target BREEAM rating when the design is formally
assessed by the BREEAM Assessor. The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated
design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the
desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this issue focus on
achieving this objective during the preparation and brief, and design stages of the project. Individuals who are
accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an approved Sustainability
Champion:
BREEAM Accredited Professionals.
Providers of schemes/qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed
under the definition of approved Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global.
Other information
None.
37
Management
Minimum standards
4
No
Aim
To deliver whole life value from investment and promote economic sustainability by recognising and encouraging the use of
life cycle costing and service life planning to improve design, specification and through-life maintenance and operation.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Two credit - Elemental life cycle cost (LCC)
1. An elemental life cycle cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out, at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to Concept Design - RIBA
Stage 2) together with any design option appraisals in line with 'Standardized method of life cycle costing for
construction procurement' PD 156865:2008 1.
2. The LCC analysis shows:
a. An outline LCC plan for the project based on the buildings basic structure and envelope, appraising a range of
options and based on multiple cash flow scenarios e.g. 20, 30, 50+ years;
b. The fabric and servicing strategy for the project outlining services component and fit-out options (if applicable) over
a 15 year period, in the form of an 'elemental LCC Plan'.
One credit - Component level LCC Plan
3. A component level LCC plan has been developed by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to Technical Design – RIBA
Stage 4) in line with PD 156865:2008 and includes the following component types (where present):
a. Envelope, e.g. cladding, windows, and/or roofing
b. Services, e.g. heat source cooling source, and/or controls
c. Finishes, e.g. walls, floors and/or ceilings
d. External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping, boundary protection.
4. Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC plan has been
used to influence building and systems design/specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value.
One credit - Capital cost reporting
5. Report via the BREEAM assessment reporting tool, the predicted capital cost for the building in pounds per square
metre (£k/m2).
None.
38
Management
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Elemental life cycle cost, capital cost reporting and maintenance strategy,criteria 1
to 2 and 5
apply.
Component level LCC plan , criteria 3 to 4
Both options: The plan must include all component types to be installed by the
developer.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Capital cost reporting - (1 credit)
1. Criterion 5 is applicable.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Appropriate
examples
See criterion 4.
The option(s) selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised
and critical value maximised must be appropriate in terms of its relative impact on
project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area).
CN5
Pre-defined
specifications
Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, the LCC
plan for this specification may be used to help demonstrate compliance.
CN6
Capital cost
reporting
At the design stage of assessment, where the information is not yet available, the
credit can be awarded where the client commits to providing this information for
the final stage of assessment.
General
Building type specific
CN7
Law Courts
buildings –
responsibility for
compliance
When considering this issue, the term project team includes the Ministry of Justice.
Responsibility for complying with the criteria of this issue may fall with any or all of
the project team members and it is likely that this will vary depending on the
procurement route used for the project.
39
Management
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
Final post -construction stage
All
1-2
Elemental life cycle cost plan
3-4
Component level life cycle cost plan
Life cycle cost (LCC)
The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a
methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreed
scope.
Elemental LCC plan
This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally at
building elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements,
comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates. It is expressed as cost per square meter of gross internal
floor area (GIFA) and presented for elemental analysis, aligned to the level of capital cost plans.
Predicted capital cost
TBC
Other information
Capital cost reporting
This information is collected to assist research into the cost and savings of developing sustainable/BREEAM assessed
buildings to inform the business case for sustainability and the ongoing development of BREEAM. All data submitted
will be treated as confidential and only used anonymously.
Component level LCC plan
A component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems, elements or
component levels during design development.
Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning at the feasibility stage requires the environment of the
building and other local conditions to be identified, and the fundamental requirements to be met in planning the
service life of the building. Decisions should be made on;
40
Management
the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life)
minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building’s design life
components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building.
When to undertake life cycle costing
Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the building or constructed asset’s life cycle, in particular during the project
planning, design and construction and also during the in-use phases. (For further information please refer to
standard PD 15865 Supplement to ISO: 15686-5.)
Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction
The objectives of the Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction procurement are to
provide:
1. A UK standard cost data structure for life cycle costing, which aligns with BS ISO 15686-5 and with the Building
Cost Information service (BCIS) Standard Form of Capital Cost Analysis (SFCA) and industry recognised occupancy
cost codes. (Refer to Annexes A, B and C) (http://www.rics.org/uk/ )
2. Life cycle costing practitioners with a standardised method of applying life cycle costing, applicable to the UK
construction industry and to the key stages of the procurement process.
3. Process mapping the life cycle costing stages – to help structure how to plan, generate, and interpret and present
the results for a variety of different purposes and levels of life cycle cost planning.
4. Instructions on how to define the client’s specific requirements for life cycle costing and the required outputs and
forms of reporting – and to decide on which method of economic evaluation to apply.
5. Simplification and demystification – by providing practical guidance, instructions and definitions, together with
informative worked examples on how to undertake life cycle costing (for construction).
6. An industry accepted methodology, to facilitate a more accurate, consistent and robust application of life cycle
costing estimation and option appraisals, thereby creating a more effective and robust basis for life cycle cost
analysis and benchmarking.
This document, PD 15865, also seeks to help eliminate confusion over scoping and terminology and to address
concerns over the uncertainty and risks that are undermining confidence in life cycle costs used for construction
procurement. (For further information please refer to standard PD 15865 Supplement to ISO: 15686-5 from
which this extract was sourced.)
1PD 15865:2008 Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement: a supplement to BS ISO 15686-5
Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing
41
Management
Minimum standards
6
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate, responsible
and accountable manner.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split in to four parts:
Environmental management (1 credit)
Construction stage Sustainability Champion (1 credit)
Considerate construction (up to 2 credits)
Monitoring of construction site impacts (2t credits).
One credit – Environmental management
1. The principal contractor operates an environmental management system (EMS) covering their main operations. The EMS
must be either:
a. be third party certified, to ISO 14001/EMAS or equivalent standard; or
b. have a structure that is in compliance with BS 8555 2003 and has reached phase four of the implementation stage,
‘implementation and operation of the environmental management system’, and has completed phase audits one to
four, as defined in BS 8555.
2. All site timber used in the project is sourced in accordance with the UK government’s Timber Procurement Policy,
seeRelevant definitions).
3. The principal contractor implements best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures on site in accordance
with Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 6 Working at construction and demolition sites.
One credit – Sustainability Champion (construction)
4. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliance with the relevant
sustainability performance/process criteria, and therefore BREEAM target(s), during the Construction, Handover and
Close Out stages (as defined by the RIBA Plan of Works 2013).
To do this the Sustainability Champion will ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carry out spot checks and,
frequently and without prior warning to monitor site activities, with the relevant authority to do so. The Sustainability
Champion will report on progress at relevant project team meetings including identifying potential areas of noncompliance and any action needed to mitigate.
5. The defined BREEAM performance target forms a requirement of the principal contractor's contract (See Compliance
note CN6).
6. To achieve this credit at the final post-construction stage of assessment, the BREEAM related performance target for
the project must be demonstrably achieved by the project. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM assessor’s final postconstruction stage certification report.
42
Management
Up to two credits - Considerate construction
7. Where the principal contractor has used a ‘compliant’ organisational, local or national considerate construction scheme
and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification.
The BREEAM credits can be awarded as follows:
a. One credit where the contractor achieves ‘compliance’ with the criteria of a compliant scheme.
b. Two credits where the contractor significantly exceeds ‘compliance’ with the criteria of the scheme.
Refer to theRelevant definitionssection for a list of compliant schemes and therefore how performance, as
determined by a compliant scheme, translates in to BREEAM credits.
Up to two credits - Monitoring of construction site impacts
8. Responsibility has been assigned to an individual(s) for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use, water
consumption and transport data (where measured) resulting from all on-site construction processes (and off site were
possible) throughout the build programme.
To ensure the robust collection of information, this individual(s) must have the appropriate authority and responsibility
to request and access the data required. Where appointed, the Sustainability Champion could perform this role.
One credit - Utility consumption
Energy consumption
9. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' energy consumption in kWh (and where
relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site
accommodation.
10. Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgCO2/project value) from the construction process via the BREEAM
scoring and reporting tool.
Water consumption
11. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' potable water consumption (m3) arising from
the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.
12. Using the collated data report the total net water consumption (m3), i.e. consumption minus any recycled water use,
from the construction process via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.
One credit - Transport of construction materials and waste
13. Monitor and record data on transport movements and impacts resulting from delivery of the majority of construction
materials to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum this must cover:
a. Transport of materials from the factory gate to the building site, including any transport, intermediate storage and
distribution, See Relevant definitions.
b. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as a minimum:
i. Materials used in major building elements (i.e. those defined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life cycle impacts), including
insulation materials.
ii. Ground works and landscaping materials.
c. Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing/recovery centre gate.
Scope of this monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's waste management
plan.
14. Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total fuel consumption (litres) and total carbon
dioxide emissions (kgCO2 eq), plus total distance travelled (km) via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
15. With reference to the considerate construction criterion 7, in addition to meeting the criteria for two credits the
contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of the compliant scheme to an exemplary level of practice.
None.
43
Management
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Environmental management (1 credit)
1. Criteria 1 to 3
Considerate construction (up to 2 credits)
2. Criterion 7
Monitoring of construction site impacts
Utility consumption (1 credit)
3. Criteria 8 to 12
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Site Clearance
The scope of this issue applies to the principal contractor and their scope of works.
If the scope of their works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of
work falls within the scope of the assessment and therefore the issue criteria.
CN5
Site timber and reusable formwork
See criterion 9.
Re-usable timber formwork itself does not automatically comply. All timber used in
the manufacture of the formwork must either be initially reclaimed, or sourced in
accordance with the UK government's Timber Procurement Policy.
CN6
Target setting
At present data from construction sites do not generally exist in enough detail to
set benchmarks and targets. BREEAM therefore does not set any requirements at
present in terms of specific targets for reducing energy, water and transport
consumption resulting from the construction process.
Whilst BREEAM does not require them, it is strongly recommended that site specific
targets are set and reported against.
Following adoption of widespread and consistent measurement and reporting
protocols for construction site impacts and collation of construction site data,
BREEAM is likely in future to establish consistent and complimentary targets as part
of demonstrating compliance with this BREEAM issue (see alsoAdditional
information).
General
44
Management
Ref
Terms
Description
CN7
Healthcare buildings
(NHS sites)
See criterion 1.
As a prerequisite of awarding any of the available credits for this issue, the principal
contractor must achieve the measure requiring operation of ‘An Environmental
Management System’ (as defined in criterion 1 One credit – Environmental
management).
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes
The following are defined as compliant schemes for the purpose of this BREEAM issue:
Considerate Constructors Scheme
To achieve BREEAM credits using the Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) and its Code of Considerate Practice,
the principal contractor must achieve scheme certification and a CCS score as follows:
1. One credit: a CCS score between 25 and 34*
2. Two credits: a CCS score between 35 and 39**
3. Exemplary level performance: a CCS score of 40 or more***.
* score of 5 in each of the five sections must be achieved
** score of 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved
*** score of 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved
A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of
the Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment the number of BREEAM credits awarded should
therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and certified CCS score.
Considerate Constructors Scheme
The Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) is a national initiative set up by the UK construction industry to improve
its image. The scheme is a self-financing, independent organisation owned by the Construction Umbrella Bodies
(Holdings) Ltd (made up of the Construction Products Association and the Construction Industry Council). Sites and
companies that register with the scheme sign up and are monitored against a Code of Considerate Practice,
designed to encourage best practice beyond statutory requirements.
45
Management
Construction processes
The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary for
servicing the construction and completion of a new building.
Factory gate
For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where
manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the material is in its final product form).
Examples might include:
1. Steel/concrete/glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc
2. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand
3. Concrete plant for concrete
4. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber.
Sustainability Champion
With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, a Sustainability Champion is an individual trained and
qualified to provide advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design/construction, and environmental
assessment (including BREEAM). They will monitor and audit construction site activities and facilitate the construction
team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and take the necessary action required to meet the
sustainability related performance levels required to achieve the target BREEAM rating, when the final building is
formally assessed by the BREEAM Assessor.The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an
integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and
achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this
issue focus on achieving this objective during the construction, handover and close out stages of the project.
Individuals who are accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an
approved Sustainability Champion:
BREEAM Accredited Professionals
Providers of other schemes or qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be
listed under the definition of a Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global.
Other information
CO2 Reporting protocols
At time of publication the following guidance is available for CO2 measuring protocols.
1. Encord: http://www.encord.org/?page_id=210 (have launched a CO2e protocol)
2. GHG Protocol - http://www.ghgprotocol.org/about-ghgp
3. DECC guidance for business: https://www.gov.uk/measuring-and-reporting-environmental-impacts-guidance-forbusinesses
Tools for monitoring and targeting construction site impacts
‘smartER’ is an add-on to BRE’s online waste management planning tool SMARTWaste Plan. ‘smartER’ enables SMARTWaste
users to capture, monitor and target a project's onsite energy consumption, and therefore produce a CO2 footprint, water
consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the criteria of this issue and
as a source of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste Membership scheme.
Transport and CCS data can also be collected by developing tailor-made versions of SMARTWaste. More details are available
at www.smartwaste.co.uk
Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes
Where a considerate construction/constructors scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAM compliant scheme, the
scheme administrator/operator should apply to BRE Global Ltd. for details on how to achieve recognition as a
compliant scheme.
Construction Excellence and reporting of construction site impacts
Constructing Excellence publish the construction industry key performance indicators (KPIs) based on data collected
by the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills via a voluntary quarterly survey returns by contractors
throughout the UK. The Office of National Statistics also reports the annual results in the Construction Statistics
46
Management
Annual. One of the key performance indicators is the ‘amount of CO2 emissions caused by the energy used during the
construction process per £100,000 of project value (kg CO2/£100k).
Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also serve
to help demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
Reporting protocols (energy) (see criteria 2 and 3)
At present, BREEAM sets no requirement on the use of a particular method or protocol for reporting energy/carbon
from construction sites, as there are currently no uniformly accepted protocols for the collection of data and
assessment of emissions from construction sites (source: ‘Carbon: Reducing the footprint of the construction
process, an action plan to reduce carbon’ (Strategic Forum and Carbon Trust, 2010). Until such time as there is a
consistent measurement protocol for reportingCO2/Energy from construction sites, BREEAM requires confirmation
of the methodology and/or protocol used for monitoring, collating and reporting data on construction site energy
consumption, as part of the reporting and certification process.
47
Management
Minimum standards
4
Yes
Aim
To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building occupants.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into four parts:
Commissioning schedule and responsibilities (1 credit)
Commissioning building services (1 credit)
Commissioning building fabric (1 credit)
Handover (1 credit).
One credit - Commissioning schedule and responsibilities
1. There is a schedule of commissioning that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning and recommissioning of all complex and non-complex building services, control systems and building fabric.
2. All commissioning activities are carried out in accordance with current Building Regulations, BSRIA1 and CIBSE2 guidelines
and/or other appropriate standards, where applicable. Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, refer
to the Compliance note CN7 on BMS commissioning procedures.
3. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme pre-commissioning, commissioning
and, where necessary, re-commissioning activities on behalf of the client.
4. The principal contractor accounts for the commissioning programme, responsibilities and criteria within their budget
and main programme of works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning activities prior to
handover.
One credit - Commissioning building services
5. For buildings with complex building services and systems, a specialist commissioning manager is appointed during the
design stage (by either the client or the principal contractor) with responsibility for:
a. Undertaking design reviews and giving advice on suitability for ease of commissioning.
b. Providing commissioning management input to construction programming and during installation stages.
c. Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post hand-over stages.
Where there are simple building services, this role can be carried out by an appropriate project team member (see
criterion 3 above), provided they are not involved in the general installation works for the building services system(s).
One credit - Commissioning building fabric
6. The commissioning schedule and responsibilities criteria above are achieved (criteria 1-4).
7. The integrity of the building fabric, including continuity of insulation, avoidance of thermal bridging and air leakage paths
is quality assured through completion of a thermographic survey and/or airtightness testing and inspection. The
survey/testing is undertaken by Suitably Qualified Professional (see compliance note 3) in accordance with the
appropriate standard.
8. Any defects identified in the thermographic survey and/or airtightness testing report is rectified prior to building
handover and close out. Any remedial work must meet the required performance characteristics for the
building/element.
48
Management
One credit - Handover
A Building User Guide is developed prior to handover for distribution to the building occupiers and premises managers.
A training schedule is prepared for building occupiers/premises managers, timed appropriately around handover and
proposed occupation plans, which includes the following content as a minimum:
9. The building’s design intent
10. The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contact(s), including any scheduled seasonal commissioning
and post occupancy evaluation
11. Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly building management systems,
controls and their interfaces
12. Introduction to the Building User Guide and other relevant building documentation, e.g. design data, technical guides,
maintenance strategy, operations and maintenance (O&M) manual, commissioning records, log book etc.
13. Maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Commissioning schedule and responsibilities, commissioning building services,
criteria 1 to 5
Option1- Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core
assessment option.
Option 2- Shell and core only: With regard to the scope of services being
specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply and require assessment.
Commissioning fabric, criteria 6 to 8
apply.
Handover, criterion 9
Option1- Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2- Shell and core only: The guide includes as far as possible all relevant
sections regarding the services and fabric installed. On completion of works the
building owner/agent/user hands it over to the fit-out contractor who can then
complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out strategy.
Handover, criterion 10
Both options: This criterion is not applicable.
assessment options.
49
Management
Ref
Terms
Description
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Commissioning schedule and responsibilities (1 credit)
1. Criteria 2 to 4
Handover (1 credit)
2. Criteria 9 and 10
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Other appropriate
standards
See criterion 2.
Appropriate standards for completion of this criteria are referenced accordingly
and include standards covering:
CN6
Process related
equipment
See criterion 2.
Any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project
may be excluded from the assessment of the commissioning credits, except where
they form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such as some heat
recovery systems.
CN7
BMS commissioning
procedures
See criterion 2.
Where a BMS is specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried
out:
1. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control
devices are installed, wired and functional
2. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include
physical measurements of room temperatures, off coil temperatures and
other key parameters as appropriate
3. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory
internal conditions prior to handover
4. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and
functional to user interface before handover
5. The occupier or facilities team is fully trained in the operation of the system.
General
CN4
building fabric
commercial refrigeration
fume cupboards
microbiological safety cabinets.
Methodology
None.
50
Management
Evidence
Critera
Design stage
All
7-8
-
Thermographic survey and level 2
thermography certificate
9-10
-
Building User Guide
Building User Guide
Dedicated building/site specific guidance for the non-technical building user. The purpose of the guide is to help
building users access, understand and operate the building efficiently and in a manner in keeping with the original
design intent. A Building User Guide will provide easily accessible and understandable information relevant to the
following stakeholders:
The building’s staff (or where relevant residents)
The non-technical facilities management team/building manager
Other building users, e.g. visitors/community users
The content of the guide will be specific to the building type, but should include information on the following:
Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy/water/waste efficiency policy/strategy
and how users should engage with/deliver the policy/strategy.
Building services overview and access to controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control, how to
operate effectively and efficiently etc.
Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures/provisions
Provision of, and access to, shared facilities
Safety and emergency information/instructions
Building related operational procedures specific to building type/operation, e.g. laboratories.
Building related incident reporting/feedback arrangements
Building related training information/links
Provision of, and access to, transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc.
Provision of, and access to, local amenities
Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements/considerations
Links, references and relevant contact details
There is no requirement on what format the Building User Guide should take.
Complex systems
There include, but are not limited, to air conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement
ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources,
microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume
cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets.
51
Management
Suitably qualified professionals - thermographic survey and airtightness testing
Thermography surveys and airtightness testing are to be undertaken by suitably qualified professionals in
accordance with the appropriate standards, as follows:
Airtightness testing: by professionals with membership of ATTMA (Air Tightness Testing and Measurement
Association) attained at organisational level maintaining UKAS accreditation (as air tightness testing laboratories to
ISO 17025).
Thermographic survey: by a professional holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography (as defined by the UKTA
website http://www.ukta.org
Other information
None
1BSRIA Commissioning Guides: Application Guide 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in Buildings Application Guide
20/95 - Commissioning of Pipework Systems Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM
1/88.1) Commissioning of Air Systems. Application procedures for buildings Application Guide 3/89.3 Pre-Commission
Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012) 3/89.3 Commissioning Water Systems application procedures for buildings
Superseded AG Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010).
Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010)
2CIBSE Commissioning Codes:
Set of Seven Codes (2003)
CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems (1996 confirmed 2006). ISBN: 9780900953736 CIBSE
Commissioning Code B: Boilers ISBN: 9781903287293
CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls ISBN: 9781903287132
CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting (SLL Commissioning Code L). ISBN: 9781903287323
CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management. ISBN: 9781903287330
CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. ISBN: 9781903287286
CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems ISBN: 9781906846152.
52
Man 05 Aftercare
Management
Man 05 Aftercare
Minimum standards
3
Yes
Aim
To provide post-handover aftercare to the building owner/occupants during the first year of occupation to ensure the
building operates and adapts, where relevant, in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split in to three parts:
Aftercare support (1 credit)
Seasonal commissioning (1 credit)
Post occupancy evaluation (1 credit).
The following is required to demonstrate compliance :
One credit - Aftercare support
1. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to the building
occupier(s), which includes the following as a minimum:
a. A meeting programmed to occur between the aftercare team/individual and the building occupier/management
(prior to initial occupation, or as soon as possible thereafter) to:
i. Introduce the aftercare team or individual to the aftercare support available, including the Building User Guide
(where existing) and training schedule/content.
ii. Present key information about the building including the design intent and how to use the building to ensure it
operates as efficiently and effectively as possible.
b. Onsite facilities management training, to include a walkabout of the building and introduction to and familiarisation
with the building systems, their controls and how to operate them in accordance with the design intent and
operational demands.
c. Initial aftercare support provision for at least the first month of building occupation, e.g. on-site attendance on a
weekly basis to support building users/management (this could be more or less frequent depending on the
complexity of the building/building operations).
d. Longer term aftercare support provision for occupants for at least the first 12 months from occupation, e.g. a
helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system to support building users/management.
2. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the collection and monitoring of
energy and water consumption data for a minimum of 12 months, once the building is occupied. This is done to
facilitate analysis of discrepancies between actual and predicted performance, with a view to adjusting systems and/or
user behaviours accordingly.
53
Management
One credit - Seasonal commissioning
3. The following seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a minimum 12 month period, once the building
becomes substantially occupied:
a. Complex systems - Specialist Commissioning Manager:
i. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in mid-winter, cooling/ventilation
equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions (spring/autumn).
ii. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy.
iii. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems or
concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems.
iv. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporating any
revisions in operating procedures into the operations and maintenance (O&M) manuals.
b. Simple systems (naturally ventilated) - external consultant/aftercare team/facilities manager
i. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial occupation,
either by measurement or occupant feedback.
ii. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review to take account of deficiencies
identified and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals.
One credit - Post occupancy evaluation
4. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out a post occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year
after initial building occupation. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from building users to inform
operational processes, including re-commissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safety and
comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent party (see Man 01 Project brief and design – Relevant definitions) and
needs to cover:
a. A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and handover
processes).
b. Feedback from a wide range of building users including facilities management on the design and environmental
conditions of the building covering:
i. Internal environmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality)
ii. Control, operation and maintenance
iii. Facilities and amenities
iv. Access and layout
v. Other relevant issues.
c. Sustainability performance (energy/water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or technologies
e.g. materials, renewable energy, rainwater harvesting etc.).
5. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate dissemination of information on the
building’s post occupancy performance. This is done to share good practice and lessons learned and inform changes in
user behaviour, building operational processes and procedures, and system controls.
Refer to Compliance notes CN5CN6 for a definition of appropriate dissemination. This also provides advice on
appropriate dissemination where the building or building information is commercially or security sensitive.
5. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the following activities at quarterly
intervals for the first three years of building occupation:
a. Collection of occupant satisfaction, energy consumption and water consumption data.
b. Analysis of the data to check the building is performing as expected and make any necessary adjustments to
systems controls or to inform building user behaviours.
c. Setting targets for reducing water and energy consumption and monitor progress towards these.
d. Feedback any ‘lessons learned’ to the design team and developer for use in future projects.
e. Provision of the actual annual building energy, water consumption and occupant satisfaction data to BRE.
None.
54
Man 05 Aftercare
Management
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue is not applicable.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Collection and
monitoring of
energy and water
consumption data
See criteria 2 and 4.
This function can be coordinated/carried out by a dedicated aftercare team or,
where the building occupier is known and able to confirm compliance based on
their existing or proposed operations for the building, the building
owner/occupier’s estates/facilities management team.
CN5
Appropriate
dissemination of
post occupancy
evaluation
information
See criterion 4.
1. Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders
such as building occupants, managers and owners.
In addition information should be communicated externally.
2. Appropriate dissemination in most cases will be the production and publication
of a building case study through one of the following means:
1. Client’s/building owner’s own website, publicly available literature or press
release
2. Industry/sector or government/local authority sponsored website or
information portals.
Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not
possible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive,
compliance can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate
the relevant information at an organisational level or to appropriate
internal/external stakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant
information for dissemination can be omitted from the publication.
CN6
Relevant
information for
dissemination
See criterion 4.
This includes the following information about the building and its performance:
1. A basic description of the project and building
2. BREEAM rating and score
3. The key innovative and low-impact design features of the building
4. Project cost
5. Project size: floor area, site area
General
55
Management
Ref
Terms
Description
6. Facilities available for community use (where relevant)
7. Any steps taken during the construction process to reduce environmental
impacts, i.e. innovative construction management techniques
8. Predicted and actual carbon dioxide emissions and/or Energy Performance
Certificate rating.
9. Outcomes of the post occupancy evaluation study, to share the lessons
learned from the project including:
a. Occupant feedback
b. Energy and water consumption including renewable energy generation,
level of rainwater/grey water provision.
CN7
Provision of annual
energy and water
consumption and
occupant
satisfaction data
See criterion 4.
One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client/end user
to register and therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant
part of the BREEAM In-Use scheme.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
Complex systems
These include, but are not limited to, air conditioning, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex
passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets
and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety
cabinets.
Soft Landings Framework 1 (see criterion 1)
A framework written and produced by Useable Buildings Trust (UBT) and Building Services Research and Information
Association (BSRIA) that seeks to promote improved briefing, design, handover and building performance in use.
Embedding the principles of this framework within a project should ensure that the evidence is available to
demonstrate compliance with particular aspects of the criteria under this BREEAM issue. Please also note that BSRIA
has produced a BREEAM New Construction/Soft landings interpretation note2 for clients and design teams.
56
Man 05 Aftercare
Management
Specialist Commissioning Manager
The Specialist Commissioning anager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor.
Other information
It should be noted that the government Soft Landings programme will become compulsory for local government
developments after 2016. This is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector related projects to
link in with the work of the government’s Building Information Modelling Task Group. Further information is available from:
http://www.bimtaskgroup.org/government-soft-landings/
1The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and building performance in use, Usable Buildings Trust
(UBT), BSRIA BG 4/2009..
2BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers, BSRIA BG 28/2011.
57
58
Minimum standards
Building type dependent
No
Aim
To ensure daylighting, artificial lighting and occupant controls are considered at the design stage to ensure best practice
visual performance and comfort for building occupants.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts:
Daylighting and glare control (up to3 credits - building type dependent)
View out (1 credit except for a healthcare building with inpatient areas, which has 2 credits available)
Internal and external lighting (1 credit)
One credit - Glare control
1. The potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant building areas using a glare control strategy,
either through building form and layout and/or building design measures (see Compliance notes CN5).
2. The glare control strategy avoids increasing lighting energy consumption, by ensuring that:
a. The glare control system is designed to maximise daylight levels under all conditions whilst avoiding disabling glare in
the workplace or other sensitive areas. The system should not inhibit daylight from entering the space under cloudy
conditions, or when sunlight is not on the facade.
AND
b. The use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems.
Up to two credits - Daylighting (building type dependent)
3. The glare control criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved.
4. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options:
a. The relevant building areas meet good practice daylight factor(s) and other criterion as outlined in Table - 9 and
Table - 10.
OR
b. The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as outlined
in Table - 11.
59
Table - 9: Minimum values of average daylight factor required.
Building/area type
Credits
Daylight
factor
required
Minimum
area (m2)
to
comply
Other requirements
EITHER (a) OR {(b) and
(c)} in Table - 10
Education buildings
Pre-schools, schools, further educationoccupied spaces
2
2%
80%
Higher educationoccupied spaces
1
2%
60%
OR Higher educationoccupied spaces
2
2%
80%
2
2%
80%
3%
80%
2%
80%
Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home
office)
2%
80%
Non-residential or communal occupied spaces
2%
80%
Staff and public areas
Occupied patient’s areas (dayrooms, wards) and
consulting rooms
(c)} in Table - 10
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen
1
EITHER (a) OR (c) in Table
- 10
Retail buildings
Sales areas
1
-
35%
Point daylight factors of
2% or more
Other occupied areas
1
2%
80%
(c)} in Table - 10
Prison buildings
60
Building/area type
Daylight
factor
required
Minimum
area (m2)
to
comply
1.5%
80%
N/A
Internal association or atrium area (prison buildings
only)
3%
80%
EITHER a uniformity
ratio of at least 0.7 OR a
minimum point daylight
factor of 2.1%
Patient care spaces
3%
80%
(c)} in Table - 10
Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces
2%
80%
(c)} in Table - 10
2%
80%
(c)} in Table - 10
Cells and custody cells
Credits
1
Other requirements
Courts, industrial, office buildings and all other building types
All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant
definitions
1
Table - 10: Daylighting uniformity criteria.
Ref
Criteria
(a)
A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the relevant average
daylight factor value in Table - 9. Spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at
least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in
Table - 9.
(b)
At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential
buildings, 0.7m in other buildings).
(c)
The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied.
Where:
d = room depth,
w = room width,
HW = window head height from floor level,
RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room,
Note:
Table - 16gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head
heights of sidelit rooms
61
Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should
be met.
Area type
Credits
Minimum
area to
comply
Average daylight illuminance
(averaged over entire space)
Minimum daylight illuminance at
worst lit point
At least 300 lux for 2000
hours per year or more
At least 90 lux for 2000 hours
per year or more
Education buildings
Pre-schools, schools,
further education occupied spaces
2
80%
Higher education occupied spaces
1
60%
OR Higher education occupied spaces
2
80%
2
80%
per year or more
80%
per year or more
100%
per year or more
per year or more
80%
per year or more
Occupied patient's
areas (dayrooms,
wards) and
consulting rooms
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen
1
Living rooms, dining
rooms, studies
(including home
office)
Nonresidential/communal
occupied spaces
Retail buildings
Sales areas
1
35%
At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650 hours per
year or more
Other occupied areas
1
80%
62
per year or more
Area type
Credits
Minimum
area to
comply
worst lit point
80%
N/A
Internal association /
atrium area
80%
per year or more
Patient care spaces
80%
Teaching, lecture and
seminar spaces
80%
per year or more
Prison buildings
Cells and custody cells
1
Courts, industrial, office buildings and all other building types
All occupied spaces,
unless indicated in
1
80%
per year or more
One credit - View out
5. 95% of floor space in relevant building areas is within 7m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening that
provides an adequate view out.
6. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area (refer to relevant definition in the Additional
information section). Where the room depth is greater than 7m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of
window/opening is the same as, or greater than, the values in table 1.0 of BS 8206 1.
7. In addition, the building type criteria in Table - 12 are applicable to view out criteria.
Table - 12: View out building specific requirements.
Building type
View out requirements
Prison buildings
Cells
An adequate view out from a normal standing or sitting position and the distance between
each window and nearest external solid object (i.e. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥ 10m.
Where existing features prevent compliance with this criteria in less than 20% of the cells within
the building, the credit can still be awarded.
Patient occupied spaces
See Healthcare requirements for these spaces.
Multi-residential
buildings
Living rooms – (self contained flats), communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits –
(sheltered housing)
All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a window or
permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of
the surrounding wall area.
with inpatient areas
Patient occupied spaces, e.g. wards and dayrooms
As criterion 5 for the relevant building areas PLUS the distance between the wall with the
63
Building type
View out requirements
(one additional
credit)
window/opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥
10m.
One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control
Internal lighting
8. All internal lighting systems are designed to avoid flicker and stroboscopic effects.
9. Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide an illuminance (lux) level appropriate to the
tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and comfort levels. This can be demonstrated through a
lighting design strategy that provides illuminance levels in accordance with the CIBSE Code for Lighting 2012 and any
other relevant industry standard.
10. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7 2 sections
3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting:
a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (manufacturers’ data for the luminaires should
be sought to confirm this).
b. For up-lighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team
calculation is usually required to demonstrate this.
c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.
External lighting
11. All external lighting located within the construction zone is designed to provide illuminance levels that enable users to
perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night. To demonstrate this, external lighting
provided is specified in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas3.
Zoning and occupant control
12. Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control (see relevant definition) in accordance with the criteria below for
relevant areas present within the building:
a. In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces
b. Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and controlled
c. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas
d. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas
e. Teaching space or demonstration area
f. Whiteboard or display screen
g. Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area
h. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating/dining areas
i. Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas
j. Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas
k. Wards or bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for staff over groups of bed
spaces
l. Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and circulation space with controls
accessible to staff.
Note: the criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings.
13. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting
Guide 5 4.
14. In addition the building type criteria inTable - 13 (where relevant);
Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.
Building type
Internal and external lighting requirements
Education buildings
Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher whilst teaching and on
64
Building type
Internal and external lighting requirements
entering/leaving the teaching space.
Prison buildings
Cells
Lit to a maintained illuminance of 200 lux at table-top level. In addition there must be the facility
(using, for example, dimming, step switching or separate task and general lighting) for the
occupant of the cell to select a lower level of general lighting if required.
Exercise yards
Lit to a maintained illuminance of at least 10 lux. However, if such spaces are, or will be, used as
sports facilities they must be lit to a maintained illuminance of 100 lux.
Court buildings
Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum):
1. Judge’s/magistrate’s bench
2. Dock
3. Jury area
4. Public seating area.
Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the courtroom as a whole, cater for the
following settings:
1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.)
2. Normal lighting (for court sessions)
3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio visual evidence, but allowing enough light for
note taking).
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for daylighting:
15. Criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved.
16. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options:
a. Relevant building areas meet exemplary daylight factor(s) and the relevant criteria in Table - 14.
OR
b. Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table - 15.
Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.
Area type
Credits
Daylight
factor
required
Minimum
area (m2)
to comply
Other requirements
All building types
The criteria outlined in Table - 15 concerning uniformity ratio (a), view of
sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where they are used to
demonstrate compliance.
All building types (excluding retail – see below)
Functions as identified in the standard
criteria (multi storey buildings)
1
3%
80%
Where used, a minimum
point daylight factor of
1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces
with glazed roofs, such as
atria
65
Area type
Credits
Daylight
factor
required
Minimum
area (m2)
to comply
Other requirements
Functions as identified in the standard
criteria (single storey buildings)
4%
80%
atria
Prisons and court cells
2%
80%
N/A
Prison internal association/atrium area
5%
80%
A uniformity ratio of at least
0.7 or a minimum point
daylight factor of 3.5%.
N/A
50%
Point daylight factor 2%
Common areas and offices (multi storey
buildings)
3%
80%
atria
Common areas and offices (single storey
buildings)
4%
80%
atria
Retail
Sales areas
1
Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance)
should be met.
Area type
Credits
Minimum
area to
comply
worst lit point
All building types (excluding retail – see below)
Multistorey
buildings
Occupied
spaces
(unless
indicated
below)
66
1
80%
per year or more
per year or more
Area type
Credits
Minimum
area to
comply
worst lit point
Single
storey
buildings
Occupied
spaces
(unless
indicated
below)
80%
per year or more
per year or more;
or in spaces with glazed roofs
(such as atria),
at least 210 lux for 3000 hours
per year or more
Prisons
and courts
buildings
Cells and
sustody
sells
80%
per year or more
N/A
Prison
buildings
Internal
association
or atrium
areas
80%
per year or more
per year or more
50%
At least 300 lux point daylight illuminances for 2000 hours per year or
more
80%
Select relevant criteria above for occupied spaces dependant on
whether you are assessing a Multi-storey or Single-storey building.
Retail
Retail
buildings
Sales areas
Retail
buildings
Other
occupied
areas
1
Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit
rooms.
67
Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
Reflectance (RB)
0.4
Room width (m)
0.5
0.6
3.0
10.0
3.0
10.0
3.0
10.0
2.5
4.5
6.7
5.4
8.0
6.8
10.0
3.0
5.0
7.7
6.0
9.2
7.5
11.5
3.5
5.4
8.6
6.5
10.4
8.1
13.0
Window head height (m)
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable assessment
criteria
Glare control criteria 1 to 2
Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply. The design team must demonstrate how the glare control criteria will be
met without a reliance on blinds when the building is occupied.
Daylighting criteria 3 to 4 and 15 to 16
apply
View out criteria 5 to 7
apply. Where it is not possible to confirm which areas of the building will contain
workstations/benches or desks, then all areas of the building designed for
and/or likely to be occupied by workstations/benches or desks must comply with
the relevant criteria.
Internal lighting criteria 8 to 10, 12 to 14
Both options : These assessment criteria are not applicable to a shell and core
assessment.
External lighting criteria 11, 14
Both options 1 and 2: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and
function apply
assessment options.
Simple buildings
68
Ref
Terms
Description
CN2
Applicable assessment
criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria
relevant to the building type and function apply.
General
Daylighting and glare control
CN4
Percentage of assessed
area
See criterion 4.
Where the criteria specify that a percentage of floor area must be adequately
illuminated by daylight, this refers to the percentage of the total floor area of all
the rooms that must be assessed, i.e. the compliant area. If for example, a
development has six rooms that must be assessed, each 150m2 (total area
900m2) and 80% of this floor area must meet the criterion, then 720m2 must
comply with the criterion; this is equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that
must comply must always be rounded up; therefore in this example, five rooms
must have an average daylight factor of 2% or more (plus meet the other
criteria) to achieve the credit.
CN5
Compliant forms of
glare control -curtains
as glare control
Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control criteria include:
building integrated measures (e.g. low eaves)
occupant controlled devices such as blinds (where transmittance value is
< 0.1 (10%))
bio-climatic design
external shading or brise soleil
Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level
winter sun. Where using fixed systems, design studies can be used to
demonstrate that sunlight is prevented from reaching building occupants during
occupied hours.
Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria
for the glare control criteria, as they do not provide sufficient control to optimise
daylight in to the space. Furthermore, the use of curtains to control glare is likely
to cause occupants to rely more on artificial lighting.
CN6
Borrowed light
For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with
daylighting criteria, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design
software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM
criteria (if the light from these sources is required in order for the room to
comply). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun
pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted
glass).
CN7
Room depth criterion rooms lit from two
opposite sides
For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that
can be satisfactorily illuminated by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d)
(measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 5 The
69
Ref
Terms
Description
reflectance of the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1.
CN8
Uniformity with
rooflights
The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on
rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software has to be used to calculate
the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the
whole of the space, Figure 2.36 (p.37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be
used to determine the uniformity ratio.
CN9
Daylighting - uniformity
ratio Calculation
The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum
daylight illuminance can exclude areas within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are
not regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although they are
included in the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance
calculations.
CN10
View of sky
requirement
See criterion 4.
To comply with the view of sky criteria (ref (b)) in Table - 10, at least 80% of the
room that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must receive
direct light from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to
meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.
CN11
View of sky
requirement existing site features
Where existing site features prevent a room from meeting the credit criterion.
The credit can still be achieved where evidence demonstrates that 90% of the
room is able to achieve the criteria.
Internal and external lighting levels/zoning and control
CN12
Relevant industry
standard for lighting
design
Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design
for Schools’6
Please note that for care homes housing people with dementia the following
standard can be used instead of the CIBSE Code for Lighting:
Design Lighting for People with Dementia, University of Stirling, Stirling,
2008 7.
Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the CIBSE Code for Lighting,
2009 align with BS EN 12464-1 8.
CN13
Occupancy/workstation
layout unknown
Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be
zoned on the basis of 40m2 grids, i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace per
10m2.
CN14
Small spaces
Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m2) which do
not require any subdivision of lighting zones/control will meet the zoning criteria
by default.
CN15
Zones of four
workspaces
The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a
fixed requirement. Where there is justification for this to be increased to fit with
the adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that the assessor
is satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable
zoning/control of lighting to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control
over lighting in their personable work area. The relevant design team member,
70
Ref
Terms
Description
e.g. lighting consultant, should set out how this is to be achieved in such an
instance.
CN16
Lighting zoning and
control - auditoria
spaces
The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical
auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal
lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have
lighting controls as follows:
1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.),
2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a
low level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light
for the audience to take notes),
3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the
purposes of visual demonstrations/performances),
4. Separate localised lectern lighting.
CN17
Education - Education
funding agency
requirements
For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been
achieved, for all relevant rooms within the building, (in accordance with Priority
School Building Programme (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification:
Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013 1’) it can be
assumed that the BREEAM daylighting requirements have also been met and
therefore the two credits available for daylighting can be awarded by default. In
this instance, evidence would need to be provided to demonstrate that the EFA
requirements have been achieved.
CN18
Education (pre-schools)
and acute Special
Educational Needs (SEN)
controls for children
Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of the
assessment, controls should be provided for the teacher/member of staff, i.e. it
is not a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children.
Where nursery spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls
should be provided for the member of staff, not the nursery school children.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
1Priority School Building Programme PSBP Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education
Funding Agency, June 2013
71
Criteria
3 and 4
Daylighting calculations
Adequate view out
BREEAM defines an adequate view out as a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye
level (1.2 – 1.3m) within the relevant building areas and should ideally be through an external window. A view into an
internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the
courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an
internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc.
Average daylight factor
The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room,
expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE
Standard Overcast Sky.
Clinical areas
Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental
conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc).
Computer simulation
Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the
BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Illuminance
The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux.
Occupied space
A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user.
Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and
measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here.
Patient areas
Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc)
Point daylight factor
A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a specific point on the working plane
within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane.
This is based on an assumed overcast sky, approximated by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage)
overcast sky’.
The minimum point daylight factor is the lowest value of the daylight factor on the working plane at a point that is not
within 0.5m of a wall. Similarly the minimum illuminance is calculated at the worst lit point on the working plane that is
not within 0.5m of a wall. These points will usually be close to a rear corner of the room. Computer simulations are the
most appropriate tools to allow for point daylight factors and illuminances to be calculated.
72
Public areas
Within a Healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical
functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas).
Relevant building areas: daylighting
For the purpose of BREEAM this is defined as areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to be of
benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more). This includes the
following (where occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more) specifically stated because they are often omitted;
1. Sports hall exercise spaces
2. Laboratory areas unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled environmental
conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times.
3. Self contained flats
4. Kitchen and catering areas
5. General communal areas
6. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings)
7. Meeting rooms (including those within multi-residential buildings)
8. Leisure areas
9. Any area that may involve close up work.
However, this excludes the following (where present):
1. Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas requiring strictly controlled acoustic or
lighting conditions
2. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions, e.g. operating theatres, delivery rooms or pathology.
However, BREEAM strongly advise that the benefits from daylighting and view out are seriously considered when
designing areas of critical and intensive care in healthcare buildings.
3. Holding areas and custody cells where security issues conflict with the BREEAM daylighting requirements.
4. Custody cells in courts, where privacy is a functional/operational requirement.
Glare control
For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users
e.g.those areas that have been designed to contain/use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls. Spaces
in the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded should not be assessed against the
glare control criteria.
View out
BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where:
1. There are or will be workstations/benches or desks for building users.
2. Close work will be undertaken or where visual aids will be used.
3. A view out is deemed to be of benefit to the building occupants e.g. in spaces where occupants are likely to spend
a significant amount of time.
Excluded areas for each of these might include:
1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward/patient area in order to enable patient observation.
2. Courtrooms and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria.
3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located centrally
within the building.
4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental/operational conditions prevents such spaces from
providing a view out.
5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or limitation
of natural light is a functional requirement e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc.
Internal and external lighting
Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade or
roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance
with the internal lighting criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements:
1. Media and arts production spaces
2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy areas).
73
Lighting zoning
For rooms or spaces not listed within criterion 12, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when
determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of this
BREEAM issue.
Separate zoning control
Light switches or controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the
individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area
they control.
Staff areas
Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where
patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms,
physiotherapy, etc).
Surrounding wall area
Surrounding wall area refers to the area (in m2) of the internal wall on which the window/opening is located, including
the area of the window/opening itself.
Uniformity
The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or
minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plan (or average daylight
factor).
View of sky/no-sky line
Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen
from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight,
from those that cannot.
Working plane
CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working
plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry.
Other information
None.
1BS 8206-2:2008 Lighting for buildings.Code of Practice for daylighting
2CIBSE Lighting Guide 7, 2005
3BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013
4SLL LIGHTING GUIDE 5: Lecture, teaching and conference rooms, 1991
5CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 Daylighting and window design, 1999.
6Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’
7Pollock R, McNair D, McGuire B and Cunningham C, Design Lighting for People with Dementia, Dementia Services
Development Centre, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2008
8BS EN 12464-1:2002 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work places, 2003
74
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification and installation of appropriate
ventilation, equipment and finishes.
Assessment criteria
Minimising sources of air pollution (4 credits)
Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit)
Note:
The potential for natural ventilation credit does not apply to buildings on a prison development.
Minimising sources of air pollution
One credit - Indoor air quality (IAQ) plan
1. An indoor air quality plan has been produced, with the objective of facilitating a process that leads to design,
specification and installation decisions and actions that minimise indoor air pollution during occupation of the building.
The indoor air quality plan must consider the following:
a. Removal of contaminant sources
b. Dilution and control of contaminant sources
c. Procedures for pre-occupancy flush out
d. Third party testing and analysis
e. Maintaining indoor air quality in-use.
One credit- Ventilation
The building has been designed to minimise the concentration and recirculation of pollutants in the building as follows:
2. Provide fresh air in to the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation.
3. Design ventilation pathways to minimise the build-up of air pollutants in the building, as follows:
a. In air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings/spaces:
i. The building’s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart and intakes are over 20m from sources of external
pollution. OR
ii. The location of the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and external sources of pollution,
is designed in accordance with BS EN 13779:2007 1 Annex A2.
b. In naturally-ventilated buildings/spaces: openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external
pollution.
1BS EN 13779:2007 Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and room-
conditioning systems
75
4. Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as defined in BS EN
13779:2007 Annex A3.
5. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have CO or air quality sensors
2
specified and:
a. In mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces: sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide
demand-controlled ventilation to the space.
b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner or manager when
CO levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of fresh
2
air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents.
One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products)
6. Criterion 1 is achieved.
7. All decorative paints and varnishes specified meet the criteria in Table - 17
8. At least five of the eight remaining product categories listed in Table - 17 meet the testing requirements and emission
levels criteria for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table).
One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (post construction)
10. The formaldehyde concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and is found to be less than
or equal to 100µg/averaged over 30 minutes (WHO guidelines, source BRE Digest 464 part 2 1).
11. The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and
found to be less than 300µg/over 8 hours, in line with the building regulation requirements.
12. Where VOC and formaldehyde levels are found to exceed the limits defined in criteria 10 and 11, the project team
confirms the measures that have, or will be taken, in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the levels to within these
limits.
13. The testing and measurement of the above pollutants are in accordance with the following standards where relevant:
a. BS EN ISO 16000-4: 2004 Diffusive sampling of formaldehyde in air 1
b. EN ISO 16000-6 VOCs in air by active sampling 2
c. BS EN 16017-2: 2003 VOCs - Indoor, ambient and workplace air by passive sampling 3
d. BS EN ISO 16000-3: 2001 4 formaldehyde and other carbonyls in air by pumped sampling.
14. The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m3) and TVOC (µg/m3) are reported, via the BREEAM scoring
and reporting tool.
Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation
One credit (credit not applicable to prison buildings)
15. The building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable to potential building occupant needs and
climatic scenarios. This can be demonstrated as follows:
a. Occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural ventilation
strategy. The following are methods deemed to satisfy this criterion dependent upon the complexity of the
proposed system:
i. Room depths are designed in accordance with CIBSE AM10 (section 2.4) to ensure effectiveness of any natural
ventilation system. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal
floor area of that room/floor plate. OR
ii. The design demonstrates that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air to maintain
the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. This is demonstrated using ventilation design tool
types recommended by CIBSE AM10 5 (or for education buildings by using the ClassVent tool).
For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth greater
than 15m, the design must demonstrate (in accordance with criterion 15a- i above) that the ventilation strategy can
provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates.
1BRE Digest 464, VOC emissions from building products: control, evaluation and labelling schemes, Yu, C. and Crump. D, 2002
76
16. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the
occupied space (see CN7 for further details).
Note: Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates
to avoid draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define ‘adequate levels of fresh air’
sufficient for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type.
Note: Multi-residential buildings with self contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of
openable window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but
must be occupant controlled.
Minimising sources of air pollution - volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products)
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:
One credit
17. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved.
18. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.06mg/m3 air in
accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17
Two credits
19. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved.
20. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.01mg/m3 air in
accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17
Table - 17: VOC criteria by product type
Ref
Product
A
Paints and varnishes
B
Requirements
Performance requirements
VOC content limit
Compliant performance standard
EN 13300:2001 and EU Directive 2004/42/CE21
Compliant testing standard
ISO 11890-2:2006 – Paints and varnishes –
Determination of VOC content, Part 2 – Gas
Chromatographic method
Manufacturer also to confirm
Paint to be fungal and algal resistant in wet areas e.g.
bathrooms, kitchens, utility rooms
Wood panels (including particle board, fibreboard including MDF, OSB, cement bonded particle board,
plywood, solid wood panel and acoustic board)
Option 1 - Performance requirements
Formaldehyde E1 class
in accordance with EN 13986:2004.
77
Ref
C
D
E
78
Product
Requirements
Option 1 – Compliant testing standard(s)
EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels – Determination of
formaldehyde release by chamber method.
Option 2 – Performance requirements
Formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3
Option 2 – Compliant testing standard(s)
1. ISO 16000-9 Determination of the emission of VOC
from building products and furnishing - Emission
chamber method. OR
2. Emission testing method for California Specification
01350 (Californian Department for Public Health
CDPH) – Standard method for the testing and
evaluation of VOC emissions from indoor sources
using environmental chambers.
Note: For either method the resultant emission/surface
area obtained from the chamber test method must be
extrapolated to predict what the emissions would be in a
theoretical model room (as detailed in the standard) and
this extrapolated emission rate compared with the
required formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3.
The absence of regulated wood preservatives.
Timber structures (e.g. glue laminated timber)
Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class
Option 1 - Compliant testing standards
As category B above.
Wood flooring e.g. parquet
As category B above
Resilient textile and laminated floor coverings (e.g. vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber, carpet, laminated wood
flooring)
Ref
F
G
Product
Requirements
Suspended ceiling tiles
Flooring adhesives
Absence of all carcinogenic and sensitising substances – in
accordance with the globally harmonised system (GHS) of
classification and labelling of chemicals. Refer to:
1. Globally Harmonized System of Classification and
Labelling of Chemicals (GHS) - Fourth revised edition,
United Nations, 2011. http://www.unece.org/ OR
2. C1, C2 and C3 classifications identified in Annex A of
BS EN 13999-1:2007.
BS EN 13999:2007 Adhesives. Short term method for
measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or
solvent-free adhesives after application.
1. Part 2 – Determination of volatile organic
compounds
2. Part 3 – Determination of volatile aldehydes
3. Part 4 - Determination of volatile diisocyanates
None
79
Ref
Product
H
Wall coverings
Requirements
Compliant performance standard
Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) content
Formaldehyde level
Migration of heavy metals
1. BS EN 233:1999, Section 5.7 - Finished wall papers
2. BS EN 233:1999, Section 5.7 - Wall vinyls and plastic
wall covering
3. BS EN 234:1997, Section 9.0 - Wall papers for
subsequent decoration
4. BS EN 259-1:2001, Section 4.5-4.7- Heavy duty wall
coverings
BS EN 12149:1998 – Wall coverings in roll form.
Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain
other elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of
formaldehyde release - Test A Heavy metals, Test B Vinyl
chloride monomer, Test C Formaldehyde.
None
Relevant standards - VOCs
All standards outlined inTable - 17 above are standards recognised across Europe and Internationally for VOCs content
and testing. In instances where a product is not assessed against the listed European or International standard it is
acceptable to use an alternative, nationally recognised standard provided the following is met as a minimum:
1. The performance level requirements required by the alternative standard are equivalent to or better than those
specified in the ISO EN standard specified. For example, if a material containing formaldehyde has been added to
the floor covering product as part of the production process, then the E1 emission measured for formaldehyde
must be less than 0.124mg/m3(as required by EN 14041:2004).
2. Where an alternative standard omits evaluation of a particular material, it is only acceptable to use the alternative
standard in instances where the product does not contain that particular material.
BREEAM assessors should seek confirmation from BRE Global prior to awarding credits for compliance with standards
not listed in Table - 1 or previously approved as alternative nationally recognised standards.
Alternative to testing - paints and varnishes (category A)
For decorative paints and varnishes, where the product manufacturer states that the method to determine the VOC
content in a product is to use a calculation technique rather than testing in accordance with BS EN 13300:2001, this will be
acceptable for the purposes of BREEAM compliance provided the manufacturer has confirmed the following:
1. The calculation method is acceptable for the purpose of compliance with the European Regulation on Classification,
Labelling and Packaging of Substances and Mixtures (CLP), or where in transition to CLP, the UK Chemicals (Hazard
Information and Packaging for Supply) Regulations 2009, and the product complies with the Decorative Paint
Directive 2004/42/CE.
2. The manufacturing process, i.e the paint or varnish formulation and raw material mixing, is carried out in accordance
with an ISO 9001 (or equivalent) certified quality management procedure.
Products with no formaldehyde containing materials
For some floor coverings and wood based panels, the requirement for formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above
criteria) does not apply to “floor coverings to which no formaldehyde-containing materials were added during
production or post-production processing”, or in the case of EN 13986:2004, wood-based panels.
As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration of formaldehyde class E1 without testing
80
Ref
Product
Requirements
(in writing or via a company product fact sheet or literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement
relevant to formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer
that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s )and therefore,
evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the assessor to demonstrate
compliance with that particular requirement.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Indoor air quality, criterion 1
Both options: This criterion and credit is not applicable for a shell and core
assessment.
Ventilation, criteria 2 to 5
Option 1 - Shell only:These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core
assessment option
Option 2 - Shell and core only: Criteria 2 and 3 are applicable to this shell and core
assessment option. Criterion 4 and 5 do not apply. Where ventilation systems are
not within the remit of the shell and core developer, compliance can be
demonstrated through the building servicing strategy where this is predetermined
by the built form or core services provision as appropriate to the shell and core
option being followed.
VOC's criteria,6 to14 and 17 to 20
Both options: These criteria and credits are not applicable to shell and core
assessments.
Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation, criteria 15to 16
apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Indoor air quality - N/A
1. Criterion 1 is not applicable.
Ventilation (1 credit)
2. Criteria 2 to 3 are applicable, (criteria 4 and 5 are not applicable).
Volatile organic compound (VOC) (1 credit)
3. Criteria 6 to 8 are applicable, (criteria 9 to 14 are not applicable).
Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit - not applicable to prison
buildings)
4. Criteria 15 and 16 are applicable.
81
Ref
Terms
Description
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria
relevant to the building type and function apply.
CN4
Furnishings
The scope of the VOC credits does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving,
it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building.
CN5
Mechanically
ventilated or cooled
buildings
See criteria 15 and
16.
Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to
achieve this credit provided it can be demonstrated that the features required by
the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g. windows fixed shut
for an air conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of
the potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of
providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy.
Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation
is necessary to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy
and/or peak temperature conditions) due to the function/specific usage patterns
of the building, the potential for natural ventilation credit can still be awarded
provided calculations/modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation
system will be required for ≤ 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied
space(s) for the adopted building design/layout.
CN6
VOC's - number of
products required
to comply
See criterion 8.
Where five or less products are specified within the building, the number of
products that needs to be assessed for VOC criteria reduces proportionally as
follows:
Levels of ventilation
See criterion 15.
The two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following:
CN8
Industrial areas: air
pollution/ventilation
rate requirements
For industrial buildings the minimising sources of air pollution and adaptability
(potential for natural ventilation) criteria and credits apply only to office areas and
not to operational areas. If the building does not contain any office areas, these
credits and their requirements do not require assessing.
CN9
Measuring the
distance.
See criteria 3a&b.
The distance requirement for air intakes and extracts does not necessarily mean the
plan distance, but the three dimensional distance around and over objects; e.g. on
plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but
the intake may be on the roof of a 10 storey building and therefore over 20m from
the source of pollution.
General
CN7
82
Where five products are present, four must comply
Where four products are present, three must comply
Where three products are present, two must comply
Where two or fewer products are present, all must comply.
Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short-term
odours and/or prevent summertime overheating
Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for
good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy
load and the internal pollution loads of the space.
Ref
Terms
Description
CN10
Healthcare
Window openings
See criteria 15 and
16.
In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be
provided with restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HTM 55,
Windows6). This is for health and safety reasons, especially where windows are
within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is felt that good design
can overcome these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions,
even in safety-sensitive areas.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy
The following are examples of these types of space:
Auditoria
Gyms
Retail store or malls
Cinemas
Waiting Rooms.
Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of
occupancy, the criterion does not apply.
ClassVent
ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing ventilation openings for a natural
ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by the Department for Children, Families and
Schools (formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from
http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/docbank/index.cfm?id=9955
Clinical areas
Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Occupied spaces
See relevant definition provided in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
83
The following building areas, where relevant to the building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied
spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria:
1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms
2. Swimming/hydrotherapy pools
3. Catering and small staff kitchens
4. Washrooms or changing areas
5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional requirement of
the space.
6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts
7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings
8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of cross
infection and/or controlled environmental conditions including:
a. Operating theatres
b. Laser surgery unit
c. Operative imaging unit
d. Intensive treatment unit
e. Infectious diseases isolation unit
f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients
g. Manufacturing pharmacy
h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit
i. Pathology containment laboratories
j. Mortuary and dissection suite
k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses
l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU)
m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units
n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air flow
would be likely with natural ventilation
o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of Healthcare Technical
Memorandums
p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational related processes.
Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation e.g. laboratories, workshops, food technology rooms must still
demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an exempted area under
this compliance note).
Openable window area
The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening, e.g.
window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent for ventilation purposes (i.e. this excludes open areas
created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc). It is not the glazed area of a façade or the glazed area
of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully).
Relevant standards (ventilation)
Education buildings: Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings.
Offices spaces: Top of the range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the
Specification of Offices7 i.e. 12 litres per second per person.
Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions:
HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises8(England, Wales and Northern Ireland)
SHTM 03-01 Ventilation for Healthcare premises Part A: Design and Validation1 (Scotland)
Relevant standards are not listed for all areas/building types as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in
Approved Document Part F Ventilation (and the standards referenced there in).
Sources of external pollution
1. Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site
2. Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays
3. Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial/agricultural processes
1SHTM03-01 ventilation for Healthcare Premises Part A: Design and Validation, Health Facilities Scotland, Feb 2013
84
Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are
unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria
of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays.
Volatile organic compound (VOC)
Any organic liquid and/or solid that evaporates spontaneously at the prevailing temperature and pressure of the
atmosphere with which it is in contact (Source: BS EN ISO 11890).
Other information
Indoor air quality and measurement
The testing and measurement of pollutants must be in accordance with the relevant standards (as listed in the Hea 02 Indoor
air qualitytable ). Sample measurements should normally be taken in representative habitable or occupiable rooms, so not
every room in a building would need to be sampled (see below for examples of representative room types). For example, in
an office, one sample in a cellular/single occupancy office should suffice to assess the VOC concentration of the air for that
type of habitable space in the building (assuming the other cellular offices have the same specification). In larger rooms, such
as open-plan office areas, further sampling locations should be used to understand the homogeneity of the atmosphere.
Depending upon the performance of the measurement method in terms of repeatability and the required level of confidence
in the value obtained, replicate samples may be taken at one or more sampling locations.
Prior to measurements being taken, the ventilation and heating systems should be operating for a period of time to ensure
the relevant spaces in the building reach equilibrium in terms of their internal environmental conditions. Typically this may take
between 12-24 hours.
Examples of representative room types include: naturally ventilated carpeted office, mechanically ventilated vinyl floored
meeting room, workshop, living room or bedroom. Rooms that are not habitable or occupiable may, for example, include
toilets, store room, plant room, stairways or corridors. The definition of 'habitable or occupiable rooms' comes from
Approved Document F, Means of Ventilation, HM Government, 2010.
In accordance with the criteria, where levels are found to exceed the defined limits, the credit can only be claimed where the
project team confirms the measures that have, or will be undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and
formaldehyde levels to within the required limits.
This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM assessors on the appropriate scope of IAQ testing;
therefore it is guidance only and not a requirement of complying with BREEAM. The testing regime should be determined
based on the advice of the appropriate person appointed to conduct the testing, in order to determine and report
representative values of indoor air quality for the building.
There are a number of publications available on the issue of measuring and improving the indoor air quality in buildings
including BR 450, A protocol for the assessment of indoor air quality in homes and office buildings, Crump, Raw, Upton,
Scivyer, Hunter, Hartless. BRE (2002).
Volatile organic compounds
VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints and lacquers, paint
strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues and adhesives, urea-formaldehyde foam
insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made
with these pressed wood products.
‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. The emissions of VOCs from
paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in
Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should
also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC).
Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on
health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building
product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive,
93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products.
85
Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive
2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony,
barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides
(e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided.
Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been
summarised in BRE Digest 464. The standards outlined in Table - 17 however are the only standards recognised by BREEAM
for the purposes of assessing this issue.
Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC)
BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume
cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be
trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but
higher rates may cause noise problems.
1BS EN ISO 16000-4: 2004: Determination of formaldehyde -- Diffusive sampling method
2EN ISO 16000-6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air by active sampling on Tenax
TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS/FID
3BS EN ISO 16017-2:2003, Indoor, ambient and workplace air. Sampling and analysis of volatile organic compounds by
sorbent tube/thermal desorption/capillary gas chromatography. Diffusive sampling
4BS EN ISO 16000-3: 2001: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds -- Active sampling method
5CIBSE AM10, 2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings
6Health Technical Memorandum 55 Building Components – Windows, NHS Estates, 1998.
7BCO Guide 2009, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, 2009.
8HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises, Department of Health, 2007.
86
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the safe containment and removal of pollutants.
Assessment criteria
One credit -laboratory containment devices and containment areas
1. An objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities has been carried out prior to completion of the
Developed Design (RIBA Stage 3 or equivalent) to ensure potential risks are considered in the design of the laboratory.
2. Where containment devices such as fume cupboards are specified their manufacture and installation meet best practice
safety and performance requirements and objectives, demonstrated through compliance with the following standards:
a. General purpose fume cupboards: BS EN 14175 Parts 1-7 (as appropriate)1
b. Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 7989:2001 2
c. Microbiological safety cabinets: BS EN 12469:2000 3(for manufacture) and BS 5726:2005 1(for installation).
d. Clean air hoods, glove boxes, isolators and mini-environments: BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 2
e. Articulated extension arms: PD CEN/TR 16589 3
Or, for Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education with laboratories and fume cupboards for subjects up to and
including A-level (or equivalent):
f. Building Bulletin 88 4, Fume cupboards in schools.
3. Where laboratory containment devices that are ducted to discharge externally are specified, the guidance in the
National Annex of BS EN 14175-2 must be followed to ensure an appropriate discharge velocity is achieved.
One credit - buildings with containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities
4. Where containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities are specified they must meet best practice safety and
performance criteria and objectives. This is demonstrated as follows:
a. Criterion 1 has been achieved.
b. Ventilation systems are designed in compliance with the best practice guidance set out in 'DRAFT HSE Biological
Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010'4.
c. Filters for all areas designated as containment level 2 and 3 are located outside the main laboratory space for ease
of cleaning/replacement and the filters are easily accessible by maintenance staff or technicians.
5. The design team demonstrate that the individual fume cupboard location and stack heights have been considered in
accordance with HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1 5.
1BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets, Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to the
installer and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance, BSi.
2BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 Clean rooms and associated controlled environments. Separative devices (clean air hoods,
gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments), BSi.
3PD CEN/TR 16589 Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm, BSi.
4The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010, HSE.
87
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue is not applicable to shell and core assessments.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue is not applicable to simple buildings.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Laboratory
containment device
requirement for
schools, sixth form
and further
education
See criterion 2f.
For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A-Level subjects,
confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with Building Bulletin
88 will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS 7989 and parts of BS 14175 may
be relevant to some installations; in such cases the person or organisation
responsible for producing or installing the laboratory equipment should be able to
confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard installation.
General
CN4
CN5
Building specific
guidance
No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
Methodology
None.
88
Evidence
Criteria
All
Fume cupboard/safety cabinet
Scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is drawn
through the enclosure of the cupboard conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental area and those
using the equipment.
Risk assessment
For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of any
activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used and on
the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low. Below is a list of useful resources:
1. Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education assessments can refer to CLEAPSS (www. cleapss.org.uk) for
further advice.
2. Higher Education assessments should discuss the most appropriate risk assessment with the end user of the
building.
Other information
BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume
cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be
trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but
higher rates may cause noise problems.
1BS EN 14175-1:2003 Fume Cupboards, Vocabulary, BSi
BS EN 14175-2:2003 Fume Cupboards, Safety and performance requirements, BSi.
BS EN 14175-3:2003 Fume Cupboards, Type test methods, BSi.
BS EN 14175-4:2004 Fume Cupboards, onsitetest methods, BSi.
DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006 Fume Cupboards, Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSi.
BS EN 14175-6:2006 Fume Cupboards, Variable air volume fume cupboards, BSi.
BS EN 14175-7:2012 Fume Cupboards, Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load, BSi.
2BS 7989:2003 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, BSi.I, 2003.
3BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology. Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets, BSi.
4Building Bulletin 88: Fume Cupboards in Schools, 1988, Department for Education and Employment
5Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions, HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1, 1993.
89
Minimum standards
3
No
Aim
To ensure that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved through design, and controls are selected to maintain a
thermally comfortable environment for occupants within the building.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Thermal modelling
1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software in accordance with CIBSE AM11 1 Building Energy and
Environmental Modelling.
2. The modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver thermal comfort levels in
occupied spaces in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design2 ; or other appropriate
industry standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement/level for the building type) and CIBSE
TM52 Avoiding overheating in European Buildings1, for free-running buildings.
3. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic thermal analysis. For
smaller and more basic building designs with less complex heating or cooling systems, an alternative less complex
means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be in accordance with CIBSE AM11).
4. Thermal modelling results demonstrate that thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces meet the category B
requirements for both PMV (predicted mean vote) and PPD (predicted percentage of dissatisfied) indices as set out in
Table A.1 of Annex A in ISO 7730:2005. When assessing free-running buildings, parameters for the hours of
exceedance, daily weighted exceedance and upper limit temperature, as outlined in CIBSE TM52, should be used to
establish the risk of overheating.
5. The PMV and PPD indices are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, based on the modelling
undertaken above.
One credit - Adaptability - for a projected climate change scenario
6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved.
7. Thermal modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver the same thermal comfort
levels, PMV and PPD indices in occupied spaces achieved for the first credit under a projected climate change
environment (see Relevant definitions)
8. Where thermal comfort criteria are not met for the projected climate change environment, the project team
demonstrates how the building has been adapted, or will be adaptable in future using passive design solutions in order
to subsequently meet the requirements under criterion 7.
9. The PMV and PPD indices are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, based on the modelling
undertaken above.
1CIBSE TM52 The limits of thermal comfort: Avoiding overheating in European buildings, 2013
90
One credit - Thermal zoning and controls
10. Criteria 1 to 5 are achieved.
11. The thermal modelling analysis (undertaken for compliance with criteria 1-5) has informed the temperature control
strategy for the building and its users.
12. The strategy for proposed heating/cooling system(s) demonstrates that it has addressed the following:
a. Zones within the building and how the building services could efficiently and appropriately heat or cool these areas.
For example consider the different requirements for the central core of a building compared with the external
perimeter adjacent to the windows.
b. The degree of occupant control required for these zones, based on discussions with the end user (or alternatively
building type oruse specific design guidance, case studies, feedback) considers:
i. User knowledge of building services
ii. Occupancy type, patterns and room functions (and therefore appropriate level of control required)
iii. How the user is likely to operate or interact with the system(s), e.g. are they likely to open windows, access
thermostatic radiator valves (TRV) on radiators, change air conditioning settings etc.,
iv. The user expectations ( this may differ in the summer and winter)and degree of individual control (i.e. obtaining
the balance between occupant preferences, for example some occupants like fresh air and others dislike drafts).
c. How the proposed systems will interact with each other (where there is more than one system) and how this may
affect the thermal comfort of the building occupants.
d. The need or otherwise for an accessible building user actuated manual override for any automatic systems.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Thermal modelling criteria 1-5
Option 1 - Shell only:All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and
function apply. However for the purpose of the thermal model a baseline servicing
strategy will need to be assumed. This is to reduce the risk of an under-performing
fabric being designed for the basic building envelope.
Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type
and function apply. However, where assumptions are required for the purpose of
the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns
and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal
modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.
Adaptability - for projected climate changes criteria 6-9
Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core
assessment option.
and function apply. However where assumptions are required for the purpose of
the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns
and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal
modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.
91
Ref
Terms
Description
Thermal zoning and controls criteria 10-12
Both option 1 and 2: These criteria are not applicable to shell and core assessments.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
CN3
Dynamic thermal
modelling
For simple building assessments, dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement
to achieve the credits but may be preferable as it can provide more accurate
analysis results. Note that assessment criterion 3 already clarifies use of an
alternative less complex means of modelling, which must be in accordance with
CIBSE AM11.
Country specific
CN4
Country specific
CN5
Appropriate
industry standard
See criterion 2.
BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any
recognised collaborative industry or sector best practice standard or guidance that
sets thermal performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and design
temperature can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes
of this BREEAM issue.
CIBSE Guide A (table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort
criteria (temperature ranges) for a number of specific building applications. See also
the relevant Compliance Notes below for industry standards deemed appropriate
by BREEAM for schools and healthcare buildings.
CN6
Buildings with less
complex
heating/cooling
systems
See criterion 3.
For buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems the thermal comfort
strategy need only comply with criteria 12a and b.
Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control
(within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external
wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). For example,
adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building
perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan
coil units.
Note: The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the
assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before
accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria.
Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in
Technology Guide CTG002 Heating control3.
General
92
Ref
Terms
Description
CN7
Industrial
Industrial unit with
no office space
Where an industrial unit contains no office space and only an operational or storage
area, this BREEAM issue does not apply.
CN8
Education (schools
only)
Appropriate
industry standards
and criteria for
schools,
See criterion 2.
An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of
school buildings. This standard includes the requirement that there should be no
more than 120 hours when the air temperature in the classroom rises above 28 °C.
However, to comply with BREEAM (in relation to criterion 2) internal summer
temperatures in the classroom must be significantly better than the
recommendations of Building Bulletin 101, e.g. there are fewer than 60 hours a year
where temperatures rise above 28 °C. This additional criteria is set to ensure closer
alignment with CIBSE Guide A, which recommends limiting the expected occurrence
of operative temperatures above 28 º C to 1% of the annual occupied period (e.g.
around 25–30 hours).
For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a
suitable alternative to an AM11 full dynamic model.
CN9
Healthcare
appropriate
industry standards
and criteria
See criterion 2.
The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum
03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Thermal comfort levels in
patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the temperature ranges set
out in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must
not exceed 28 º C dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 0301, paragraph 2.15). Other occupied spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2
should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design.
CN10
Education and
prisons
occupant controls
See criterion 8.
In this issue, occupant controls are intended to be for staff-use only.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
7, 8, 11, 12
Thermal comfort study
93
ClassCool
A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES) which provides a
simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool may not be appropriate for other
spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing overheating will be
requiredwww.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq..
Clinical areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort
Occupied space
Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort, however for the purpose of BREEAM issue Hea 04 the definition excludes the
following:
1. Atria or concourses
2. Entrance halls or reception areas
3. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms
Passive design
Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and lighting
demand. Examples of passive design include optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and
maximise daylighting, manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and, making
effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures.
Patient areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Predicted mean vote (PMV)
The PMV is an index that predicts the mean votes of a large group of persons on the seven-point thermal sensation
scale based on the heat balance of the human body. Thermal balance is obtained when the internal heat production in
the body is equal to the loss of heat to the environment. See 'Other Information' for the seven point thermal sensation
scale.
Predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD)
The PPD is an index that establishes a quantitative prediction of the percentage of thermally dissatisfied people who
feel too cool or too warm. For the purposes of ISO 7730, thermally dissatisfied people are those who will feel hot,
warm, cool or cold. See the seven-point thermal sensation scale in 'Other Information'.
Projected climate change environment
Dynamic thermal simulation software packages currently provide the facility for building designs to be assessed
under external climatic conditions specific to geographic location. Industry standard weather data for the UK is
available in the form of Test Reference Years (TRYs) and Design Summer Years (DSYs) provided by CIBSE.
This weather data enables thermal analysis of building designs under current climatic conditions, yet no account is
taken of the projected variations in weather data that will occur during the building's life-cycle as a result of climate
change. The following probabilistic TRY weather data files should be used to establish the projected climate change
environment against which the design is evaluated:
Free Running Buildings
Time Period: 2050s
Emissions Scenario: Medium (A1B)
Mechanically Ventilated or Mixed Mode Buildings
Time Period: 2030s
Emissions Scenario: Medium (A1B)
The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate change
scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration of building
occupant risk/sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the minimum
94
requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the building services
life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is chosen for mechanically
ventilated/mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing equipment life span (before
major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant which could lead to inefficient
operation.
Separate occupant control
Responsive heating or cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated
by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or
area they control.
Thermal comfort
In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and
interpretation of thermal comfort, thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices and local
thermal comfort criteria and is ‘that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with the thermal environment.’
The term ‘thermal comfort’ describes a person’s psychological state of mind and is usually referred to in terms of
whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to define because it needs to account for
a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what makes people feel comfortable. HSE
considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number of people who should be thermally
comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage appropriate and robust consideration of
thermal comfort issues and specification of appropriate occupant controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the
space and thermal comfort for the majority of building occupants.
Thermal dynamic analysis
Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most
complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of
model enables annual heating or cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed.
Other information
Projected climate change weather data
A range of alternative probabilistic weather files produced in accordance with the UK climate impacts programme (UKCIP)
2009 projections have been produced to be compatible with simulation software packages. These weather files provide the
opportunity to evaluate the impact of varying climate change scenarios building design performance throughout its life-cycle.
Projected climate change weather files are currently available in TRYs and DSYs and according to three projected time
periods; 2030s, 2050s and 2080s, and for each period two 'emissions scenarios' are available; Medium Emissions (A1B) and
High Emissions (A1F1).
The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different locations
across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the PROMETHEUS project are
available at the following location:
http://emps.exeter.ac.uk/research/energy-environment/cee/projects/prometheus/
1CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998.
2CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7th Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, 2007
3CTG002 Technology Guide, Heating control: maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption, The Carbon Trust, 2006
95
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To ensure the building's acoustic performance including sound insulation meet the appropriate standards for its purpose.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance :
Up to three credits for Education, Healthcare, Office and Law Courts building types
1. The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the checklists
and tables section which defines criteria for the acoustic principles of:
a. Sound insulation
b. Indoor ambient noise level
c. Reverberation times
Up to three credits are available for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and ‘Other’ building types
Up to two credits
2. Where the building meets the acoustic performance standards and testing requirements detailed in Table - 22 (see
additional information) for all relevant functional areas.
OR
Up to three credits
3. Where a suitably qualified acoustician (see relevant definitions) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance
requirements for all function areas in the building using the three acoustic principles defined in criterion 1, setting out the
performance requirements for each and the testing regime required.
Up to four credits are available for Multi-residential and 'other residential institutions' building types
4. One, three orf four credits are available for multi-residential and other residential institution buildings where the relevant
criteria in the checklists and table section has been applied. Please also see CN7.
Table - 18: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings
Education buildings (Three credits)
First credit - Sound insulation
96
Criteria
Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 2 of the Acoustic Performance Standard for the
Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June 2013 1 relating to airborne and impact sound
insulation of walls and floors.
Testing
requirement
A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
accordance with the APS requirements and the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of
Schools2.
Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria
Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all room types. For
roofs with a mass per unit area less than 150kg/m2 (lightweight roofs) or any roofs with glazing or
rooflights, calculations using laboratory data with ‘heavy’ rain noise excitation as defined in BS EN ISO
140-18 3 are required (in accordance with the guidance in APS) for teaching/learning spaces to
demonstrate that the reverberant sound pressure level in these rooms are not more than 25 dB
above the appropriate limits presented within Section 2 of APS, table 1.
Testing
requirement
Indoor ambient noise levels (excluding rain noise):
A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Rain noise: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance,
reference is also made to the notes below.
Notes
For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater
than 150kg/m2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing or rooflights,
calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.
Third credit - Reverberation
Criteria
Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index
(STI):
Teaching and study spaces: achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for teaching and
study spaces set out within table 5 in Section 2 of APS.
Open plan teaching spaces: achieve the performance requirements relating to speech transmission
index (STI) set out within Section 2.8 of APS.
Corridor and stairwells: for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces, achieve the
performance requirements relating to sound absorption.
Testing
requirement
Teaching and study spaces:
the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Open Plan teaching spaces:
STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in
the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Corridors and stairwells:
1Acoustic Performance Standards for the Priority Schools Building Programme, Department of Health, June 2013
2ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic Testing of Schools, version 1.2, July 2011
3BS EN ISO 140-18:2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements
97
Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Where this
refers to the use of building regulations, the country specific building regulations or standards can be
applied (see relevant definitions).
Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings
Healthcare buildings (three credits)
Criteria
Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of HTM 0801:Acoustics 2013 1 determined according to the privacy requirements using both Table 3 and Table
4 from HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Impact noise is controlled at source and the weighted standardised
impact sound pressure level (L’nT,w) does not exceed 65dB in noise sensitive rooms, following the
guidance in HTM 08-01:Acoustics.
Testing
requirement
accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria
The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in Table 1 of HTM
08-01 Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise from mechanical and electrical
services in Table 2 of HTM 08-01 Acoustics are not exceeded.
Testing
requirement
the Section 7 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the
HTM 08-01 criteria demonstrates compliance.
Criteria
Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index
(STI)):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics.
Testing
Requirement
the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings
Office buildings (Three credits)
1HTM 08-01, Acoustics, Health Technical Memorandum, Department of Health, 2013
98
Office buildings (Three credits)
Criteria
The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the
performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999 1.
Testing
requirement
accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional
information section of this BREEAM issue.
Criteria
Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels given in Section
7 of BS 8233:1999.
Testing
requirement
the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlines in the Additional information section of
this BREEAM issue.
Notes
Unless calculations from the suitably qualified acoustician or mechanical services engineer confirm
otherwise; the contribution to the indoor ambient noise level from mechanical services for the privacy
index should be assumed to be less than 35 dB, LAeq,T, regardless of the upper limit during the design
stage of the project. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient
targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking
system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and
in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.
Criteria
Acoustic environment (control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set
out in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999.
Testing
Requirement
the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of
this BREEAM issue.
Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law Courts buildings
Law Courts buildings (three credits)
First Credit - Sound insulation
Criteria
The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with
the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010 2.
Testing
requirement
accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where
1BS 8233: Sound Insulation and noise reduction for buildings - Code of practice, 1999
2Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), Her Majesty's Court Service (HMCS), 2010
99
Law Courts buildings (three credits)
applicable.
Criteria
Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG.
Testing
requirement
Section 28 of the CSDG.
Criteria
Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set
out in Section 28 of the CSDG.
Testing
requirement
Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.
Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types
Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits)
First credit – Sound insulation and internal indoor ambient noise levels
Room
function
All room functions
Criteria
Internal indoor ambient noise levels:
Indoor ambient noise levels comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels of BS 8233:1999, Tables 5
and 6 (see additional information section) unless otherwise stated below. Where the room types
below are present, the appropriate criteria for ambient noise levels, sound insulation and acoustic
privacy must also be achieved.
Testing
requirement
accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional
information section of this BREEAM issue.
Room
function
Educational space (teaching and lecture spaces)
Criteria
Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all teaching and
lecture theatre room types. See also the criteria below for acoustically sensitive rooms and apply if
relevant.
Testing
requirement
100
the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: Installation of a specification
compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the “notes” below.
Notes
For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater
than 150kg/m2(including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing/rooflights,
calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.
Room
function
Medical treatment rooms
Criteria
Sound insulation:
Achieve the airborne and impact sound insulation criteria in Health Technical Memorandum HTM 0801.
Testing
requirement
Sound insulation:
accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics or SHTM 08-0: Specialist
Services Acoustics, 20111 for assessments in Scotland.
Room
function
Acoustically sensitive rooms
Criteria
Sound insulation:
The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the
following, where relevant: General office type areas: section 7.6.3.1 of BS 8233, as follows, Dw + LAeq,T
> 75.Where privacy is viewed to be critical by the client and/or design team, or where the room is
adjacent to a noisy space such as a music room, the area should comply with an enhanced privacy
index: Dw + LAeq,T > 85. Examples of rooms where these criteria may be applicable include a judges
chamber that is next to another judges chamber or waiting room, a Human Resources meeting room
next to an adjacent office (cellular or open plan). Bedrooms in hotels or other residential institutions not
assessed under BREEAM Multi-residential: section 7.6.2.2 of BS 8233 as follows: sound insulation
(DnT,w) of not less than 50 dB for partitions and floors between rooms and between rooms and
corridors.
Testing
requirement
Sound insulation:
accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures in the Methodology section.
Notes
See Relevant definitions.
To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a
minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be
required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in operation at
the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.
Second credit – Reverberation
Room
function
Rooms/areas used for speech or performance, including public speaking
101
Criteria
Achieve reverberation times compliant with Section 2 of APS. In addition, or alternatively, if relevant to
the assessed building; classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture theatres achieve reverberation times
compliant with section 2 of APS.
Testing
requirement
Reverberation times within teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is
carried out by a compliant test body achieve the required performance standards set out in table 5 in
section 2 of APS. Measurements should be carried out in accordance with the ANC Good Practice
Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical
student listening positions in the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide,
Acoustic testing of Schools.
Corridors and stairwells: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates
compliance. Reference is also made to the 'notes' below.
Notes
Where the reverberation time required by the relevant standard is not appropriate for the type of
space/building assessed, the acoustician must confirm why this is the case. In addition the acoustician
must set alternative appropriate reverberation times and provide these to demonstrate compliance.
Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions
Multi-residential and 'Other residential' buildings (four credits)
Room
function
Individual bedrooms and self- contained dwellings
Criteria
One credit
Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least
3dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards.
Three credits
Four credits
Testing
requirement
A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the normal
programme of testing described in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards for every group or
sub-group of dwelling (houses, flats or rooms for residential purposes) this must demonstrate that
the performance standards detailed within this table are achieved.
OR
Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been registered with and assessed and
approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards required
for the number of credits sought (see additional information section for further information on
Robust Details).
Notes
Testing should be between habitable rooms on the ground floor and at higher storey levels if
applicable. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to carry
out the number of tests specified in the appropriate Building Regulations or Standards, all of the
available suitable separating walls or floors must be tested.
See also CN7
102
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Indoor ambient noise criteria:
Both options – The basic built form has a large impact on the acoustic
performance of the building, and in the case of a shell and core development, this
aspect of the build would be outside the control of the tenant. A suitably qualified
acoustician (SQA) must carry out a quantifiable assessment of the specification of
the build form and any external factors that are likely to affect the indoor ambient
noise levels. From this assessment, the SQA must confirm that given a typical
arrangement and fit out specification for the building type, the development is
likely to meet the levels required to demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM
criteria.
Where the specific room functions and areas within the building are yet to be
defined, the acoustician must base their assessment on the most sensitive room
type likely to be present in the building, as a worst case. For example in a retail
assessment, where there are likely to be offices the acoustician should make an
assessment based on this scenario.
One credit can be awarded where this has been achieved.
Sound insulation and reverberation criteria:
Both options – Criteria not applicable.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Acoustic
regulations/standards
relevant
The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the
assessment of the issue:
England
For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance
standards in building regulations, in England, this is referring to Approved
Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010– Resistance to the
passage of sound,
Northern Ireland
standards in building regulations, in Northern Ireland, this is referring to - DOE
Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012
Scotland
For Healthcare buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of HTM08-01,
103
Ref
Terms
Description
assessments in Scotland should use SHTM08-01.
For Law Courts buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of Section 28 of Court
Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010-assessments in Scotland should refer
to ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements design guide 2011 1
and ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide
2011 2.
standards in building regulations, in Scotland, this is referring to - Technical
Handbook Section 5 - Noise, 2013
Wales
standards in building regulations, in Wales, this is referring to Approved
Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010– Resistance to the
passage of sound.
General
CN4
Building types without
areas 'used for
speech'
Where a building type does not have areas 'used for speech', it does not need to
comply with the relevant 'reverberation times' criteria. In these instances, the credit
available for reverberation can be awarded by default where the building
complies with the indoor ambient noise level and sound insulation criteria.
CN5
Remedial works
Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not
meet the standards, remedial works must be carried out prior to handover and
occupation and the spaces re-tested to ensure compliance. Remedial works must
be carried out to all affected and potentially affected areas, including rooms or
spaces previously untested of a similar construction and performance
requirement. The test report, or covering correspondence, should include a clear
statement that the testing is in accordance with the required standard (where
specified) or the BREEAM criteria (see Checklists and tables and Methodology
section), and include the relevant pass/fail criteria.
CN6
Programme of testing
It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness
on the day of testing. If this issue arises additional testing should be scheduled. It
may be that testing at less than the typical regime identified would be acceptable
in some instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case,
clear reasoning must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding
the credit(s).
CN7
Multi-residential or
'other residential
institutions'
Rooms not covered
by residential criteria
Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of ‘nonresidential’ areas such as offices, small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and
residential areas e.g. self contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes.
Where less than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes ‘nonresidential’ areas, these areas do not need to be assessed, hence only the
1ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements, design guide, Scottish Court Service, 2011
2ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide, Scottish Court Service, 2011
104
Ref
Terms
Description
residential spaces need to be assessed against the residential criteria to
demonstrate compliance with Table - 23.
Where more than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes areas
other than self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes:
If awarding 1 credit, only the self-contained dwellings and/or rooms for
residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance.
If awarding 3 or 4 credits the ‘non-residential’ areas must meet the
relevant criteria for their function, as set out in Table - 22 for ‘other
buildings’and the self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential
purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance.
The calculation for the percentage of floor area that is ‘nonresidential’ should
only include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort)
covered by the 'other buildings' criteria.
Methodology
Testing, measurement and calculation procedures
Where specific guidance on testing, measurement and calculation is not stated in the criteria tables above for the relevant
building type, or within the relevant standard/guidance referenced, the following procedures can be followed by the
acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN ISO
140 series, or the successor to these standards. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO
354:2003 should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 should be followed in respect of the number
of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise, when no specific
guidance is available, the following procedures should be used:
1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise making systems) and external
sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where windows are openable as
part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the purposes of calculations and open for
measurements. If openable windows are not part of the background/permanent ventilation strategy, then these should
be assumed to be closed for the purposes of calculation and closed for measurements.
2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms/spaces of each
performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing.
4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest either
because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade.
5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising each strategy.
Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade.
6. T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and 17.00).
7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be used. In this case,
measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of normal conditions throughout the day.
8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels and may be
utilized where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should not be used.
9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the floor level and
at least 1m away from any surface.
10. Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be conducted between
one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirement category and
construction type.
105
11. Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four teaching spaces
(separated from rooms above) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type.
12. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for acoustically sensitive
rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient noise levels in the absence of
construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when the building is complete, then, for
mechanical services the lower level of 35 dB, LAeq or the lowest design limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be
used.
The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance with the
performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above procedures, they
should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the
building meets the acoustic performance requirements.
Evidence
Criteria
All
4
Multi-residential specific - Where Robust
Details are to be used the following must be
provided:
1. Design team confirmation that Robust
Details chosen will achieve the required
performance standards for sound
insulation.
2. Purchase Statement from RDL which
confirms that the relevant plots are
registered with RDL.
Acoustically sensitive rooms
Where the term ‘acoustically sensitive rooms’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to any room/space the
design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy which may include the following
types of space/rooms (where specified);
1. Cellular offices
2. Meeting or interview or consulting or treatment rooms.
In addition;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
106
Court buildings: Witness/consultation rooms and judgesor magistrates chambers and jury retiring rooms
Prison buildings: Care or listener suites, Official visit rooms, ‘Closed visits’ rooms
Educational buildings/spaces: rooms for teaching and learning i.e. classrooms, lecture theatres
Rooms used for public speaking or seminars
Any other room orspace the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy.
Compliant test body
A Compliant Test Body is defined as :
1. Organisations having United Kingdom Accreditation Scheme (UKAS)accreditation to the appropriate scope, or
who are accredited by a member of the International Accreditation Forum (IAF - www.iaf.nu) to the appropriate
scope OR
2. Organisations or individuals registered with the Association of Noise Consultants (ANC) Registration Scheme OR
3. Organisations who can provide evidence that they follow the relevant principles of BS EN ISO/IEC 17024
(Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons)1 in relation to
BREEAM requirements.
Groups and sub-groups
As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage of
sound, section 1 (paragraphs 1.11 – 1.17). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as two
separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be broken
down into sub groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm between
dwellings, dwellings without steps/staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those with step/staggers.
This is because the presence of steps/staggers is likely to improve performance.
Habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a
reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms,
studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms.
Material change of use
This is where there is a change in the purpose for which or the circumstance in which a building is used e.g. where a
building has been converted from a non-dwelling (office, school, church etc.) to a dwelling.
Multiple occupancy offices
Office space that is not cellular in nature, i.e. it is open-plan, and designed to accommodate more than two desk
spaces/workstations.
Non-habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered a habitable room (as
defined above), it includes rooms such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms.
Occupied spaces
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 and note that for BREEAM issue Hea 05 there is a specific, unrelated, definition of
'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement, see Compliance notes for details.
Robust details
Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to pre-completion sound insulation testing
as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations
(England and Wales), DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 (Northern Ireland) and Technical Handbook Section 5 Noise, 2013 (Scotland). The relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance
with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the required minimum
standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and random sound insulation tests after
construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM (Multi-residential building) credits only when it
achieves a specified performance level as assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment
for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for
residential purposes or material change of use.
Room for residential purposes
This is defined within the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E as a room, or a suite of
rooms which is not a dwelling (house or a flat) and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep. It includes a
room in a hostel, hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home, whether or not the room is
107
separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other
similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.
Specified performance level
Robust Details are approved for credits under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), where the specified
performance levels set out below are met. Construction types that meet these levels are listed on the Robust Details
website www.robustdetails.com on the CSH page. Where assessing self-contained dwellings in multi-residential
buildings that are not defined as material change of use or rooms for residential purposes, Robust Details that meet
the specified performance level as set out below can also comply with the credit criteria for self-contained units in
multi-residential buildings and reference must be made to the CSH page on the Robust Details website:
1. Mature Robust Details (published for over 12 months and at least 100 test results) – regular assessment based
on the 90th percentile of results from the last 100 site tests
2. Low use Robust Detail (published for over 12 months but fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based
on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme and the site tests available, and reviewed
regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected.
3. New Robust Detail (published for less than 12 months and fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based
on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme, and reviewed regularly as new test results
become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected.
It should be noted that not all RDs will necessarily achieve the performance levels required to achieve multi-residential
credits. If in doubt, please check the list of currently approved details with RDL directly at www.robustdetails.com.
Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA)
An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body.
The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics. An individual achieving all the
following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment:
1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics/sound testing.
2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the built
environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acoustic
performance levels and mitigation measures.
Where a suitably qualified acoustician is verifying the acoustic measurements/calculations carried out by another
acoustician who does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report
and confirm in writing that they have found it to:
1. Represent sound industry practice
2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed
3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably
Qualified Acoustician is required.
Single occupancy offices
Cellular office space designed to accommodate one or two desk spaces/workstations (typically no greater than
10m2).
Unoccupied spaces
Where the term ‘unoccupied space’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the nature of the space for the
purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried out when the
space is unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise.
Weighted standardized level differences (D
)
nT,w
HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating airborne sound insulation on site’.
Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L'
)
nT,w
HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating impact airborne sound insulation on site’.
108
Other information
Noise rating (NR) curves
Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict internal noise levels due to
mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses the indoor ambient noise level, LAeq,T which includes
external noise transmitted via the façade as well as internal noise such as that from mechanical ventilation systems. In the
absence of strong low frequency noise, LAeq,T can be estimated from the NR value using the following formula: LAeq,T≈ NR + 6
dB. Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure levels in the individual frequency bands, an estimate for the
indoor ambient noise level LAeq,T can still be determined from the NR value for the building services noise. The LAeq,T for the
external noise transmitted via the façade must then be combined with the LAeq,T for the building services.
1ISO/IEC 17024:2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons
109
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage effective measures that promote safe and secure use and access to and from the building.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Safe access
Where external site areas form part of the assessed development the following apply:
1. Dedicated cycle paths provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to any cycle storage provided, without the need to
deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to offsite cycle paths (or other appropriate safe route) where these
run adjacent to the development’s site boundary.
2. Footpaths on site provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to the building entrance(s) and connect to public
footpaths off-site (where existing), providing practical and convenient access to local transport nodes and other off-site
amenities (where existing).
3. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off/adjoining to the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian
footpaths, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes.
4. Dedicated pedestrian crossings must be provided where pedestrian routes cross vehicle access routes, and
appropriate traffic calming measures must be in place to slow traffic down at these crossing points.
5. For large developments with a high number of public users or visitors, pedestrian footpaths must be signposted to
other local amenities and public transport nodes off-site (where existing).
6. The lighting for access roads, pedestrian routes and cycle lanes is compliant with the external lighting criteria defined in
Hea 01 Visual comfort, i.e. in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 1 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply:
7. Delivery areas are not directly accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist
routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public.
8. There is a dedicated parking/waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the manoeuvring area
and staff and visitor car parking.
9. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely to access
the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting.
10. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery vehicle manoeuvring area
and staff/visitor car parking (if appropriate given the building type/function).
1BS 5489-1:2013 Part 1: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013
110
One credit - Security of site and building
11. A suitably qualified security consultant conducts an evidence-based Crime Impact Assessment (CIA) during or prior to
Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). The CIA must include:
a. A visual audit of the site and surroundings, identifying environmental cues and features pertinent to the security of
the proposed development,
b. A summary of crime and disorder issues in the immediate vicinity of the proposed development, making reference
to relevant crime statistics,
c. Threats specific to the proposed, likely or potential use of the building(s),
d. Threats specific to the proposed, likely or potential user groups of the building(s),
e. Any detrimental effects the development may have on surrounding development or public space relevant to crime
and the fear of crime.
12. The suitably qualified security consultant provides recommendations or solutions to the project team, during or prior to
Concept Design(RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). These recommendations or solutions shall aim to ensure that the design of
buildings, public and private car parks and public or amenity space:
a. Are designed and specified to minimise the risk of crime and fear of crime,.
b. Address the threats and issues identified in the preceding Crime Impact Assessment,
c. Are designed in accordance with a relevant approved security standard/scheme.
13. The suitably qualified security consultant completes a site inspection at the post-construction stage to confirm the
development embodies the recommendations/solutions resulting from a compliant Crime Impact Assessment (as
outlined above). Any deviation from those recommendations or solutions will need to be justified, documented and
agreed in advance with the suitably qualified security consultant performing the site inspection.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
111
Terms
Description
CN4
Development does
not have any
external site areas.
See criteria 11, 12
and 13.
The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the
assessed building and within the boundary of the assessed development
(regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the responsibility of the
future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed
building does not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from
the public highway/footpath i.e. there is no onsite vehicle access and parking areas,
then the criteria concerning safe access are not applicable. In such instances the two
available credits must be assessed and awarded based on compliance with the
security criteria.
CN5
Covered parking
area, see criteria 1 to
10
Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking
facility, and cyclists/pedestrians/delivery vehicles access the building via this area,
then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this area must be assessed against
those criteria.
CN6
Delivery access
through parking
areas (smaller
sites/deliveries) S
See criteria 1 to 10
apart from 7
Criterion 7 (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for
smaller sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and
size which is likely to mean all deliveries to the building will be made by small vans
and not heavy goods vehicles.
CN7
No vehicle delivery
and manoeuvring
areas
See criteria 1 to 6
The criteria concerning vehicle delivery access is not applicable where dedicated
delivery access and drop-off areas do not form part of the assessed development.
Ref
General
CN8
Prisons
Scope of security
criteria for buildings
on prison sites
In the case of an assessment of a prison building/development the security criteria
apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the
secure perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison site). This could include visitor
reception/waiting buildings, facilities/estates offices and storage and visitor/staff
parking. Security relating to secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls
outside of the scope of BREEAM.
Methodology
None.
112
Evidence
Criteria
All
Approved security standards/schemes
Current BREEAM-approved standards and schemes are:
Secured by Design Secured by Design: http://www.securedbydesign.com/professionals/guides.aspx
Safer Parking Scheme Secured by Design: Car parks: www.britishparking.co.uk
Project teams and suitably qualified security consultants seeking to use alternative standards or schemes must
contact BRE Global Ltd with the relevant information and await confirmation that the standard or scheme is suitably
equivalent to those listed above.
Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO)
An ALO is the same as the Crime Prevention Design Advisor (see below) and is the title given to the same role in some
police forces. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx
Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA)
A Crime Prevention Design Advisor is a specialist crime prevention officer, trained at the Home Office Crime
Reduction College, who deals with crime risk and designing out crime advice for the built environment. In addition to
physical security measures the officer will consider defensible space, access, crime and movement generators all of
which can contribute to a reduction in crime and disorder. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx
Crime Impact Assessment (CIA)
A study to identify the threats of crime within the vicinity of the development, assessing the likely impacts of the crime
risks identified.
Dedicated cycle lanes
Marked-out and clearly signed routes to accommodate building users arriving on and travelling through the
assessed site on a bicycle. Cycle lanes should be fit for purpose and the following publications offer guidance on how
to appropriately size, design and construct cycle lanes:
1. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, 2008.
2. The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts of Appendix
VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist
Dedicated pedestrian crossing
Dedicated infrastructure/road markings and signage/instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a vehicle
carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to/from the building. Such a crossing must be fit for
purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use specific to the site. It
will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of pedestrians in the
carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give way to the pedestrian.
External site areas
Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development’s site boundary, which contain vehicle and/or
pedestrian access roads/pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas.
113
Peer review
A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a
standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional
ethics.
Secured by Design (SBD)
A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to adopt crime prevention measures in the design
of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity for and fear of crime. Secured by Design is owned by the
Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of the Home Office Crime Reduction and Community
Safety Group and other Government Departments. The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and
Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) endorse and support the
Secured by Design programme.
The safer parking scheme
An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking
facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark®, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the criteria of a risk
assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and supported
by the Home Office and Scottish Executive.
Suitably Qualified Security Consultant (SQSC)
The following are, at present, deemed to meet this definition:
1. Crime Prevention Design Advisors (CPDA) or Architectural Liaison Officers (ALO); or
2. A practising security consultant that meets the following requirements:
a. Minimum of three years relevant experience within the last five years. This experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting security in relation to construction and the built
environment, including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for security and crime
prevention.
b. Hold a recognised qualification in design and crime prevention. This qualification must incorporate recognised
crime prevention theories and methodologies. These can include ‘situational crime prevention’ and CPTED
(Crime Prevention through Environmental Design).
c. Maintains (full) membership to a relevant professional body or accreditation scheme that meets the following:
i. Has a professional code of conduct, to which members must adhere to; and
ii. Ongoing membership is subject to peer review or the consultants’ Crime Impact Assessments and security
recommendations/solutions are subject to regular audits by the scheme operator.
Organisations, associations or scheme operators who wish to have their membership recognised as ‘suitably
qualified’, should review their current status (and therefore their members) against the requirements above and,
where they feel they are compliant, contact BRE Global Ltd with the relevant information/evidence.
Other information
The Metric Handbook1 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles.
In addition to the SbD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the
Department for Education and Employment (1996)2, offers guidance on how to improve the security of school premises.
1Metric handbook Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 4th Ed. 2012.
2Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and
Employment (1996)
114
Energy
Energy
115
Energy
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon
emissions
Minimum standards
12
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage buildings designed to minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and
CO2 emissions.
Assessment criteria
Up to twelve credits - Energy performance
1. Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPRNC). Compare the EPRNCachieved with the
benchmarks in Table - 24 and award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.
Table - 24: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale
BREEAM
credits
EPRNC
Minimum standards
1
0.075
Requires a performance improvement progressively better than the relevant
national building regulations compliant standard (See Other information).
2
0.15
3
0.225
4
0.30
5
0.375
6
0.45
7
0.525
116
Excellent
Energy
BREEAM
credits
EPRNC
Minimum standards
8
0.60
Outstanding
9
0.675
10
0.75
11
0.825
12
0.90
Zero net regulated CO2 emissions.
A description of how the EPRNC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary energy
consumption and CO2 emissions is provided in the Methodology section.
Note:The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and whilst they use the same methodology
and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and, set different requirements for
regulatory compliance i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted forin the BREEAM NC 2014 Ene01 methodology through
the ‘translator curves’ defined for each country. Therefore, the EPRNC and BREEAM credits are determined by comparing the
assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which the
building is located.
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve up to five innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:
Up to four credits - zero regulated carbon
2. The building achieves an EPRNC≥ 0.9 and zero net regulated CO2 emissions (see Relevant definitions).
3. An equivalent percentage of the buildings modelled ‘regulated’ operational energy consumption, as stipulated inTable 25, is generated by carbon neutral onsite or near-site sources and used to meet energy demand from ‘unregulated’
building systems or processes.
Five credits - carbon negative
4. The building is ‘carbon negative’ in terms of its total modelled operational energy consumption, including regulated and
unregulated energy (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section of this issue).
Table - 25: Innovation credits
Innovation credits
Equivalent % criteria
1
10%
2
20%
3
50%
4
80%
5
> 100%
117
Energy
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Energy performance, criterion 1
Option 1 - Shell only: Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio just for the building’s
heating and cooling energy demand only (EPRED). Compare the EPRED achieved with
the EPRNC in Table 1 'Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale' with the EPRED substituted for
the EPRNC. Award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.
The exemplary credits for this issue are not applicable for shell only.
and function apply.
Services complying with the minimum requirements set out in relevant national
building regulations should be assumed where these services are not within the
remit of the shell and core developer (i.e. where services will be provided as part of
the fit-out works).
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Building regulations
for energy
The following lists the building regulations that are used to define each country’s
BREEAM ‘translator curve’ for the purpose of benchmarking building energy
performance relative to a regulatory baseline and awarding credits for this issue.
Scotland
Technical Handbook 2013 Non Domestic, Section 6 Energy
Northern Ireland
Technical Booklet F2 2012 Conservation of fuel and power in buildings other than
dwellings
England
Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new
buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition - for use in England
Wales
At the time of writing, the building regulations for Wales are under development.
The intention is to finalise the Part L Approved Documents and make the regulatory
118
Ref
Terms
Energy
Description
changes, to be implemented in June 2014.
General
CN4
Extensions to
existing buildings
See criterion 1.
Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is being
assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the energy
modelling must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any
existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed
that will service the new extension.
The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where
this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to
consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating,
cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM assessed.
CN5
Renewable and low
carbon Installations
See criterion 2c.
Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM
issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to off-set CO2
emissions arising from regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated
energy consumption. The LZC technology can be installed onsite,or near-site where
a private wire arrangement is in place (see Relevant definitions).
CN6
Zero carbon sources
of energy - double
counting
The project team must avoid double counting the energy from the zero carbon
source. This may be particularly relevant where that source of energy generation is
being accounted for in terms of the assessed building’s regulated CO2 emissions
and/or it will contribute to off-setting other ‘ buildings' CO2 emissions, which are not
part of this assessment.
CN7
Mixed use buildings
assessed using SAP
or SAP and SBEM
See criterion 1.
In some instances, BREEAM assessed buildings with residential areas may have been
classified under the domestic building regulations and will therefore have had their
energy use modelled using the domestic assessment method, SAP, as well as or
instead of SBEM. Further guidance on assessing a building's Ene 01 performance
where SAP is used is provided in the Other information section for this assessment
issue.
CN8
Building assessed
part of a larger
development
Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and
either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the
amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO
2
emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy demand
compared to the total energy demand for the site.
CN9
Estimating energy
demand from
unregulated
building systems/
processes
At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling
unregulated energy demands in a building. To demonstrate compliance with the
‘exemplary level criteria’ the building’s modelled operational ‘regulated’ energy
consumption is therefore used as a proxy for a building’s unregulated energy
demand, i.e. unregulated energy equals 100% of regulated energy. Whilst not
accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award credits for buildings
that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via onsite or near-site
renewable energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can
be accurately predicted, then this data can be used to determine the percentage of
unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources. Unregulated
119
Energy
Terms
Ref
Description
energy demand could be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or
the same building type with the same unregulated system/process loads or by
using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54: 2013, 'Evaluating operational
energy performance of buildings at the design stage'1.
Methodology
The methodology for the EPRNC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when determining the
number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are:
1. The building’s heating and cooling energy demand
2. The building's primary energy consumption
3. The total resulting CO2 emissions.
These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national building
regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The percentage
improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and 'translated' into a ratio of performance for each
metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine the overall Energy Performance
Ratio (EPRNC).
The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building’s
specified/designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor using
approved building energy calculation software:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Building floor area (m2)
Notional building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m2)
Actual building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m2)
Notional building primary energy consumption (kWh/m2)
Actual building primary energy consumption (kWh/m2)
Target Emission Rate (TER) (kgCO2/m2)
Building Emission Rate (BER) (kgCO2/m2)
The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National Calculation
Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building regulation compliance. This
data is then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPRNC and number of credits achieved. The Ene 01
calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section.
The methodology summarised above is described in greater detail in a guidance note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
Evidence
Criteria
3-5
1-2
A copy of the Building Regulations
Output Document from the approved
120
Final post construction stage
As per interim design stage, but with the output
documents from the approved software reflecting
Criteria
3-5
Energy
software. The output documents
must be based on the design stage of
analysis.
A copy of the Building Regulations
Output Document from the design
stage SAP calculations (where relevant
for multi-residential buildings)
performance at the “as built” stage of analysis. This
must account for any changes to the specification
during construction and the measured air leakage
rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances (as
required by building regulations).
As above, plus:
Evidence confirming :
1. The total carbon neutral energy
generation (kWh/yr)
2. The source of the carbon neutral
energy
3. Calculated estimate of energy
consumption from unregulated
systems/process (kWh/yr)
(required only if confirming
carbon negative status).
4. Calculated estimate of exported
energy surplus (required only if
confirming carbon negative
status).
As required above and as per interim design stage.
Accredited energy assessor
A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be licensed by
the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of non-domestic/
domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building regulations in the country of
origin.
For a full list of approved accreditation schemes/organisations for energy assessors and links to registers of
accredited energy assessor’s visit:
1. Wales: https://www.ndepcregister.com/ (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)
2. Scotland: www.scotland.gov.uk
3. Northern Ireland: www.epbniregisternd.com (non-domestic), https://www.epbniregister.com/ (domestic)
4. England: www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)
121
Energy
Approved building energy calculation software
Software approved for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the energy efficiency and carbon emission
requirements of the building regulations (and in turn compliance with the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive
(EPBD) recast 2012. The definition includes the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) and its interface iSBEM, as well
as third party software approved by the relevant government department.A list of approved software for nondomestic buildings is available as follows:
1. Wales: www.ncm.bre.co.uk
2. Scotland: http://www.scotland.gov.uk/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/Buildingstandards/techbooks/sectsixprg
3. Wales, Northern Ireland and England: http://www.ncm.bre.co.uk/
4. England: http://www.ncm.bre.co.uk
Approved building energy calculation software will provide the data required for calculating the EPRNC and BREEAM
Ene 01 credits.
Please note that for dwellings (where relevant to the assessment of multi-residential buildings), the government’s
Standard Assessment Procedure for the Energy Rating of Dwellings (SAP) may be used. The current version is SAP
2012 version 9.92 (October 2013).See also compliance note regarding the use of SAP outputs in multi-residential
building assessments.
Building Emission Rate (BER)
The building CO2 emission rate expressed as kgCO2/m2/year. The BER is calculated in accordance with the National
Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM).
Building regulations
Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health for
people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved and
facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside buildings. In
Scotland, they also aim to secure the welfare and convenience of persons in or about buildings and to further the
achievement of sustainable development. See CN3 for details of the relevant documents for each country.
Carbon negative building
A building/site that generates, surplus to its own energy demand, an excess of renewable or carbon neutral energy
and exports that surplus via the national grid to meet other, off-site energy demands, i.e. the building is a net exporter
of zero carbon energy.
Surplus in this respect means the building/site generates more energy via renewable/carbon neutral sources that it
needs to meet its own regulated and unregulated energy needs. Any surplus must be exported through the national
grid as additional capacity to that required by the Renewables Obligation i.e. Renewable Obligation Certificates are
not claimed/sold for the renewable energy generation (see definition of Renewables Obligation Certificate).
This definition of carbon negative focuses only on energy and carbon dioxide emissions resulting from the
operational stage of the building life cycle (as this is the stated aim of this assessment issue). It does not take in to
account the embodied carbon, in terms of carbon fixing or emissions resulting from the manufacture or disposal of
building materials and components (these impacts/benefits are dealt with in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life Cycle Impacts).
Carbon neutral
Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions, reducing
those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes carbon emissions
from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plan and systems. See the 'zero net regulatedCO2
emissions' definition also.
Controlled service or fitting
The building regulations2 define this as a service or fitting in relation to which the building regulations imposes a
requirement.
Dwelling Emission Rate (DER)
The DER is the estimated carbon dioxide emissions per m2 per year (kgCO2/m2yr) for the dwelling as designed. It
accounts for energy used in heating, fixed cooling, hot water and lighting. It is the equivalent of the BER for dwellings.
122
Energy
Dynamic simulation model (DSM)
A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of buildings over time. In certain situations,
SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building’s energy efficiency. In these
cases government-approved proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used.
Energy demand
The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling, lighting, fan
power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the Building
Regulations Output Document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building energy uses.
Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air permeability,
glazing and shading.
Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR )
NC
A metric that is unique to BREEAM and calculated by the BREEAM Ene 01 Calculator within the BREEAM Assessment
Scoring and Reporting tool, using modelled outputs from the approved building energy calculation software. It is a
ratio that defines the performance of a BREEAM assessed building in terms of its regulated operational heating and
cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption andCO2 emissions. This measure of performance is used to
determine the number of Ene 01 credits a building achieves in the BREEAM assessment. A description of how the
EPRNC is defined and calculated is summarised in the Methodology section and outlined in greater detail in a Guidance
Note
Fixed building service
The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as any part of, or any controls associated
with:
1. Fixed internal or external lighting systems but does not include emergency escape lighting or specialist process
lighting; or
2. Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air-conditioning or mechanical ventilation.
Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies
A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or from a
low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP).
National Calculation Method (NCM)
The National Calculation Method (NCM) enables quantification of building operational energy consumption and CO2
emissions resulting from regulated building services/systems and fabric performance. The NCM is the methodology
used for demonstrating compliance with the European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) 2012
(recast). Building energy modelling compliant with the NCM can be carried out using approved software (see Relevant
definition of Approved building energy calculation software). The full details are described in the NCM Modelling
Guide for the relevant country.
1. Wales:2013 Wales NCM Modelling Guide, www.2013ncm.bre.co.uk
2. Scotland: National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide for Scotland (2010),
www.scotland.gov.uk/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/Building-standards/publications/ncmguide
3. Northern Ireland: NCM Modelling Guide (2010)3, www.ncm.bre.co.uk
4. England: NCM Modelling Guide (2013), www.ncm.bre.co.uk
Notional building
A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same
activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified properties
for the building fabric, fittings and services.
The notional building is concurrent with the national building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and
England 2013. For Scotland 2013, the ‘notional’ building is generated based upon a building designed to meet the
2002 standards and a percentage improvement is applied to define the compliant building target carbon dioxide
emission rate (TER).
Near-site LZC
A low or zero carbon source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is
most likely to be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building e.g.
123
Energy
decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected via
private wire.
Onsite LZC
A low or zero carbon source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building.
Primary energy consumption
This refers to the direct use at the source, or supply to users without transformation, of crude energy, that is, energy
that has not been subjected to any conversion or transformation process.
Private wire arrangement
In the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any
electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power
supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building, this electricity may be
fed back to the national grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner can
only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied by a communal
installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to the communal installation.
Regulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings,
including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting.
Renewables Obligation Certificate (ROC)
This is a green certificate issued to an accredited generator for eligible renewable electricity generated within the
United Kingdom and supplied to customers within the United Kingdom by a licensed electricity supplier. One ROC is
issued for each megawatt hour (MWh) of eligible renewable output generated 4.
Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for Energy Rating of Dwellings
The government’s approved methodology for assessing the energy performance of new dwellings. The current
version is SAP 2012 version 9.92. The procedure accounts for energy used in:
Space heating and cooling
Hot water
Fixed lighting
Mechanical ventilation.
The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM)
SBEM is software developed for DCLG by BRE. SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a building’s
energy consumption. It calculates monthly energy use and carbon dioxide emissions of a building (excluding
dwellings) based on a description of the building geometry, construction, use and HVAC and lighting equipment.
SBEM is accompanied by a basic user interface, iSBEM. There also exists alternative approved software ‘front-end’
interfaces for SBEM (see definition of approved software above).
Target Emission Rate (TER)
The target emission rate is the minimum energy performance requirement (required by building regulations) for a
new non-domestic building (kgCO2/m2yr). The TER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation
Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). For dwellings, the TER is calculated using the
SAP methodology according to the requirements defined in the building regulations for dwellings. The TER is
expressed in terms of the mass of CO2 emitted per year per square metre of total useful floor area of the building
(kgCO2/m2yr).
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from
systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this may include
energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators, refrigeration
systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational related equipment e.g. computers,
servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other
appliances etc.
124
Energy
Zero net regulated carbon (CO ) emissions
2
The annual building net regulated CO2 emissions (kgCO2/m2yr) arising as a result of annual energy consumption from
fixed building services, i.e. space heating and cooling, domestic hot water, ventilation and lighting, also referred to as
controlled services and fittings, as a result of requirements imposed on such systems by the building regulations.
In aiming to achieve a zero regulated carbon status, the building energy modelling can take account of contributions
of energy generated from onsite and near-site renewable and low carbon installations. Energy generated and
supplied from off-site renewable and low carbon installations cannot be used to meet this definition.
Other information
Allowable solutions
The term Allowable Solutions forms part of the proposed zero carbon definition. A consultation on allowable solutions is
ongoing (at the time of writing). Once an official definition of allowable solutions is confirmed by the Government for nondomestic buildings, BRE will advise accordingly on the contribution of allowable solutions toward achieving BREEAM credits.
Building regulations classifications for multi-residential buildings
Multi-residential buildings that can be assessed under BREEAM New Construction 2014 will be classified under either the nondwelling version of the relevant building regulations or a combination of the non-dwelling and dwelling of the building
regulations, as outlined in CN7.
For England and Wales, and Northern Ireland, areas classified under their relevant building regulations documents, Approved
Documents (AD) Part L2A and the NI Technical Handbook F2, are classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this
does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’ (see below). Areas classified as Part L1A or Technical Handbook F1 are
‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L/Technical Handbook F classification impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified as
Part L2A/F2 must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A/F1 must be assessed using SAP.
For Scotland, see the General section and Appendix A of the Technical Handbook Non-Domestic for definitions of domestic
and non-domestic buildings.
Room for residential purposes
The building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England give the following definition: Room for residential purposes
means a room, or suite of rooms, which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is used by one or more persons to live and
sleep and includes a room in a hostel, a hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home but does not include
a room in a hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.
Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential areas
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only
The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP Data sheet from the approved software (provided by the Accredited
energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings
Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. Once converted by the Ene
01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator. This calculator will then confirm
the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved.
The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to source from
the SAP data sheet(s).
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled usingSAP and SBEM
Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it contains both
residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set from SBEM for the nondomestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings.
125
Energy
The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using
SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. This converted SAP data along
with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring
and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits
achieved.
Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the credits achieved
for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then added together and rounded
down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to the percentage improvement on the
building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage improvement are the totals used to determine
compliance with BREEAM’s Ene 01 minimum standards.
1CIBSE TM54: 2013, Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage
2The Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document Part L2A: The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other
than dwellings, 2013 edition, HM Government.
3National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide (for buildings other than dwellings) in England and Wales, 2010
edition (revision January 2013) www.ncm.bre.co.uk
4www.ofgem.gov.uk
126
Energy
Minimum standards
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy
consumption.
Assessment criteria
Please note:
The first credit is applicable to all building types.
The second credit is not applicable to Pre-schools, Primary schools, Law courts, Prisons, Multi-residential and Other
Residential institutions.
The following is required to demonstrate compliance.
One credit - Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems (see definitions)
1. The energy consuming systems accounting for ≥90% of the estimated total annual energy consumption of the building
are metered using an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy submeters with pulsed outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system (see
Relevant definitions ).
2. The end energy consuming use is identifiable to the building user, for example through labelling or data outputs.
One credit - Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas
3. An accessible energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed
outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system are provided, covering the
energy supply to all tenanted areas or, in the case of single occupancy buildings, relevant function areas or departments
within the building/unit.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
127
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems, criteria 1-2
Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core
assessment option.
Option 2 - Shell and core only: Criteria 1 and 2 apply to this shell and core
assessment option.
Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas, criterion 3
Both options: This criterion applies to both the shell and core assessment options.
Meters must be installed on the energy supply to each separate tenanted unit or
floor plate within the assessed development.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
CN3
Scope of submetering for simple
building
assessments
Dependent upon the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to
identify which other major energy consuming systems (where present) should be
sub-metered.
Country specific
CN4
Country specific
criteria
CN5
Extensions to
existing buildings
Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building services
plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and existing
building, the criteria only apply to the extension. In this case, energy services
supplying energy consuming systems from the existing building shall, as a minimum,
be metered at the entry points to the extension, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas
and electricity. However the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that
the energy metering covers the entire building.
CN6
Lighting and small
power
Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to cost-effectively
separate lighting and small power. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting
and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that submetering is provided for each floor plate.
CN7
Modular boiler
systems
See criterion 1,
Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole. See definition of modular
boiler systems in Relevant definitions .
General
Building specific
128
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
CN8
Buildings situated on
campus
developments
See criterion 3.
The systems for buildings situated on campus developments must be monitored
using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or
another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer,
for monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed
building. Where energy services are supplied from an existing building on the
campus, they shall be metered at the entry points to the assessed building, e.g. hot
water, chilled water, gas and electricity. Provision of a pulsed output is not sufficient
to award the credit for these building types.
CN9
Small office,
industrial or retail
units
See criterion 3.
For a development consisting of a number of small units a single meter per unit is
sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each unit do not need to be
sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small unit is defined as <
200m2.
CN10
Large office,
industrial or retail
units
See criterion 3
For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. > 200m2), sufficient
sub metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or
departments within the unit must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as
a whole.
CN11
Healthcare
buildings: medicalbased systems
See criterion 3
Large-scale medical equipment/systems can be ignored when assessing
compliance with this issue (although it is recommended that sub-metering is
considered in such instances).
CN12
Single occupant
buildings: relevant
function
areas/departments
See criterion 3.
The lists below summarise the commonly found functions by building types. These
lists are not exhaustive and where other areas/departments exist, these should also
be separately metered.
CN13
Office buildings
1. Office areas (metering by floor plate)
2. Catering
CN14
Retail buildings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CN15
Industrial units
1. Office areas
2. Operational area
3. Ancillary areas (e.g. canteen etc)
CN16
Education buildings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sales area
Storage and warehouse
Cold storage
Offices
Catering
Tenant units
Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms)
Computer suites
Workshops
Lecture halls
Conference rooms
Drama studio
129
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Swimming pool
Sports hall
Process areas
Laboratories
High containment suites within laboratories
Controlled environment chambers
Animal accommodation areas
Data centres
IT work and study rooms, including IT equipped library space and any space
with provision of more than one computer terminal per 5m2.
Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required.
CN17
Hospitals and other
healthcare facilities
1. Operating department
2. Imaging department
3. Radiotherapy department
4. Pathology department
5. Dialysis department
6. Medical physics
7. Mortuary and post-mortem department
8. Rehabilitation, when including hydrotherapy pools
9. Central sterile supplies department (or equivalent)
10. Process areas, e.g. commercial-scale kitchens and laundries
11. IT rooms
12. Pharmacy department
13. Laboratories
14. Tenancy areas (e.g. catering, retail, laundry)
In small healthcare buildings (<999m2) with no high-energy load areas (as defined
above), a single meter per floor plate is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual
areas within each floor plate do not need to be sub-metered.
CN18
Other buildings
See criterion 3.
Other types of single occupant buildings should use the above lists of function
areas as a guide to the level of provision required to comply, bearing in mind the
aim of the credit is to encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that
facilitates the monitoring of in-use energy consumption (in this case by area).
Methodology
None
Evidence
Criteria
All
130
Energy
Accessible meters
Energy meters located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and
readings by the building occupant/facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution room or
control room (where a BEMS is installed).
Common areas
Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common facilities
and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically
managed and maintained by the development’s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common
areas include an atrium, stairwells, main entrance foyers/reception and external areas e.g. parking.
Energy consuming systems
Systems that consume energy to perform the following functions within a building::
a. Space heating
b. Domestic hot water heating
c. Humidification*
d. Cooling*
e. Air movement i.e. fans (major)*
f. Lighting
g. Small power supply
h. Other major energy-consuming systems/plant, where appropriate. Depending on the building type, this might
include for example, plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools, kitchen plant, cold storage plant, laboratory
plant, sterile services equipment, transportation systems (e.g. lifts and escalators) drama studios and theatres
with large lighting rigs. See also CIBSE TM39: Building Energy Metering 1 for further information.
Note: The systems succeeded by * should not be present where a BREEAM NC Simple Buildings assessment is being
carried out.
Energy monitoring and management system
Examples include automatic meter reading systems (AMR) and building energy management systems (BEMS).
Automatic monitoring and targeting (aM&T) is an example of a management tool that includs automatic meter
reading and data management.
Energy supply
All types of energy supplied to a building area (department/tenancy/unit) within the boundary of the assessed
development; including electricity, gas, heat or other form of energy/fuel which is consumed as a result of the use of,
and operations within, each relevant area.
Energy meters
Energy meters measure the amount of energy used on a circuit where energy is flowing. Primary meters measure the
main incoming energy and are used for billing by the utility supplier. They include the principal smart and advanced
utility meters to a site for electricity and gas.
Sub-meters are the second tier including heat and steam meters and secondary meters installed to measure
consumption by specific items of plant or equipment or to discrete physical areas, e.g. individual buildings; floors in a
multi-storey building, tenanted areas, function areas.
Modular boiler systems
A modular boiler system consists of a series of boilers that are linked together to meet a variety of heating demands.
They are generally composed of several identical boiler units, sometimes stacked, although a mix of condensing and
conventional boilers could be used. They operate in increments of capacity, each at around their full capacity and their
peak efficiency, so that the overall part load efficiency is greater than it would be for a single boiler.
131
Energy
Other information
Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is available in
CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering.
1TM39 Building Energy Metering, CIBSE, 2009
132
Energy
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient light fittings for external areas of the development.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. The building has been designed to operate without the need for external lighting (which includes on the building, signs
and at entrances).
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. The average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings within the construction zone is not less than 60 luminaire
lumens per circuit Watt.
3. All external light fittings are automatically controlled for prevention of operation during daylight hours and presence
detection in areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply. Typically external lighting will be specified and installed by the developer.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
133
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
criteria
CN4
Single building
assessments on
larger
developmentsor
campuses and
extensions to
existing buildings
Where the building being assessed forms part of a larger development (or is an
extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other buildings, the
scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting
within the construction zone of the assessed building.
CN5
Temporary lighting,
decorative lighting
and floodlighting
Temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations, where
specified, can be excluded from assessment under this issue. Decorative lighting
and floodlighting must however not be exempt from the assessment criteria.
General
CN6
Prisons and other
secured buildings
security lighting
The criteria are concerned only with general external lighting e.g. way-finding, car
parking, decorative, signage, landscape, storage areas etc. Lighting specified for
specific security purposes within secured buildings, such as prisons, can be excluded
from assessment under this issue.
Methodology
Average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings
The individual luminous fluxes of all luminaires within the construction zone are summed (in lumens), then divided by the total
circuit Watts for all the luminaires.
For lamps other than LED lamps, the luminous flux of a luminaire using those lamps can be determined by multiplying the sum
of the luminous fluxes produced by all the lamps in the luminaire by the light output ratio of the luminaire (as confirmed by the
luminaire manufacturer).
Note: LED lamps are typically integral to the luminaire (LED luminaires). As such, the manufacturers' literature will
encompass both lamp and luminaire as a whole.
134
Energy
Evidence
Criteria
Interim post construction stage
All
Automatic control
An automatic external lighting control system that prevents operation during daylight hours through either time
switch or daylight sensor (a manually switched lighting circuit with daylight sensor or time switch override is also
acceptable) in addition to providing presence detection in areas of intermittent traffic.
Note: for external lighting not fitted with presence detectors, time switches must provide automatic switch-off of
lighting after a specified curfew hour - except in cases where there is a specific requirement for lighting to be left on all
night.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAMassessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Daylight sensor
A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn.
Luminous efficacy in luminaire lumens per circuit Watt
The ratio between the luminous flux produced by an entire luminaire (light fitting) (in lumens) and the total power
consumed by the lamps and the control gear contained within the luminaire (Watts).
Presence detector
A sensor that can turn lighting on when a presence is detected in the scanned area, and off after a pre-set time when
no presence is detected. Presence detectors must be compatible with the lamp type used as very frequent switching
can reduce the life of some lamp types.
Time switch
A switch with an in-built clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times.
Other information
None.
135
Energy
Minimum standards
3
No
Aim
To encourage the adoption of design measures, which reduce building energy consumption and associated carbon
emissions and minimise reliance on active building services systems.
Assessment criteria
Passive design (2 credits)
Low or zero carbon technologies (1 credit).
Passive design
One credit - Passive design analysis
1. The first credit within issue Hea 04 Thermal comfort has been achieved to demonstrate the building design can deliver
appropriate thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces.
2. The project team carries out an analysis of the proposed building design/development by Concept Design stage (RIBA
Stage 2 or equivalent) to identify opportunities for the implementation of passive design solutions that reduce
demands for energy consuming building services (see Compliance note 2).
3. The building uses passive design measures to reduce the total heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation and lighting
demand in line with the findings of the passive design analysis and the analysis demonstrates a reduction in the total
energy demand as a result.
One credit - Free cooling
4. The passive design analysis carried out under criterion 2 above includes an analysis of free cooling and identifies
opportunities for the implementation of free cooling solutions.
5. The building uses ANY of the free cooling strategies listed in Compliance note CN3 to reduce the cooling energy
demand, i.e. it does not use active mechanical cooling.
Low and zero carbon technologies
One credit - Low zero carbon (LZC) feasibility study
6. A feasibility study has been carried out by the completion of the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) by an
energy specialist (see Compliance notes) to establish the most appropriate recognised local (onsite or near-site) low or
zero carbon (LZC) energy source(s) for the building/development (see Compliance note CN6).
7. A ocal LZC energy technology/technologies has/have been specified for the building/development in line with the
recommendations of this feasibility study.
136
Energy
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Passive design analysis, criteria 1 to 3
apply.
Free cooling, criteria 4 to 5
Option 1 - Shell only: These free cooling criteria apply, subject to the following
condition:
Only free cooling options 1 to 3 listed in Compliance note CN5 are applicable.
Option 2 - Shell and core: These free cooling criteria apply. All free cooling options
listed in Compliance note CN5 are applicable.
LZC feasibility study, criteria 6 to 7
Option 1 - Shell only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and
function apply, subject to the following conditions:
Criteria 6: The LZC feasibility study must be completed as part of the shell only
design, based on the expected building use and loads specified in the design brief
or, where these are not specified, for likely scenarios.
Criteria 7: The built form should allow for the future installation of the most cost
effective LZC options.
Option 2 - Shell and core: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and
function apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
However, note that onsite LZC technologies are only eligible to contribute to
meeting the criteriaof this issue where the proposed solution can be classified as a
microgeneration technology. The requirements for classification as a
microgeneration technology must be met as described in Compliance note CN8
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
137
Energy
Terms
Description
CN4
Passive design
analysis
See criterion 2.
As a minimum, the passive design analysis should cover:
1. Site location
2. Site weather
3. Microclimate
4. Building layout
5. Building orientation
6. Building form
7. Building fabric
8. Thermal mass or other fabric thermal storage
9. Building occupancy type
10. Daylighting strategy
11. Ventilation strategy
12. Adaptation to climate change.
CN5
Free cooling analysis
See criterion 5.
The free cooling analysis should demonstrate consideration of appropriate
technologies from the following :
1. Night-time cooling (requires fabric to have a high exposed thermal mass)
2. Ground coupled air cooling
3. Displacement ventilation (not linked to any active cooling system)
4. Ground water cooling
5. Surface water cooling
6. Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect
7. Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat
8. Absorption cooling, using waste heat.
CN6
LZC feasibility study
See criterion 6.
The LZC study should cover as a minimum:
1. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year
2. Life cycle cost of the potential specification, accounting for payback
3. Local planning criteria, including land use and noise
4. Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system
5. Any available grants
6. All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the
development.
7. Reasons for excluding other technologies
8. Where appropriate to the building type, connecting the proposed building to
an existing local community CHP system or source of waste heat or power OR
specifying a building/site CHP system or source of waste heat or power with
the potential to export excess heat or power via a local community energy
scheme.
CN7
LZC feasibility study
timing. See criteria 6.
When undertaking a feasibility study at a stage later than concept design (RIBA
stage 2 or equivalent), an additional element would need to be included in the
report to highlight the local LZC energy sources which had been discounted due to
the constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for
their omission. If the feasibility study discounted all local LZC as unfeasible due to the
late stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit for the
feasibility study must be withheld.
If the feasibility study were commissioned at the concept design stage or earlier
and in the unlikely event the study concluded that the specification of any local LZC
technology were unfeasible, the LZC credit could still be awarded.
Ref
General
138
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
CN8
Recognised local
LZC technologies
See criterion 6.
Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the requirements of this issue must
produce energy from renewable sources and meet all other ancillary requirements
as defined by Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council
of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources
and amending and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and
2003/30/EC (www.eur-lex.europa.eu/en).
The following requirements must also be met:
1. There must be a direct supply of energy produced to the building under
assessment.
2. Where covered by the Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS),
technologies under 50kWe or 45kWth must be MCS (or equivalent) certified
products installed by MCS (or equivalent) certified installers.
3. Combined heat and power (CHP) schemes above 50kWe must be certified
under the CHPQA standard.
CHP schemes fuelled by mains gas are eligible to contribute to performance
against this issue.
4. Air source heat pumps can only be considered as a renewable technology
when used in heating mode. Refer to Annex VI of Directive 2009/28/EC for
more detail on accounting for energy from heat pumps.
5. Where MCS or CHPQA certification is not available, the design team must
investigate the availability of alternative accreditation schemes in line with the
Directives listed above, or an equivalent country/regional directive or
standard. Where an accreditation scheme exists it should be used for the
purpose of verifying compliance of the specified LZC technology. If no
accreditation scheme exists in the country the design team must demonstrate
they have investigated the competence of the installer selected to install the
LZC technology and are confident that they have the skill and competence to
install the technology appropriately.
CN9
LZC technologies
recognised by
approved software
The carbon emissions savings from these LZC technologies must also be
demonstrated using the approved building energy modelling software. This
currently includes solar thermal energy systems, photovoltaic systems, wind
turbines, biomass boilers, CHP and heat pumps. It does not currently include grey
water heat recovery or earth ducts (see ).
CN10
Novel LZC
technology not
listed
See criterion 6.
Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are
not currently included as LZC technologies in any of the approved building energy
calculation software packages. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the
system proposed and the carbon benefits achieved. The BREEAM Assessor must
confirm acceptability with BRE before an assessment is submitted. The calculation
procedure for the new LZC technology should be submitted for consideration as a
'novel technology' to be included in the 'SBEM-Q' innovation process (see Other
information). The novel technology would only be acceptable for the LZC credit if
either:
a. It is already demonstrably modelled in one of the approved dynamic
simulation compliance tools;
b. The calculation procedure has been accepted by the SBEM-Q process and
integrated into the SBEM tool;
or
c. It has been applied for and is in the process of being accepted for SBEM-Q.
For one-off LZC technology designs, where it is not viable to obtain SBEM-Q
139
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
approval, a BREEAM innovation credit can be applied for and subject to approval,
obtained instead.
CN11
Waste heat from a
building- related
operational process
See criterion 6.
Waste heat from an operational process that takes place within the assessed
building (or on the assessed site) can be considered as ‘low carbon’ for the purpose
of this BREEAM issue. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from
the process is integral to the assessed building. Examples of operational processes
and functions include manufacturing processes, high temperature oven/kiln,
compressors serving process plant, micro-brewery, crematorium, testing and
commissioning boilers for training or manufacture and data centres. It does not
include waste heat from IT or server rooms, which could be used as part of
conventional heat recovery measures.
CN12
Community and
near-site schemes
See criterion 6.
‘Local’ does not have to mean onsite; community schemes (near-site) can be used
as a means of demonstrating compliance, as this BREEAM issue seeks to encourage
the installation of onsite and near-site LZC technologies.
CN13
Waste incineration
See criterion 6.
Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as low carbon for the
purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances:
1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the
feasibility study and; EITHER
2. The local authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is
demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste
management policies; OR
3. A near or onsite facility connected to the building, via a private wire
arrangement, which is demonstrably removing re-usable and recyclable
waste material prior to incineration.
CN14
First generation
biofuels
See criterion 6.
Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food
production and greenhouse gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability
between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems
fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstocks, e.g. biofuels
manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. where these are grown or
farmed for the purposes of biofuel production. Subject to review against the
criteria set out in the Compliance notesbelow, BREEAM may recognise systems
using second generation biofuels (see Relevant definitions) or biofuels
manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, waste vegetable
oil or locally and sustainably-sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets,
where these are not interchangeable with fossil fuels or first generation biofuels.
CN15
Second generation
biofuels and
biofuels from waste
streams See
criterion 6.
BREEAM recognises that biofuels produced from biomass which is a by-product of
other processes may provide a more sustainable alternative to fossil fuels. Typically,
these use waste feedstock consisting of residual non-food parts of current food
crops, industry waste such as woodchips, other waste vegetable matter and waste
fish oil from sustainable fish stocks to produce biofuel. Such biofuels will, in principle
be recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of defining low/zero carbon
technologies. However due to the emerging nature of such technologies, full details
would be required for review by BRE Global prior to confirmation of acceptability.
Matters which would be required for consideration include the following:
1. Type, provenance and sustainability of the biomass feedstock
140
Ref
Terms
Energy
Description
2.
3.
4.
5.
Avoidance/minimisation of fossil fuel use in extracting the biofuel
Minimising fossil fuel use in transporting the biomass/biofuel
Presence of a supply agreement and a robust supply chain
Compatibility of the biofuel with the specified boiler/plant and manufacturer’s
warranty issues
The use of other recycled or waste-derived biofuels such as waste oil from catering
may also be recognised by BREEAM subject to the above criteria. For smaller scale
applications, the assessor will, in addition, be required to demonstrate that the
biofuel is locally sourced. BREEAM does not qualify the term ‘locally sourced’ or
specify a minimum supply contract, however the assessor must determine and
demonstrate that these are reasonable for the particular application.
Building specific
CN16
Schools: information
communication
technology (ICT)
classrooms
With respect to the free cooling credit, it is possible for ICT classrooms to be
designed to avoid the use of mechanical cooling. Hence, they are not exempt from
the requirements of this issue i.e. if mechanical cooling were used to treat these
spaces; it would not be possible to achieve the free cooling credit within this
BREEAM issue.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
4-7
Results from a dynamic simulation model
demonstrating the feasibility of the free
cooling strategy and meeting the first credit
of Hea 03.
Approved building energy modelling software
Refer to Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
141
Energy
Energy specialist
An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments,
designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector and is not professionally
connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer.
First and second generation biofuels
First generation biofuels are fuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional
technology. Second generation biofuels are fuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical
processes1 Common first generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalcohols.
Free cooling
The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the need to rely on energyconsuming mechanical cooling. Free cooling is an enhanced passive design method that requires engineering design
and modelling to demonstrate its effectiveness. Other similar methods include enhanced passive ventilation and
enhanced daylighting.
Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS)
The Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) is an independent scheme that certifies microgeneration products
and installers in accordance with consistent standards. It is designed to evaluate microgeneration products and
installers against robust criteria, and provides consumers with an independent indication of the reliability of products,
assurance that the installation will be carried out to the appropriate standard and a route for complaints should there
be any issues.
The MCS is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification scheme covering all
microgeneration products and services. It has support from the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC),
industry and non-governmental groups as a prime method for making a substantial contribution to cutting the UK’s
dependency on fossil fuels and carbon dioxide emissions.
Near-site LZC
Refer to BREEAM issueEne 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Onsite LZC
Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Payback period
The period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment.
Other information
Free cooling aim
Free cooling has been highlighted in this issue as it relates particularly to contributing to reducing overheating for
adaptation to climate change. It can also make the building much simpler to operate and maintain than one with
mechanical cooling.
Novel low and zero carbon (LZC) technologies - SBEM-Q
In order to deal with the integration of new technologies into SBEM, a new procedure has been established which
mirrors the SAP Appendix Q approach to some extent. Appendix Q provides a means whereby validated individual
branded product performance information can be accessed and used as an adjunct to the SAP calculation. A
product’s performance information is determined by testing against a specification that has been agreed by DECC’s
NCM contractor, the relevant manufacturer(s) and industry sector representatives. Product data is listed in the SAP
Appendix Q database (at www.ncm-pcdb.org.uk/sap). By following the ‘Innovation' path from that website,
manufacturers can apply for novel LZC technologies to be validated under the so-called ‘SBEM-Q’ procedure and then
integrated as part of an amendment to the SBEM calculation.
LZC feasibility study in building regulations
The European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) (recast) 2012 (Directive 2010/31/EU), requires
that all member states have a methodology for calculating the energy performance of buildings and that the
feasibility of high-efficiency alternative systems is considered before construction starts, including energy from
142
Energy
renewable sources, cogeneration, district heating and cooling and heat pumps (Article 6).
This requirement has been included in the building regulations for England (amendment Regulation 25A, 2013) and
Scotland (October 2013) and it has been proposed for the forthcoming regulations in Wales, expected in July 2014.
The LZC feasibility study in BREEAM is intended to encourage the study to be done early in the project, not just before
construction starts, so that the most appropriate solutions can be adopted. Also, this credit does not permit
technologies that are not best practice/sustainable or cannot be modelled with a robust method.
1Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations – Energy, 2007.
143
Energy
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy efficient refrigeration systems, therefore reducing operational
greenhouse gas emissions resulting from the system's energy use.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Refrigeration energy consumption
1. The refrigeration system, its controls and components have been designed, installed and commissioned as follows:
a. In accordance with the Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the refrigeration retail sector 1 (see Other
information) and BS EN 378-2 Refrigeration systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements.
b. Use robust and tested refrigeration systems/components, normally defined as those included on the Enhanced
Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)2 or an equivalent list (see CN6 for a list of
components).
2. The refrigeration plant has been commissioned to comply with the criteria for commissioning outlined in BREEAM issue
Man 04 Commissioning and handover.
One credit - Indirect greenhouse gas emissions
3. Criteria 1 and 2 are achieved.
4. The installed refrigeration system demonstrates a saving in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) over the course
of its operational life.
With reference to The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map 3, this can be demonstrated through specification of
technologies described in CO2 emissions saving options available when designing a new store/retail concept that deliver
savings in comparison with the 'baseline' building. Refer to the Methodology section for further information.
Note: For non-retail building types with cold storage refrigeration systems, refer to compliance note CN5.
None.
144
Energy
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2 – Shell and core only: Where cold storage systems are specified/installed,
all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Scope of this
BREEAM issue
This issue is applicable only in instances where commercial/industrial sized
refrigeration and storage systems are specified, for example:
1. Storage and refrigeration of food in supermarkets
2. Cold storage facilities in industrial, laboratory, healthcare and other buildings.
The criteria do not apply where only domestic-scale refrigeration is to be installed;
this type of installation is covered within BREEAM issue Ene 08 Energy efficient
equipment.
If the building does not contain commercial/industrial sized refrigeration system(s),
this issue is not applicable to the assessment.
CN5
Non retail buildings
and the Carbon
Trust Refrigeration
Road Map Action
Plan
The Carbon Trust’s Refrigeration Road Map introduces the main energy saving
opportunities for refrigeration use in the retail sector and defines a ‘baseline
supermarket’. However, many of the technologies outlined in the Road Map are
appropriate to non-food applications and therefore non-retail building types that
specify or install cold storage systems.
If the ‘baseline supermarket’ does not provide an appropriate benchmark for
achieving the second and third credit, the design team can still comply with the
criteria by demonstrating a reduction in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2
eq.) against an alternative baseline. The design team must confirm details of the
alternative baseline system used, and that it is based on a typical
installation/technology for that building type. The systems being compared must
have the same duty and service conditions and include the relevant consumption
from the refrigeration systems ancillary equipment.
General
145
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
CN6
Components on the
ECA Energy
Technology Product
List
See criterion 1b.
Where specified as part of the refrigeration system, products used for the
following components must be listed on the ECA Energy Technology Product List
(or equivalent list):
1. Air cooled condensing units
2. Automatic air purgers
3. Cellar cooling equipment
4. Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage)
5. Curtains, blinds, sliding doors and covers for refrigerated display cabinets
6. Evaporative condensers
7. Forced air pre-coolers
8. Refrigerated display cabinets
9. Refrigeration compressors
10. Refrigeration system controls.
CN7
Extensions to
existing buildings
If the assessed building is an extension to an existing building and there is cold
storage plant in the existing building that will serve the new extension, then this
plant must meet the criteria in order to achieve any available credits.
Methodology
Calculating indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO eq.)
2
The indirect emissions must be calculated in accordance with the procedures in BS EN 378-1 4, Refrigerating system and heat
pumps safety and environmental requirements, Annex B (total equivalent warming impact (TEWI)). Further detail on applying
this method to calculate the indirect emissions is available in the Guideline methods of calculating TEWI5 (total equivalent
warming impact) published by the British Refrigeration Association (BRA).
Calculations must be carried out by an appropriately qualified professional (e.g. a building services engineer), including
justifications for assumptions and methodologies for savings in indirect greenhouse emissions.
Evidence
Criteria
All
1 and 3
A letter from the manufacturer/supplier or
copies of their technical literature AND/OR
A printout of the Enhanced Capital Allowance
(ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)
listing the specific products
2 and 3
Written confirmation that the refrigeration
plant will be commissioned and who is
responsible
Refrigeration plant commissioning record
146
Energy
Criteria
4
Documentary evidence confirming the type
of technology specified and estimated
savings in indirect greenhouse emissions,
including a description of how this saving is
achieved.
As per interim design stage plus confirmation
of installed technology.
ECA Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)
The ETPL list is part of the government's Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme, a key part of the government’s
programme to manage climate change. The scheme provides a tax incentive to encourage investment in low carbon
energy-saving equipment that meets published energy-efficiency criteria. The Energy Technology List (ETL) details the
criteria for each type of technology, and lists those products in each category that meet them:
https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html.
Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions
These are the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that result from the production of energy used to power the
refrigeration systems cooling plant. This includes the emissions from the production of grid electricity or an onsite
source of energy generation, e.g. gas CHP. In the case of refrigeration systems the term ‘direct greenhouse gas
emissions’ is also used, this refers to the emissions that occur as a direct result of leakage of refrigerant from the
system. The impacts of direct greenhouse gas emissions from refrigeration systems are dealt with in the BREEAM
issue Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants. Therefore, only indirect emissions resulting from the energy consumption of the
system are covered in this issue.
Other information
Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector
The Code of Conduct has been developed by the Carbon Trust, in partnership with the Institute of Refrigeration (IoR) and the
British Refrigeration Association (BRA). The Code is intended to compliment the Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map.
1Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector, Carbon Trust, British Refrigeration Association,
Institute of Refrigeration (June 2011).
2Energy Technology List https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html
3Refrigeration Road Map – An action plan for the retail sector, Carbon Trust, CTG021,2012
(http://www.carbontrust.com/resources/guides)
4BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI.
5Guideline methods of calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification, British Refrigeration Association.
147
Energy
Minimum standards
3
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient transportation systems.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Energy consumption
1. Where either lifts, escalators or moving walks (transportation types) are specified:
a. An analysis of the transportation demand and usage patterns for the building has been carried out to determine the
optimum number and size of lifts (including counter-balancing ratio), escalators and/or moving walks.
b. The energy consumption has been estimated in accordance with ISO BS EN 25745 Part 2 - Lifts and/or Part 3 Escalators and Travelling Walkways for one of the following:
i. At least two types of system (for each transportation type required); OR
ii. An arrangement of systems (e.g. for lifts, hydraulic, traction, machine room-less lift (MRL)); OR
iii. A system strategy which is ‘fit for purpose’.
c. The transportation system with the lowest energy consumption is specified.
One credit - Energy efficient features
3. For lifts, the following three energy-efficient features are specified:
a. The lifts operate in a stand-by condition during off-peak periods. For example the power side of the lift controller
and other operating equipment such as lift car lighting, user displays and ventilation fans switch off when the lift has
been idle for a prescribed length of time.
b. The lift car lighting and display lighting provides an average lamp efficacy, (across all fittings in the car) of > 55 lamp
lumens/circuit Watt and lighting switches off after the lift has been idle for a prescribed length of time.
c. The lift uses a drive controller capable of variable-speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF) control of
the drive motor.
4. For escalators and/or moving walks, each escalator and/or moving walk complies with at least one of the following:
a. It is fitted with a load sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable
speed drive; OR
b. It is fitted with a passenger sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in standby mode when there is no passenger demand.
One Credit - Regenerative drives
6. The lift system has a regenerative drive unit so that any energy generated by a traction lift (due to running up loaded to
less than the counterbalancing ratio or running down loaded to more than the counter balancing ratio) or by a hydraulic
lift (due to running down) is returned back to the electricity utility supplier or used elsewhere in the building.
148
Energy
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable.
and function apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Energy Consumption (1 credit)
1. Criterion 1
Energy efficient features (1 credit)
2. Criteria 2 and 3 only.
3. Criteria 4 to 6 are not applicable.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Scope of this issue
The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair
stairlift/platform(s) or other similar facilities to aid persons with impaired mobility.
However, any lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be
assessed inclusive of goods and vehicle, passenger lifts. A demonstration of
compliance to the BREEAM criteria relating to the excluded transportation types
would be considered best practice for an energy efficient system (despite not
being required for the purpose of awarding the available credits).
CN5
Transport analysis
The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift
selection for the following conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise
building for the purpose of DDA compliance/disabled access only; or where a
goods lift is selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry.
CN6
Building has no lifts,
escalators or
moving walks
This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or
moving walks.
General
149
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
CN7
Regenerative drives
See criterion 6.
This credit can only be awarded where the regenerative drive produces an energy
saving greater than the additional stand-by energy used by regenerative drives.
Regenerative drives will typically be appropriate for high travel and high intensity
usage lifts.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
1
Calculations for estimated energy
consumption.
Additional Information
Counterbalancing ratio
Traction lifts use a counterweight to balance the weight of the car plus a proportion of the rated load. This results in
the drive motor being sized only to raise or lower approximately half the rated load. Lowering the counterbalancing
ratio means a smaller motor and controlling drive unit are required, thus saving energy. Hydraulic lifts may use a
balance weight to balance out a proportion of the weight of the car; this reduces the size of the drive motor required
for the lift.
Lift car lighting
The level of lift car lighting is determined by the relevant standards. For example, BS EN81-1/2: 1998+A3: 2009
requires 50 lux on the car floor and any control surfaces
MRL: Machine room-less lift
All equipment is contained in the lift well, not in a separate machine room.
Standby condition
A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and has reduced the power consumption to the minimum level set for
that particular lift and terminates at the next traffic demand (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012). The period between
when the lift was last used and when standby condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO 25745-1 as 5 minutes
Idle condition
A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO
25745-1: 2012).
150
Energy
Other information
BS EN ISO 25745 - Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks
ISO 25745 is planned to consist of three parts, under the general title Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving
walks:
Part 1: Energy measurement and verification
Part 2: Energy calculation and classification for lifts (Elevators)
Part 3: Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks.
Part 1 was published in October 2012. A draft of Part 2, ISO/DIS 25745-2:2013-06, was published for review in July 2013.
The review end date was in October 2013. Part 3 is under development. Parts 2 and 3 are expected to be published in 2014.
It has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed to the operation of
lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributable to standby mode in many situations. ISO 25745 Parts 2 and 3 are being
prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support the efficient and effective use of energy,
providing:
1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts.
2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts.
3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and energy
classification systems.
Counterbalancing
Lifts have a specified rated load and as such the counterbalancing ratio will be set accordingly (see Relevant definitions).
Provided the type, number of lifts and the rated lift load specified is based on an appropriate analysis of the
transportation/lift passenger demand and traction required for the building, then the counterbalancing ratio can be
considered optimised for the purposes of compliance with BREEAM.
Counterbalancing ratios are normally provided in the range of 40-50% for safety reasons. Any other values should be
carefully considered. Reduced load balancing increases the maximum power and torque required to be delivered by the
hoisting motor and so may increase the size of motor selected; although the average hoisting power and energy
consumption will be reduced.
A detailed engineering analysis of the rope traction, hoisting motor and its drive performance and electromechanical braking
capacity under rated and reduced load conditions should be carried out, to ensure safe traction and braking capacity.
151
Energy
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage laboratory areas that are designed to be energy efficient and minimise the CO2 emissions
associated with their operational energy consumption.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts:
Pre-requisite
Design specification (1 credit)
Best practice energy efficient measures (upto 4 credits) - building type dependent.
Pre-Requisite
1. Criterion 1 within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories (Risk Assessment) has been achieved.
One Credit - Design specification
2. Client engagement is sought through consultation during the preparation of the initial project brief (RIBA Stage 1 or
equivalent) to determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria. Performance criteria
should include, but not be limited to the following aspects:
a. Description of purpose
b. Occupant/process activities
c. Containment requirements and standards
d. Air change rate requirements
e. Ventilation system performance and efficiencies
f. Heating and cooling requirements
g. Interaction between systems
h. Flexibility/adaptability of laboratory facilities.
3. The design team demonstrates that the energy demand of the laboratory facilities has been minimised as a result of
achieving the defined design performance criteria. This has informed the right-sizing (see Relevant definitions) of the
services system equipment (including ventilation supply and extract).
Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to buildings containing
these facilities)
4. Specification of fume cupboards and other containment devices has been carried out in compliance with criteria 2 and 3
of issue Hea 03 Indoor air quality - laboratories, as appropriate to the containment device specification.
5. Where ducted fume cupboards are specified:
a. Compliance with item A) in Table - 26.
b. The measurement of volume flow rate should be taken in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to
take account of reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage.
c. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and therefore does not increase the
health and safety risk to future building occupants.
152
Energy
Up to four credits - Best practice energy efficient measures
The following criteria are applicable where the laboratory area accounts for at least 10% of the total building floor area (see
Relevant definitions).
6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved (or criteria 1-4 where ducted fume cupboards are not specified).
7. Laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed to promote energy efficiency, demonstrated
through compliance with items B to L in Table - 26 (see (a) and (b) below for how credits are awarded).
a. Up to 2 credits: The laboratory area (see Relevant definitions) accounts for at least 10% (but less than 25%) of the
total building floor area; OR
b. Up to 4 credits: The laboratory area accounts for 25% or more of the total building floor area.
8. To achieve credits for energy efficient measures, the chosen measure(s) must have a reasonably significant effect on the
total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater. This must be demonstrated by calculations or
modelling.
9. The energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance criteria, and therefore do not
increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.
Table - 26: Best Practice Energy Efficient Measures in Laboratories
Item
Category
Item Description
Credits
1
A
Fume cupboard reduced volume flow rates
An average design air flow rate in the fume
cupboards specified no greater than
0.16m3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of
fume cupboard workspace.
1
Specification and achievement of best
practice fan power figures (as shown below)
for all air handling units, laboratory extract
systems, local extract ventilation, containment
area extracts (where applicable) and fume
cupboard extracts (where applicable).
1
Additional Items
B
Fan power
Laboratory System
Best practice specific fan power (W/L/s)
General laboratory supply air handling unit (AHU's) with
heating and cooling
1.5
General laboratory extract systems
1.2
Laboratory local extract ventilation – ducted
1.0
Containment area extract, without HEPA filtration
1.5
Containment area extract, with HEPA filtration
2.5
153
Energy
Item
Category
Item Description
Credits
1
Fume cupboard extract
1.5
C
Fume cupboard volume flow rates (further
reduction)
An average design air flow rate of <
0.12m3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of
fume cupboard workspace
0.5
D
Grouping and/or isolation of high
filtration/ventilation activities
Minimisation of room air change rates and
overall facility ventilation flows by grouping
together or isolating activities and equipment
with high filtration or ventilation
requirements.
0.5
E
Energy recovery - heat
Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there
is no risk of cross-contamination) or via
refrigerant or water cooling systems.
0.5
F
Energy recovery – cooling
Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat
exchangers (where there is no risk of crosscontamination) or via refrigerant or water
cooling systems.
0.5
G
Grouping of cooling loads
Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply
efficiencies and thermal transfer.
0.5
H
Free cooling
Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or
dry air coolers related to laboratory-specific
activities.
0.5
I
Load responsiveness
Effective matching of supply with demand
through modularity, variable speed drives
and pumps, and other mechanisms.
0.5
J
Clean rooms
Specification of particle monitoring systems,
linked to airflow controls.
0.5
K
Diversity
Achievement of high levels of diversity in
central plant sizing and laboratory duct sizing,
where compatible with safety.
0.5
L
Room air changes rates
Reducing air change rates by matching
ventilation airflows to environmental needs
and demands of containment devices.
0.5
1. Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items C to L (above) the laboratory
must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits are achieved
this would need to be rounded down to three credits.
154
Energy
Compliance Notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Scope of this
BREEAM issue
This issue is applicable only to Further Education, Higher Education and Other
Research and Development facilities that contain laboratory space and
containment devices and/or areas.
This issue is not applicable for School buildings (primary and secondary level). The
laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories and
guidance within Building Bulletin 88 should be followed for assessing laboratories
and containment devices in these building types. Where there are a large number of
containment devices (such as fume cupboards) present in a School or Sixth Form
assessment, BRE should be contacted for further guidance.
General
CN4
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
155
Energy
Laboratory Areas
Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/humidity/containment controlled) spaces
where physical/biological or chemical processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have an inherently high
energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health and safety
standards, typically laboratories:
1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets)
2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air
3. Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply or
emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments.
Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any laboratory
support areas such as:
1. Write up/offices
2. Meeting rooms
3. Storage
4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements.
Teaching and other laboratories/workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment devices
and/or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide evidence
that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process related activities.
Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table 1 in CIBSE TM46 1 Energy Benchmarks.Typically, in buildings
where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the
BREEAM definition.
Different types of laboratories have different requirements for HVAC, plug load equipment and access. This can lead
to enormous variations in energy and water requirements.The main types of laboratories include:
1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed
requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. Typically includes chemical science laboratories.
These laboratories require specially designed facilities.
2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped services.
Typically includes engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and humidity
control, dust control, and clean power.
3. Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. Typically require higher levels of
primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialized ventilation systems to ensure
directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from exhaust air, controlled access
zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules to isolate the laboratory.
4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora and
fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over the
facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent the possibility of
infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours.
5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment, storage space
for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs.
6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent
contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and production
needs. Typically used in UK universities for Nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical research/studies and
microelectronics applications.
Right-Sizing
Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment is
sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on ‘rated’ data obtained from manufacturers’
literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to life
cycle cost benefits, whilst taking account for the need for appropriate contingency.
156
Energy
Other information
Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas/buildings that are not
currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, used to assess and award credits in Ene01 Reduction of
CO Emissions.
2
1TM46 Energy Benchmarks. CIBSE, 2008.
157
Energy
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage procurement of energy-efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy
savings in operation.
Assessment criteria
Two credits
1. Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads and, for each estimate or model, its contribution to the total
unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical/standard specification.
2. Identify the systems and/or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated energy demand of the
development and its operation and demonstrate, through either good practice design or specification, a meaningful
reduction in the total unregulated energy demand of the building.
Table - 27 contains solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for common examples of significant contributors to unregulated
energy demand for a number of different building types/functions.
Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from
significantly contributing systems.
Ref
Function/equipment
Criteria
A
Small power,
plug in equipment
The following equipment has been awarded an Energy Star 1 rating OR has been
procured in accordance with the Government Buying Standards2
1. Office equipment
2. Other small powered equipment
3. Supplementary electric heating.
For domestic scale white goods, the criteria in Ref F Residential areas apply.
B
Swimming pool
158
1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or ‘liquid’ pool covers with an
automatic dosing system, are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and
Jacuzzis (if relevant).
2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended.
3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be controlled so that it is 1 °C
above the water temperature.
Energy
Ref
Function/equipment
Criteria
C
Communal laundry
facilities with
commercial sized
appliances
At least one of the following can be demonstrated for commercial sized appliances:
1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water
2. Use of water sourced from a rain water collection tank(s).
D
Data centres
1. Design is in accordance with the ‘Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on
Data Centres’3 principles with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected
minimum practice’ level (as defined in the Code of Conduct).
2. Temperature set points are not less than 24°C, as measured at the inlet of the
equipment in the rack.
E
IT-intensive
operating areas
1. Uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard, with forced
ventilation only to be used when the internal temperature exceeds 20 o C and
active cooling only when the internal temperature exceeds 22 o C.
2. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not
in use, including overnight.
F
Residential areas
with domestic scale
appliances
(individual and
communal facilities)
G
Healthcare
H
Kitchen and catering
facilities
Domestic scale appliances have the following ratings (or better) under the EU Energy
Efficiency Labelling Scheme, where provided:
1. Fridges, fridge freezers: A+ rating
2. Washing machines: A++ rating
3. Dishwashers: A+ rating
4. Washer-dryers and tumble dryers: A rating.
OR
5. If any of the appliances will be purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner,
information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods
must be provided to the residential areas of the building.
Note:
1. Any white goods available to purchase from the developer must be compliant
with criteria F1 to F4 above.
2. If criterion F5 were chosen to demonstrate compliance, only one of the two
available credits could be awarded.
The procurement of large scale equipment (where present, see compliance note
CN3) and sets of electrical equipment (where numbering more than 50) has been
informed and selected by life cycle costing analysis for at least two options in
accordance with HTM07-02, Chapter 3.0 4
The project has incorporated all of the energy efficiency measures (except as specified)
outlined in each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide TM50 5 :
1. Section 8 (Drainage and kitchen waste removal)
2. Section 9 (Energy controls - specifically controls relevant to appliances)
3. Section 11 (Appliance specification - not fabrication or utensil specifications)
4. Section 12 (Refrigeration)
5. Section 13 (Warewashing: dishwashers and glasswashers)
6. Section 14 (Cooking appliance selection)
7. Section 15 (Water temperatures, taps, faucets and water saving controls).
Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities should be assessed here, not in Ene 05
Energy efficient cold storage.
Energy efficient white goods scheme and equivalent rating scheme (Category reference F)
159
Energy
Ref
Function/equipment
Criteria
Energy rating certifications other than the EU labelling scheme will be accepted, providing the energy efficiency
performance is equivalent to the EU labelling scheme. This can be any internationally recognised energy efficiency labelling
scheme for white goods or a national scheme developed for use in the country of assessment, for example Energy Label
(in EU), Energy Star (in USA), The Appliance Energy Rating Scheme (in Australia), etc. A statement confirming that the
scheme is nationally recognised and can be regarded as equivalent to the EU labelling scheme is required for use.
Large-scale equipment in healthcare (Category reference G)
This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment, and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in
excess of 10kW rated input power. All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
1. Criteria 1 and 2 apply excluding ‘Ref B Swimming pool’ from Table - 27 which is
not applicable.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Refrigeration
equipment
The criteria in ‘Ref A Small power, plug in equipment’ inChecklists and tables apply to
the following refrigeration equipment (where present):
1. Air cooled condensing units
2. Cellar cooling
3. Commercial service cabinets
4. Curtains/blinds for refrigerated display cabinets
5. Refrigeration compressors
6. Refrigeration system controls
7. Refrigerated display cabinets.
CN5
A meaningful
reduction in
unregulated energy
demand
BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction
in unregulated energy demand. The project team must justify how they have
determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated energy
demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification.
General
160
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
CN6
Cold storage
The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other
commercial or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems. These systems
are covered within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storageBREEAM Ene 05
and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN7
Lifts, escalators and
moving walks
This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems
are covered within the scope of Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems and
should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN8
Laboratory systems
This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are
covered within the scope of Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems and should
be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN9
Reuse of equipment
Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most
energy efficient option. However, the credit could be awarded if either of the
following criteria are demonstrated:
1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the
Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme Energy Technology Product List 1.
2. Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more
energy-efficient option than specifying new equipment.
Building specific
CN10
Large-scale
equipment in
Healthcare See
criterion 1 and Ref G
This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other
equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power,
including equipment used for medical purposes.
Methodology
None
Evidence
Criteria
All
1Enhanced Capital Allowance scheme, http://www.eca.gov.uk
161
Energy
Data centre
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which contain
enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and may provide
some form of data service (e.g. large scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in
office buildings).
Government’s Buying Standards
A website listing minimum and best practice standards for equipment being procured forprojects.
IT-intensive areas
These include computer areas where more than 1 PC per 5m2 is provided, e.g. training suites, design studios, libraries’
IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices.
Office equipment
Computer monitors, desktop computers, scanners, photocopiers, printers, workstations etc.
Regulated energy
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from
systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include energy
consumption from operational related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile fume
cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of
emissions, for this issue, it does not include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its
operation, e.g. commercial/industrial refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transportation systems; and
ducted fume cupboards; because they are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene 07
respectively.
White goods and small power equipment
Domestic appliances for example washing machines, fridges,freezers, fridge-freezers, tumble dryers, washer dryers,
air-movement fans/heaters, etc.
Other information
None
1Energy Star labelling scheme, http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=products.pr_find_es_products or http://www.eu-
energystar.org/en/index.html
2Government Buying Standards, http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/
3EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres: http://iet.jrc.ec.europa.eu/energyefficiency/sites/energyefficiency/files/best_
practices_v4_0_5-r1.pdf
4HTM 07-02: EnCO de, Making energy work in Healthcare, Department of Health, 2005.
2
5CIBSE TM50: Energy
Efficiency in Commercial Kitchens, CIBSE
162
Ene 09 Drying space
Energy
Ene 09 Drying space
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. For self-contained dwellings: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of
holding:
a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line
b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line.
AND/OR
2. Individual bedrooms: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding:
a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms; plus
b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold.
AND
3. The space (internal or external) is secure.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
163
Energy
Ref
Terms
Description
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Multi-residential
developments with
CSH assessed
dwellings
See criterion 1.
For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for
Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies:
Where CSH issue Ene 4 has been achieved for all dwellings assessed under the CSH,
the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also met. If this is
the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved provided any self contained
dwellings not assessed under the CSH orr individual bedrooms in the building meet
the compliance requirements for this issue.
CN5
Adequate internal
space See criteria 1
and 2.
This is either:
A heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with the national
building regulations relevant to the location of the building (rooms that commonly
meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room); or
An unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Chartered Institute
of Building Services Engineer (CIBSE or equivalent professional) demonstrate that
ventilation in the space is adequate to allow drying in normal climatic conditions and
to prevent condensation/mould growth.
The fixing or fitting needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying
spaces in the following rooms do not comply:
1. Living rooms
2. Kitchens
3. Dining rooms
4. Main halls
5. Bedrooms
CN6
Building has no
residential areas.
Please note that where a building contains no residential function this issue is not
applicable and will not require assessment.
CN7
Supported living
facilities
This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living
facilities (for safety reasons, to minimise ligature risk to particular residents).
General
Methodology
None
164
Ene 09 Drying space
Energy
Evidence
Criteria
All
Secure space
For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling.
For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents
of the building only.
Other information
Ventilation - Building regulations
The following lists the building regulations relevant for the assessment of this issue specific to the country of the UK.
Wales - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (England and Wales)
Scotland - Technical Handbook 2013 - Domestic Section 3 Environment
Northern Ireland - Technical Booklet K: 2012 - Ventilation
England - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (incorporating further amendments in 2013) (England and Wales)
165
Transport
Transport
166
Transport
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage development in proximity of good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce
transport-related pollution and congestion.
Assessment criteria
Accessibility Index (up to 5 credits - building type dependent)
Dedicated bus service (1 credit)
Up to five credits - Accessibility Index
1. The public transport Accessibility Index (AI) for the assessed building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded in
accordance with the table of building types, AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits seeTable - 28 in the checklists and
tables section.
2. The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM Tra 01 calculator:
a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node
b. The public transport type(s) serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail
c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the operating hours of the
building for a typical day (see compliance notes and in the Additional Information section).
OR
One credit - Dedicated bus service
3. For buildings with a fixed shift pattern, i.e. where building users will predominantly arrive/depart at set times, one credit
can be awarded where the building occupier provides, or commits to providing a dedicated bus service to and from the
building at the beginning and end of each shift/day.
This credit is only available in cases where a development is unable to achieve any of the available credits using the Accessibility
Index criteria (i.e. its location has a low public transport Accessibility Index).
167
Transport
Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score.
Accessibility Index
≥2
≥4
≥8
≥ 10
≥ 12
≥ 18
Building type
BREEAM credits available
Offices, Industrial, Multi-residential, Other
building type 1
1
2
3
-
-
-
Pre-school, School, Sixth Form
1
2
3
-
-
-
Retail, Law Court, Further Education College,
Higher Education type 1, Other building type 2
1
2
3
3
4
5
Higher Education type 2
1
2
3
4
5
-
Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist,
Teaching, Mental health)
1
2
3
3
4
5
Healthcare - GP surgery, Health centre,
Community hospital
1
2
3
4
5
-
Rural location sensitive buildings. Other
building type 3
1
2
-
-
-
-
Prison site, MOD site
1
2
-
-
-
-
Transport hub
1
2
3
3
3
4
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply
Simple buildings
CN2
168
Applicable
assessment criteria
Ref
Terms
Transport
Description
Country specific
Country
specific
guidance
No country specific
guidance
applicable under
this issue. All
criteria relevant to
the building type
and function apply.
General
CN3
Campus
developments,
see criterion 1
Where 80% or more of the buildings on a campus-style development, e.g. further
or higher education sites, are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, then the
campuses main entrance can be used as the reference point for the assessment of
distance to compliant public transport nodes for this issue.
The campus’ main entrance is that which is accessed by the majority of the assessed
building’s staff/students/visitors. A site may have more than one main entrance
which between them account for the majority of staff, students and visitors that
access the site. In such a case either entrance can be used as the basis for the
calculation.
Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus development are within
1000m of the campus’ main entrance, the assessed building’s main entrance must
be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public
transport node for this issue. This rule implies that for large campus developments,
when distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, the needs of
the building users would be served better by locating the public transport nodes
inside or on the periphery of the campus.
Where the building is not part of a centralised campus then its main entrance must
be used as the reference point for the assessment of this issue.
CN4
Dedicated bus
services,
see criterion 3
The credit for the provision of a dedicated bus service is available for any building
type with a fixed shift pattern; examples could include schools, offices, retail,
factories, prisons etc. The bus must provide transfer to the local population centre,
public transport interchange or be a door-to-door service. The credit is provided as
an alternative, where the AI of the building is too low to achieve any BREEAM credits,
but where the building users will have the option of a dedicated bus service.
However, a dedicated bus service can be included in the public transport
Accessibility Index calculation as a means of contributing towards achieving credits
via this method (regardless of the shift pattern). Where this is the case, the distance
from the main building entrance to the drop-off/pick-up point (the transport node)
of the service should be used.
CN5
Phased
developments,
see criterion 3
In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be
provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can
consider such facilities provided that:
A commitment has been made to provide transport facilities within the shortest of
the following periods, this is demonstrated either within the General Contract
Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement:
169
Transport
Ref
Terms
Description
1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases
have been completed and are ready for occupation. OR
2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build
time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured
from the completion date of that phase.
The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring
that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities
is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use
within a period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be
considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
Methodology
The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL)
method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a
detailed description of the PTAL methodology and how it works refer to appendix B of Transport Assessment Best Practice;
Guidance Document:http://www.tfl.gov.uk/assets/downloads/businessandpartners/transport-assessment-best-practiceguidance.pdf
Calculating the average number of services
For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour. This is
calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the peak arrival/departure times for the
building or the building's typical day’s operating hours (see definition 'operating hours'), divided by the number of hours within
that period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between 08:00 19:00 hrs (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping services during this period is 3.2 (equivalent to an
average service frequency of approximately 20 minutes).
Multiple services
Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the
same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node
can be considered as separate.
Bi-directional routes
Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest
frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology).
Buildings in Greater London
Transport for London hosts a Planning Information Database that allows users to search for a specific London location by
street name, co-ordinates or postcode and then calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) for that location. The Total AI is confirmed
for the Point of Interest (POI) within the summary seport, which can be downloaded and used as evidence of compliance for
the assessed building. Go to:www.webptals.org.uk
170
Transport
Evidence
Criteria
1-3
One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-2
A completed copy of the Tra01 calculator
Accessibility Index
A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of
interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public
transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node.
For example, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service
stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively,
the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The
same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of
compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI.
Additional building type classifications
Higher Education type 1: H.E buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are resident on the
campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
Higher Education type 2: H.E buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are resident on the
campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
Other Building - type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff/employees with occasional business related
visitors.
Other Building - type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff/employees with a larger number of
consistently frequent visitors/users (either resident or non-resident).
Other Building - type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result of its function,
i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre (see definition of
rural and rural location sensitive buildings location).
Compliant transport node
A compliant node includes any bus service with a stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the
assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service stopping
at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport node or a
community focal point e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should be assessed
and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service can be said to
provide a local commuter service.
Prison and M.O.D sites:The distance requirement for a compliant node for buildings on these sites is 1000m for both
bus and rail.
Main building entrance
The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building which is directly connected to the main building
reception, circulation routes, lifts/stairs and is available to the majority of the building’s staff and visitors on arrival, it is
171
Transport
not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public
highway).
For prison/MOD site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the gatehouse entrance.
Operating hours
BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the
majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building
can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during a certain
period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8-10am, then that period
can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building types that
operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis.
During what typically would be deemed unsociable hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public
transport operating, such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the
assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then
refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this
issue.
BREEAM Tra 01 calculator tool
A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number
of BREEAM credits achieved.
Rural location
A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large
urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of continuously
built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village locations, green
field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no greater than 20
hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local towns and may
have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport National Travel Survey
definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development indicated on Ordnance Survey
maps
Rural location sensitive buildings
This definition includes any of the building types (listed below) where there is a demonstrable social or economic need
from a rural population for the service/demand, which the new building is intended to meet; and therefore locating
the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e. within an urbanised
area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this category.
1. Offices where providing services to the local community
2. Industrial where providing services to the local community
3. Retail where providing services to the local community
4. Pre-school, primary and secondary school
5. GP surgery
Typical day
The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors will be
at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should
check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for
the entire operating week (excluding Sundays).
Other information
Table 1.2- 1:Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day
Building type
Default hours
Commercial
8.00am - 7.00pm
172
Transport
Building type
Default hours
Pre-school, school, sixth form
college
7.30am -10.00am,3.00pm - 5.30pm
Further & Higher Education
8.00am - 7.00pm
Healthcare
7.00am - 8.00pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift
pattern)
Retail: Shopping centre
9.00am - 7.00pm
Retail: Supermarket
8.00am - 10.00pm
Retail: Service provider
8.00am - 6.00pm
Retail: Convenience store
7.00am - 10.00pm
Retail: DIY/retail park
8.00am - 8.00pm
Retail: shop
8.30am - 5.30pm
Multi-residential accommodation
8.00am - 7.00pm
Court
8.00am - 7.00pm
Prison
7am - 8pm
(encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)
Other Buildings
8.00am - 7.00pm
Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type.
24 hour use building
7am - 8pm
173
Transport
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To encourage and reward a building location that facilitates easy access to local services and so reduces the environmental,
social and economic impacts resulting from multiple or extended building user journeys, including transport related emissions
and traffic congestion.
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits - Proximity to local amenities
1. Where the building is located within close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be frequently
required and used by building occupants, as outlined in Table - 29
Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types
Building types
Criteria
Type
1
Type
2
Type
3
Type
4
No. of BREEAM credits
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No. of amenities
4
4
5
4
4
7
4
500
500
500
500
500
1000
500
Proximity (metres)
Type 5
Type
6
Core amenities (3 out of the following 4 core amenities must be accessible and within proximity of the building)
Appropriate food outlet
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Access to cash
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Access to an outdoor open space (public or
private, provided suitably sized and
accessible to building users)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
174
Transport
Building types
Criteria
Type
1
Type
2
Type
3
Type
4
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Publicly available postal facility
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Community space
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Over-the-counter services associated with a
pharmacy
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Access to a recreation/leisure facility for
fitness/sports
Type 5
Type
6
Additional amenities
A public sector GP surgery or general medical
centre
Child care or school
ü
ü
Type 1: Offices, Retail, Industrial, Courts
Type 2: Pre-school, Schools, Sixth Form
Type 3: Higher Education and Further Education
Type 4: Healthcare
Type 5: Multi-residential (there are two credits available and each can be awarded independently of the other).
Type 6: Other Building types
This issue is not applicable to prison buildings/developments.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
175
Transport
Terms
Description
guidance
CN4
Collective amenities
One type of amenity may also exist within or as part of other types of amenities, e.g.
a grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is
not a requirement of this issue that each amenity is ‘stand alone’.
CN5
Amenities within
assessed building or
on site
An amenity within the building or on the same site as the proposed development,
e.g. where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park/centre,
complies with the assessment criteria.
CN6
Phased
developments
The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility,
concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue.
Ref
General
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
1
1
Evidence showing:
1. Location of assessed building
2. Location and type of amenities
3. The route to the amenities
4. Plan/map scale
OR
Where the amenities do not currently exist but are
due to be developed a letter from the
client/developer confirming:
a. The location and type of amenities to be
provided
b. The timescale for development of the amenities.
176
Transport
Accessible amenities
Amenities (as listed) that are within the required proximity (distance in metres) of the building and accessible via safe
pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements/paths and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing
points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow flies’.
Appropriate food outlet
A means of accessing a food supply that is affordable to the majority of the buildings users as well as being
appropriate for their day-to-day needs. For example, a small office building would benefit from having a small shop
selling sandwiches or snacks or a multi-residential building would benefit from having a restaurant in the local area.
Community space
An internal space that is inclusive to the majority of building users who will occupy the assessed
building/development. The space will serve to facilitate community activities applicable to the assessed building
type,for example for a multi-residential building a community centre or village hall.
Other information
None.
177
Transport
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To encourage building users to cycle, so promoting exercise and helping reduce congestion and emissions, by ensuring
adequate provision of cyclist facilities,
Assessment criteria
One credit - Cycle storage (excluding sheltered housing, care homes, supported living facilities and
prison building types)
1. Compliant cycle storage spaces that meet the minimum levels set out in Table - 30 (see checklists and tables) are
installed.
One credit - Cyclist facilities (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities,
Student residents, key accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and prison building
types)
2. Criterion 1 has been achieved.
3. At least two of the following types of compliant cyclist facilities have been provided (see compliance notes for the scope
of compliant cyclist facilities):
a. Showers
b. Changing facilities
c. Lockers
d. Drying spaces
One credit - Cycle storage and cyclist facilities (sheltered housing, care homes and supported living
facilities and prison building types only)
4. Where criteria 1 to 3 have been met for cycle space and cycle facilities requirements.
Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type
Building type
No. spaces
per unit of
measure
Unit of
measure
Notes
Commercial
Offices, Industrial
1
10 staff
178
Transport
Retail
Large Retail
1
10 staff
1
20 public car
parking spaces
10
Total
Pre-school or creche
1
10 staff
Primary School
5
Per form or
class in year
group
Secondary schools
and sixth form,
Further and Higher
Education (FE and
HE)
1
10 staff &
pupils/students
total
1
10 staff
1
2 consulting
rooms OR 10
beds
1
10 staff
Small retail
The number of staff should be the maximum number
using the building at any time/shift. The staff spaces must
be provided in addition to customer spaces. Whilst they
do not need to be separate from customer spaces, this is
encouraged. This is subject to providing a minimum of 10
cycle customer spaces. Any retail development that
provides at least 50 customer cycle storage spaces will
comply regardless of the number of parking spaces.
The spaces must be publicly accessible within proximity of
a main building entrance. Compliant cyclist facilities are
intended for staff only i.e. it is not a requirement of
compliance to provide facilities for customers.
Education
For example: where a primary school has been designed
to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15
compliant cycle storage spaces are provided for the
whole school. Where there are varying numbers of
forms/classes per year, the calculation must be based on
the year with the greatest number of classes/forms
FE/HE: student numbers must account for both under
and post graduates, as well as PhD students and PostDoctorates.
Healthcare
All healthcare
building types
Unit of measure: use the measure which is the largest for
the building type e.g. if hospital then use beds, if GP
surgery then use consulting rooms. The requirement for
consulting rooms/beds is subject to a minimum of four
compliant cycle storage spaces being provided.
Courts and Prisons
Prison
establishment
located building
Only one credit available with the provision of two cyclist
facilities.
179
Transport
Law Court
1
10 building
occupants
(staff and
visitors)
1
10 staff
1
2 residents
1
10 staff
Multi-residential
Student residences,
key worker
accommodation
Sheltered housing,
Care homes,
Supported living
facility
1 Compliant
wheelchair or
electric buggy
storage
spaces
10 residents*
The requirement is subject to a minimum of one
compliant space being provided.
* Or spaces specified in accordance with the number
required as identified by the likely resident profile. Where
the resident profile is not the elderly or physically disabled
or impaired then, where appropriate, the requirement
for wheelchair or electric buggy spaces should be
changed to compliant cycle spaces
Other buildings
Transport type 1*
Transport type 2*
Use the criteria defined for office buildings.
1
1
Transport type 3*
1
1
10 staff
10 visitors or
beds
20 staff
A single credit can be awarded where spaces for staff
only are provided as well as the appropriate compliant
cyclist facilities. The Compliance note allowing a reduction
to the cyclist provision in rural locations has been
accounted for in the unit of measure for this transport
type. It should not therefore be applied again.
1
20 building
visitors/ beds
Transport hubs
1
10 public users
Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance note) to a
maximum of 5000 daily public users. Public users refer to
regular peak time users of the service who start and/or
finish their public transport journey at the assessed
building.
MOD nonresidential
1
10 living-out
personnel
These criteria apply to MOD buildings where the majority
of personnel live off-site.
MOD residential
1
2 residents
180
Transport
Note : Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200 the sliding scale of compliance
can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required (see Methodology section).
* See definitions in the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibilityfor classification of transport type 1, 2 and 3.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Where the credits are being sought the compliant number of cycle storage spaces
must be provided as part of the base build. Compliant cyclist facilities (showers,
changing areas etc.) can be provided in shell and core areas of the building as part
of the base build.Alternatively, compliance can be demonstrated where the shell
and core building is designed to facilitate future installation of the compliant
number and type of cyclist facilities by the tenant/owner-occupier through the
provision of an appropriately sized and dedicated space in the base building,
including either the installation of the appropriate services (for showers) or
infrastructure to allow the future installation of the relevant services e.g. capped
water supply, service /ventilation ducts, drainage etc.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
CN3
Use of local
compliant cycle
storage
For all buildings which form part of a larger site / development, use of existing local
BREEAM compliant cycle storage space is acceptable.
CN4
Compliant cyclist
facilities and noncompliant local
storage spaces
Where the assessed building has compliant cyclist facilities, plus access to some
local cycle storage spaces that are not BREEAM compliant, one credit can still be
awarded.
CN5
Compliant cycle
spaces but no cyclist
facilities
Where the assessed building meets the minimum number of compliant cycle
spaces required for two credits, but does not have or meet the minimum provision
for compliant cyclist facilities, then one credit can be awarded.
Country specific
CN6
Country specific
guidance
181
Transport
Terms
Description
CN7
Existing/new site
wide facilities
For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site where there exist shared
compliant facilities, or where the new building will form a part of a larger
development (e.g. campus, retail or business park), the required number of facilities
can be determined on a development-wide basis. The number of compliant
facilities must be large enough to cater for the building occupants of the assessed
building, in addition to the occupants of any existing or other new buildings that will
share those facilities.
CN8
Building locations
with a high level of
public transport
accessibility
For sites where at least 50% of the available BREEAM credits for Public transport
accessibility (Tra 01) have been awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit), the
number of compliant cycle spaces required in Table - 30 can be reduced by 50%.
This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the
same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on
the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required
showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual
requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%.
CN9
Rural locations
For sites in rural locations the following can be applied;
1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles, the
number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50%.
This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the
same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on
the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required
showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual
requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as appropriate.
A percentage reduction in this context cannot be applied in addition to the 50%
reduction due to the building's Public Transport Accessibility level (as described in
the Compliance note above).
The definition of a rural location (and urban location) can be found in the BREEAM
issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility – Additional information.
CN10
Number of building
occupants unknown
If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants commuting to the
development, e.g. speculative developments, then the default occupancy rates
given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity – Tra 04 Maximum car
parking capacity can be used to determine a default number of users. Alternatively,
the number of building occupants in an existing development of similar type and
size can be used (the assessor needs to justify/validate the number used in their
certification report).
Ref
General
CN11
182
Education (schools
only)
Compliant showers
In the case of a pre-school or primary school shower provision is for staff only and
set at a rate of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a
minimum of one shower being provided). For example, where a primary school has
Transport
Terms
Description
- additional
requirements, see
criterion 3
been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant
spaces are required to meet the BREEAM criteria for cycle storage, and therefore
two showers for staff use would be required for compliance with the cycle facilities
criterion.
In secondary schools (and sixth forms) where there are less than 100 pupils, a
minimum of two showers must be provided for pupils with one male and one
female shower (where applicable). A minimum of one shower for staff should be
provided in all cases.
CN12
Sheltered housing or
care homes
and supported living
facilities
Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the
following:
1. Charging points for electric buggies (at least two) provided within the storage
space
2. The storage area must be secure yet easily accessible.
3. Lighting of the storage facility must be compliant with the external (or internal
where relevant) lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual
comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid operation during daylight
hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility.
4. Where access to and from the building main entrance needs to be tightly
controlled for the safety/security of residents, and it can be demonstrated
that compliance with points 2 and 3 above impact on this (e.g. where
residents include those with mental health problems), these two items can be
excluded from the compliance requirements.
CN13
Residential buildings
with transient
visitors such as
hotels, hostels and
training centre
The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply in residential buildings with
transient visitors, e.g. hotels, hostels, training centres where the visitor typically
resides for less than one month. For a secure accommodation unit compliance
should be based on visitors (not beds). In this case, cyclist facilities for staff must be
accessible to all building users to ensure that visitors and patients/community that
will travel to and use or work within the building are provided for.
Ref
Methodology
Sliding scale of compliance
To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is
acceptable to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure (defined in
Table - 30) and potentially the provision of cyclist facilities on a sliding scale as follows:
1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 1.5.
2. For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.
3. For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5.
For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage spaces:
1-200 users @ 1 space per 10 users = 20 spaces
201-300 users @ 1 space per 15 users (standard unit of measure x 1.5) = 7 spaces
301-400 users @ 1 space per 20 users (standard unit of measure x 2) = 5 spaces
401+ users @ 1 space per 25 users (standard unit of measure x 2.5) = 16 spaces
Total compliant cycle storage spaces required = 48 spaces
183
Transport
The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: small and large retail, primary schools, multiresidential buildings and MOD residential buildings.
Minimum cycle storage provision
Where the calculated number of required cycle storage spaces is less than four, total provision should be based on the lower
of the following:
a. A minimum of four compliant storage spaces must be provided OR
b. One space per user (staff and where appropriate other user groups).
Evidence
Criteria
All
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Compliant cycle storage spaces
Compliant cycle storage spaces are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Cycles can be secured within spaces in rack(s).They are covered overhead and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a
permanent structure (building or hard-standing). Alternatively the cycle storage may be located in a locked
structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with appropriate surveillance.
2. The distance between each cycle rack, and cycle racks and other obstructions, e.g. a wall, allows for appropriate
access to the cycle storage space, to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed.
3. The storage facility or entrance to the facility is in a prominent site location that is viewable/overlooked from either
an occupied building or a main access to a building.
4. The cycle storage facility has adequate lighting, this could be demonstrated with the lighting criteria defined in
BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid out-of-hours use and operation
during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility.
Compliant showers
Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces (unless stated, see below), subject to a minimum
provision of one shower.
2. Any development providing eight showers or more will comply regardless the number of cycle storage spaces
provided.
3. Both male and female users must be catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific
facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use.
4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users/uses.
Compliant changing facilities
Compliant changing facilities are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Appropriately sized for the likely/required number of users. The assessor should use their judgement to
determine whether the changing area is appropriately sized given the number of cycle storage spaces or showers
provided.
2. Changing areas must include adequate space and facilities to hang or store clothing and equipment whilst
changing or showering, e.g. bench seat and/or hooks.
Toilet/shower cubicles cannot be counted as changing facilities.
184
Transport
Compliant lockers
Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required.
2. Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms.
3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment.
Compliant drying spaces
A compliant drying space is defined as a space that is specifically designed and designated with adequate
heating/ventilation for the drying of wet clothes. A plant room for example is not a compliant drying space.
Small retail type
Includes smaller retail units/shops that may form part of a wider retail/business district, city or town centre or mixeduse development and typically do not have the scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist facilities.
Large retail type
Includes large retail developments, such as shopping centres, retail parks and supermarkets, which typically will have
covered or uncovered parking or external areas and therefore scope to provide their own dedicated cycle facilities.
Other information
None.
185
Transport
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To encourage the use of alternative means of transport other than the private car to and from the building, thereby helping to
reduce transport related emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building’s operation.
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits - Car parking capacity
1. The building’s car parking capacity is compared to the maximum car parking capacity benchmarks inTable - 31 and the
relevant number of BREEAM credits awarded.
For most building types, except those where stated, the benchmarks vary according to the buildings public transport
Accessibility Index (determined in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility). Therefore, for
these building types the AI must be determined prior to assessing this issue. This is required to ensure that the building’s
car parking capacity is relative to the development's accessibility to the public transport network.
Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types
Building type
Criteria
Building’s Accessibility Index
<4
≥4-<8
No. of
credits
≥8
Max. parking capacity
1 space per x building users, where x is:
Office, industrial, student residences and key worker
accommodation
Sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facility
186
3
4
5
1
4
5
6
2
4
5
6
1
5
6
7
2
Transport
Building type
Criteria
Building’s Accessibility Index
Further and Higher Education
Other Building – Transport type 1 and 2
Other Building – MOD (where building users are ‘living-out
personnel’)
No. of
credits
<4
≥4-<8
≥8
15
20
25
1
20
25
30
2
3
4
5
1
4
5
6
2
2
3
4
1
3
4
5
2
For the building types listed below, the maximum number of parking spaces provided must not be greater than the total
of the following:
Healthcare - Hospitals (acute, specialist, teaching, mental
health)
One parking space for every four staff, plus;
One parking space for every four beds, plus
Two parking spaces for each consulting,
examination, treatment, therapy room and
A&E cubicle.
1
Healthcare - GP surgery, health centre, community hospital
One parking space for every two medical
staff, plus;
One parking space for every three nonmedical staff, plus;
Two parking spaces for each consulting,
examination, treatment, therapy room and
A&E cubicle.
1
Pre-school, schools, sixth form, Retail, Prison, Court, Other
Building – Transport type 3, Other Building – Transport hubs
Issue not assessed for these building types
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
187
Transport
Ref
Terms
Description
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue is not applicable to simple buildings assessments..
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
General
No general guidance applicable under this issue.
General
CN4
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
All
Where relevant, a completed copy Tra 01 calculator
confirming the building's Accessibility Index
As per interim design stage.
Accessibility Index
Refer to Tra 01 Public transport accessibility
Building Users
Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the following, where relevant to the
building type:
1. Staff (who will work within the building).
2. Students (who will access the building for work or study during a typical academic term-time /semester day).
3. Residents (who will reside permanently or for a short period of time in the building).
If known, or can be reasonably estimated, project specific occupancy figures should be used. If this is not possible, for
example where the building is a speculative development, use the default occupancy rates given in Table - 32 in the
Other information section (below) to determine the number of users. Where the number of building users is variable,
188
Transport
provision of parking spaces should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building
at any time during a typical day.
Care homes
For the purpose of BREEAM, care homes are defined as those buildings which are legally required to register with the
Commission for Social Care Inspection by the Care Standards Act, 2000.
Sheltered housing
Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (use Classes) Order 1987, and can be
defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a
resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as 'Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3' in accordance with the 1969
Ministry of Housing and Local Government circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines.
MOD Living-out personnel
This refers to staff that work in the assessed building and are not residents on the MOD site where the assessed
building is located.
Other building types
See the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibility for a definition of other building types 1, 2 and 3.
Other information
Table - 32: Table - 32Default occupancy rates by building type
Building type and function area
Occupant
density
Business
Occupant
density
Secure Residential Institution
Office area (including reception areas)
0.111
Cell
0.190
Food preparation area (staffed)
0.108
Reception
0.121
Small workshop/category lab space
0.068
Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area
0.183
Eating/drinking area
0.141
Industrial
Food preparation area
0.213
Workshop - small scale
0.048
Industrial process area
0.022
Laundry
0.086
Laboratory
0.107
Classroom
0.183
Reception
0.110
Office and consulting areas
0.093
Warehouse storage
0.009
0.111
Generic Office Area
0.108
Libraries, Museums, Galleries
Hospitals, care homes
Reception
0.152
Reception
0.095
0.176
189
Transport
Occupant
density
Occupant
density
Post Mortem Facility
0.050
0.150
0.161
Laboratory
0.098
Physiotherapy Studio
0.200
0.062
Bedroom Unit
0.105
Display and Public areas
0.150
Laundry
0.117
Generic Office Area
0.099
24-hours consulting/treatment areas
0.000
General Assembly and Leisure, Clubs, Theatres
Assembly areas/halls
1.000
Dry sports hall
0.047
Hydrotherapy pool hall
0.100
Fitness Studio
0.132
Industrial process area
0.124
Fitness suite/gym
0.170
Laboratory
0.080
0.131
Operating theatre
0.125
0.175
Classroom
1.000
Auditoria
0.341
Diagnostic Imaging
0.100
Ice rink
0.225
Generic Ward
0.175
Performance area (stage)
0.049
0.195
Public circulation areas
0.241
Reception
0.126
Primary Healthcare
Reception
0.11
Sales area - general
0.102
0.082
Swimming pool
0.163
0.067
Further and Higher Education
Residents Bedroom
0.120
Generic Office Area
0.116
Classroom
0.203
Display area
0.001
0.096
Community/day centres
190
Transport
Occupant
density
Occupant
density
0.202
Reception
0.108
Computer lab
0.231
Dry sports hall
0.047
Laboratory
0.106
0.143
Laundry
0.105
0.064
Reception
0.112
0.169
0.068
0.106
0.098
Other spaces/buildings
Hotels
Data Centre
0.096
Bedroom
0.094
Server Room
0.096
0.108
Heavy Plant Room
0.096
Reception
0.105
Generic Office Area
0.106
Notes for Table - 32 of default occupancy rates:
1. The net floor area for each function must be multiplied by the equivalent occupant density to determine an overall
occupancy for the function area.
2. Not all potential building areas are listed, only those required to reflect estimated building occupancy for the building
type. For example, an office building may have a canteen but it will be the staff that predominantly uses the canteen. The
office staff numbers will be estimated using the default occupancy rate for the office area; therefore to include the
canteen would result in double counting of occupancy.
3. If a building type is not listed, occupancy rates for a similar building type or function area may be used.
4. The above occupancy rates have been sourced from the activity database of the Simplified Building Energy Model
(SBEM).
191
Transport
Tra 05 Travel plan
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise the consideration given to accommodating a range of travel options for building users, thereby encouraging
the reduction of reliance on forms of travel that have the highest environmental impact.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Travel plan
1. A travel plan has been developed as part of the feasibility and design stages.
2. A site specific travel assessment/statement has been undertaken to ensure the travel plan is structured to meet the
needs of the particular site and covers the following (as a minimum):
a. Where relevant, existing travel patterns and opinions of existing building or site users towards cycling and walking so
that constraints and opportunities can be identified.
b. Travel patterns and transport impact of future building users.
c. Current local environment for walkers and cyclists (accounting for visitors who may be accompanied by young
children)
d. Disabled access (accounting for varying levels of disability and visual impairment)
e. Public transport links serving the site
f. Current facilities for cyclists
3. The travel plan includes a package of measures to encourage the use of sustainable modes of transport and movement
of people and goods during the buildings operation and use.
4. If the occupier is known, they must be involved in the development of the travel plan and they must confirm that the
travel plan will be implemented post construction and supported by the buildings management in operation.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
192
Tra 05 Travel plan
Transport
Ref
Terms
Description
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
A travel plan is still required even if the end user/occupier is not known, albeit that it
may only be an interim travel plan or one that broadly addresses all the issues
covered in the assessment criteria. The developer must confirm that they will hand
over a copy of the travel plan to the building’s future tenant(s)/owner-occupier, so
that it may inform their own travel plan/strategy.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue is not applicable to simple buildings assessments..
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Existing travel
plan,see criterion 3
The credit can be awarded if the assessed building is part of a site that has an
existing up-to-date organisational travel plan that is compliant with BREEAM, is
applicable to all building users (in existing and assessed new buildings) and accounts
for the additional travel resulting from users of the new building.
CN5
Travel assessment
or
Statement
see criterion 2
A travel assessment (also referred to as transport assessment) will be required
where a proposed development is likely to have significant transport and related
environmental impacts. The study area for a transport assessment related to a
proposed development should be determined in discussion between the
developer and appropriate authorities. A transport statement is required where
the proposed development is not likely to have a significant transport impact. A
transport statement is suitable to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM when the
proposed development is expected to generate relatively low numbers of trips or
traffic flows, with minor transport impacts. For further guidance refer
to:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/guidance-on-transportassessment
General
Methodology
None.
193
Transport
Evidence
Criteria
All
Travel plan
A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation, principally to increase choice and
reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or development by sustainable modes of transport. A travel
plan contains both physical and behavioural measures to increase travel choices and reduce reliance on single-occupancy car
travel.
Building users
Where the term building users is referenced, this refers to the following, as appropriate to building type:
1. Staff (commuter journeys and business travel)
2. Pupils/students
3. Visitors
4. Patients
5. Customers
6. Community users
7. Personnel who make deliveries/collections to and from the development
8. Contractors/service providers, who regularly work at and access the building/development
9. Residents of multi-residential buildings
Other information
None.
194
Water
Water
195
Water
Minimum standards
5
Yes
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water for sanitary use in new buildings from all sources through the use of water
efficient components and water recycling systems.
Assessment criteria
Up to five credits
1. An assessment of the efficiency of the building’s domestic water consuming components is undertaken using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
2. The water consumption (litres/person/day) for the assessed building is compared against a baseline performance and
BREEAM credits awarded based upon Table - 33.
3. The efficiency of the following ‘domestic scale’ water consuming components must be included in the assessment
(where specified):
a. WCs
b. Urinals
c. Taps (wash hand basins and where specified kitchen taps and waste disposal unit)
d. Showers
e. Baths
f. Dishwashers (domestic and commercial sized)
g. Washing machine (domestic and commercial or industrial sized)
The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building types and activity areas for which the above components must be
assessed.
4. Where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified, its yield (l/person/day) is used to off-set non potable water
demand from components that would otherwise be supplied using potable water.
5. Any greywater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8525-1:2010 Greywater Systems - Part 1
Code of Practice1. Any rainwater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8515:2009 Rainwater
Harvesting Systems - Code of practice2.
6. Healthcare and prison buildings: refer to the relevant Compliance note for additional criteria regarding the specification
of particular water consuming component controls.
196
Water
Table - 33: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption.
% improvement
No. of BREEAM credits
12.5%
1
25%
2
40%
3
50%
4
55%
5
65%
Exemplary performance
Note: for some building types an alternative approach to compliance must be used to award credits (for further information
please refer to the Methodology section, below, and the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator)
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
All criteria
Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2 - Shell and Core only: compliance for this issue must be assessed on the
basis of all water consuming components and greywater and/or rainwater
systems specified and installed by the developer.
Components or systems listed in the criteria that are not being specified by the
developer, but may be specified by the tenant, do not need to be assessed for a
shell and core project.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
197
Water
Ref
Terms
Description
CN3
Country specific
guidance
No fittings present
Where a project under assessment contains none of the specified components, the
performance specification for components provided in facilities in an adjacent and
accessible building must be used in the calculation, i.e. those facilities most likely to
be used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed building.
This rule also applies where a project under assessment consists solely of an
extension to an existing building, i.e. where the extended building contains no new
sanitary facilities because there are facilities present within the existing building.
General
CN5
Building specific
CN6
Healthcare
Components in
healthcare facilities
See criterion 6.
In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the flushing control for each WC
or urinal in a healthcare facility must be suitable for operation by patients with frail
or infirm hands or activated by electronic sensors.
Components in clinical areas maybe omitted from the calculation. For the purpose
of this compliance note ‘clinical areas’ refers to all areas where a scrub-up trough,
clinical sink or clinical basin is installed. This is not an exhaustive list and guidance
should always be sought from the appropriate professional, such as a Health
Authorities Infection control officer or a client infection control representative or
equivalent, to ascertain areas of exemption specific to infection control and other
considerations.
Although exempt, HTM07-04 contains guidance on water savings from medical
related activities. Furthermore, in some cases, the use of water-efficient fittings and
appliances may not be appropriate to the needs of the patient, and inappropriate
specification may adversely affect the incidence and propagation of infections. In
such instances, the assessor will need to confirm with BRE Global the exemption of
components from the relevant building areas. The design team should also consult
NHS guidelines concerning appropriate selection of sanitary fittings and fixtures
and the control of legionella.
CN7
Prisons
Components in
prison cells on HM
Prison
developments
See criterion 6.
In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the following requirements apply:
Where sanitary components are specified within a prison cell, a volume controller
must be specified on the individual fittings or water supply to each cell. A volume
controller is an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the
maximum pre-set volume is reached within a defined period.
Methodology
A non domestic building’s water-efficient performance is determined using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator in one of two ways,
using either the standard approach (common building types) or alternative (other building type) approach. Each approach is
summarised below.
198
Water
Standard Wat01 method
The standard BREEAM method determines water efficiency (measured in l/person/day and m3 /person/yr) for a building
based on the buildings actual component specification and default usage patterns for the building type and its activity areas.
This modelled output is compared with the same output for a baseline component specification and the percentage
improvement used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.
The baseline component specification is equivalent to the water efficiency of industry standard components (seeTable - 34),
steered by the minimum levels required by the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations. The BREEAM percentage
improvement benchmarks have then been determined based on progressively more efficient standards for water
consuming components and, for the higher levels of performance, the specification of greywater and rainwater systems.
The standard approach is the default method for calculating water efficiency of a BREEAM assessed building and is that used
for most of the common building types, where usage data are available. For buildings types where usage data are not
available, and therefore the standard approach of determining performance cannot be used, an alternative approach to
compliance must be used (described below). Refer to the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for the current list of building types which
can be assessed using the standard approach.
Alternative Wat01 method
Where it is not possible to use the standard approach to determine the building's water consumption total
(litres/person/day) the assessment can be completed on an elemental basis, as follows:
1. Using the list of applicable domestic scale water consuming components (see criterion 3), determine those that are
specified/present in the assessed building.
2. Compare the actual specification for each component type with the table of water efficient consumption levels by
component type (Table - 34) to determine the level of performance for each type. Note that the volumes quoted are
maximums for that level and the % WC or urinal flushing demand is a minimum for that level.
3. Define each component’s level of performance in the 'Other building type calculator' worksheet of the BREEAM Wat 01
calculator.
a. For the alternative approach, the calculator applies a building type specific weighting to each component level to
reflect its ‘in-use’ consumption relative to the other components present. A component with high ‘in-use’ water
consumption therefore has a larger weighting than one with lower ‘in-use’ consumption and contributes relatively
more to the building’s overall level of performance under this BREEAM issue.
b. The weightings are derived from data on actual water consumption per day from non domestic buildings, sourced
from BNWAT22 3. They can be found in the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
4. Based upon the performance categorisation of each component type and the component weighting, the calculator will
determine an overall,aggregate level of performance and award the relevant number of BREEAM credits as follows:
Greywater/rainwater level achieved
Overall Component level
-
4
5
Baseline
0 credits
1 credit
2 credits
Level 1
1 credit
2 credits
3 credits
Level 2
2 credits
3 credits
4 credits
Level 3 or 4
3 credits
4 credits
5 credits
Level 5
4 credits
5 credits
5 credits
199
Water
Note:
1. An innovation credit for exemplary level performance can be awarded where the component
specification achieves level 5 and > 95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled non
potable water.
2. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved will not necessarily be a whole
number, e.g component level 4. Where this is the case the methodology will always round down to the
nearest component level and therefore BREEAM credit(s) level, e.g. if the component specification
achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology will not
round up to 4 credits because the performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved).
3. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water consuming
component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification can be
entered in the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator will determine the
building’s aggregated performance level for that component type.
Please note: whilst attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both methodologies described above, they do
determine performance in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could therefore differ for
the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when applying BREEAM New
Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall development.
Component Type
Table - 34 outlines the standards, by component type, used to define the performance levels set in BREEAM. These defined
levels of efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information (see references4) and therefore reflect
robust levels of typical, good, best and exemplary practice.
Table - 34: Water efficient consumption levels by component type
Component
Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level)
Base
1
2
3
4
5
Unit
WC
6
5
4.5
4
3.75
3
Effective flush volume (litres)
Wash hand basin taps
12
9
7.50
4.50
3.75
3
litres/min
Showers
14
10
8
6
4
3.50
litres/min
Baths
200
180
160
140
120
100
litres
Urinal
(2 or more urinals)
7.50
6
3
1.50
0.75
0
litres/bowl/hour
Urinal
(1 urinal only)
10
8
4
2
1
0
litres/bowl/hour
Greywater/
rainwater system
0%
0%
0%
25%
50%
75%
% of WC/urinal flushing demand met using
recycled non potable water
Kitchen tap:
kitchenette
12
10
7.50
5
5
5
litres/min
Kitchen taps:
restaurant (pre-rinse
nozzles only)
10.30
9
8.30
7.30
6.30
6
litres/min
Domestic sized
17
13
13
12
11
10
litres/cycle
200
Component
Water
Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level)
Base
1
2
3
4
5
Unit
Domestic sized
washing machines
90
60
50
40
35
30
litres/use
Waste disposal unit
17
17
0
0
0
0
litres/min
Commercial sized
dishwashers
8
7
6
5
4
3
litres/rack
Commercial/
Industrial sized
washing machines
14
12
10
7.50
5
4.50
litres/kg
dishwashers
Please note that specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels will result, in most cases, in the
corresponding number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, please bear in mind that the component specifications
above are akin to thresholds between each level. Therefore caution should be taken when defining a component specification
for a BREEAM assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01
BREEAM credits are being targeted, the performance of a particular building’s component specification is verified using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering/installing components. This will
provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM credits.
Water consuming components - data requirements
Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’
product information to complete the assessment.
Domestic
component
Data requirements
WCs
Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use.
Urinals
Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing frequency/hour
and cistern capacity in litres
Taps
Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure:
For high pressure (Type 1) taps - 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) OR
For low pressure (Type 2) taps - 0.1 ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± 0.002 MPa)
(BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply systems of type 1 and 2.
General technical specifications)
This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions.
Showers
Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30˚C), in litres per minute measured at a
dynamic pressure
3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems
OR
0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± 0.005 MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems
(BS EN 1112:2008, Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply systems type
1 and 2. General technical specifications).
201
Water
Kitchen
taps
Maximum flow rate litres/minute.
Baths
Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as the water
consumption from bath taps is taken account of in the use factor for baths. The calculation of water
consumption for baths will assume 40% of the capacity to the overflow. This is to reflect that:
a) Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and
b) The displacement affect the user has on the actual volume of water required for a bath.
Dishwasher
Litres/cycle for domestic applications and/or appliances or litres/rack for commercial applications and/or
appliances.
Washing
machine
Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) and/or appliances or litres/kg for
commercial applications and/or appliances, e.g. in hotels.
Waste
disposal
unit
Flow rate in litres/minute.
Unspecified water consuming components
As the methodology and BREEAM credits for water efficiency compare the buildings modelled water consumption
performance against the performance of a baseline specification for the same component types, where a component type is
not specified it is not accounted for in the methodology, i.e. the component is excluded from both the proposed and baseline
building. Therefore no benefit is gained in terms of BREEAM performance, by deciding not to specify a particular component.
However, the methodology will reflect the reduction in overall water consumption (litres/person/day) for the building, as a
result of not specifying a particular component.
Buildings with a greywater and rainwater system(s)
The following information is required where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified:
Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘intermediate approach’:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Collection area (m2)
Yield co-efficient (%)
Hydraulic filter efficiency (%)
Rainfall (average mm/year)
Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘detailed approach’:
1. Daily rainfall collection (litres)
Greywater: in accordance with BS 8525 :
1. Manufacturer or system designer details.
2. The percentage volume of waste water collected (and re-used) from the following (where relevant); wash hand basins,
showers, kitchen basins, dish-washers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water from non-domestic
components.
Where greywater and/or rainwater systems are specified there is a minimum level of component efficiency that must be
achieved to award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM
credits where performance from less efficient fittings is off-set by the specification of a greywater and/or rainwater collection
system.
202
Water
The intention being to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before off-setting consumption. Where a greywater/rainwater
system is specified/installed, the component specification must achieve a percentage reduction in water consumption (over
the baseline specification) equivalent to that required for 2 credits, i.e. a 25% improvement. Where this level is achieved, all of
the total water demand met by greywater/rainwater sources can contribute to the overall percentage improvement
required to achieve BREEAM credits. If it is not achieved, the percentage of greywater/rainwater allowable will be equivalent to
the percentage improvement in water consumption achieved for the component specification, i.e. percentage improvement
on baseline performance.
For example, if only a 20% improvement is achieved, and therefore the building is not meeting the 25% requirement, then
only 20% of the water demand met via greywater/rainwater sources can be used to off-set water consumption from the
micro components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits are sought or where no
greywater/rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on the water efficiency of the microcomponent specification.
BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow rate due to
specialised end-user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with 25% improvement.
Buildings with a mixture of different functional areas
For the majority of buildings using the standard Wat 01 method, the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building type and
range of different water consuming activity areas within that building; for example, a retail development with sales area and
goods storage or an office that includes a canteen and gym. However, where carrying out a single assessment of a
building/development which consists of a diverse mix of activity areas/building types, all of which can be assessed separately
within the calculator, the following applies:
Determine the building’s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each relevant
activity area/building type. On completion of each assessment, the assessor will need to determine the percentage
improvement as follows:
(T
× T ) + ... + (T nAct × T nOcc) 
I = 100 × 1 − 1Act 1Occ
(T
1Base × T1Occ) + ... + (T nBase × T nOcc) 


Where:
I = Overall improvement (%)
TnAct = the modelled net water consumption (L/person/day) for each building type
TnBase = the modelled baseline water consumption for the corresponding building type
TnOcc = the total default occupancy rate for the corresponding building type.
Where greywater/rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double counting of the
yield from such systems and using it to off-set demand for each activity area/building type.
Fixed water use
The BREEAM water efficiency calculation includes an allowance for fixed water use. This includes water consumption for vessel
filling (for building users drinking water), cleaning in kitchens and food preparation in buildings with a catering facility. Fixed
uses are included to provide greater accuracy in reporting of the building’s overall estimated water consumption. As these
uses are fixed for both actual and baseline building models, their totals do not influence the achievement of BREEAM credits.
Other permissible component demand for non-potable water
The focus of this BREEAM issue is the performance of the building's permanent domestic scale water consuming
components. Where a grey water or rainwater system is specified, the yield from the system should be prioritised for such
uses, i.e. WC orUrinal flushing. However, where the building demonstrates that it has other consistent (i.e. daily) and equivalent
levels of non-potable water demand, and such demands are intrinsic to the building’s operation, then it is permissible for the
demand from these non-domestic uses to be counted, i.e. the demand for rainwater/greywater yield from such
203
Water
systems/components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable water demand from the building's WC/Urinal
components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could include laundry use in hotels/multi-residential developments
or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental
planting irrigation are not considered as equivalent/intrinsic by BREEAM.
Other permissible source of non-potable water
The methodology allows for the collection and recycling of non-potable water from the relevant components listed in the
criteria i.e. taps, showers, baths and dish-washers or washing machines. In addition, where non-potable water is collected
from a non domestic component or source that is intrinsic to the building, then the amount collected can be accounted for in
the methodology. This could include for example wastewater from active hygiene flushing, i.e. a regular hygiene flushing
programme to minimize poor water quality in a potable cold or hot water system. In order for the method to account for this
total, the design team will need to confirm to the assessor the yield from the component/system (in litres) and the frequency
of that yield (in days), i.e. if once a week then frequency would be seven days.
Evidence
Criteria
1-6
1
A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01calculator
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for New Non-Domestic Buildings
The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator is a method for the assessment of water efficiency in most common types of new
non-domestic buildings. The calculator assesses the contribution that each internal domestic scale water consuming
component (as listed in the criteria) has on whole building water consumption).The calculator and accompanying
guidance on its application is available separately from this Scheme Document.
Please note; the calculator is a compliance tool and not a design tool for water demand and drainage systems. The
tool uses default usage and occupancy rates to provide a benchmark of the typical consumption given the specified
fittings (in litres/person/day and m3 /person/year) and their impact on the buildings overall water efficiency. Due to
the impacts and differences of actual user behaviour and occupancy rates the results of the method will not reflect
directly the actual water use during building operation. The results from the methodology should, therefore, not be
used for the purpose of comparison with or prediction of actual water consumption from a non-domestic building.
Domestic scale components
Domestic scale components include water consumed (potable and non-potable) by internal building components
including kitchen taps, wash hand basin taps, baths, showers and dishwashers, WCs, urinals, washing machines and
waste disposal units.
Effective flush volume
Effective flush volume is the volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any contents far enough to
avoid blocking the drain. The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush.
The effective flush volume of a dual flush WC is the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. This is taken to be one full flush
for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and one full flush for every two reduced flushes in
204
Water
domestic (residential) buildings/areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4
litre dual flush volume WC as an example:
Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
The differing ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user behaviour
between these building types.
Greywater recycling
The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged
from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g.
WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building.
Potable water
Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of Wholesomeness) of
the Water Industry Act 1991 5 is referred to as wholesome water.
Non potable water
Any water other than potable water, also referred to as unwholesome water (BS 8525, see references).
Rainwater recycling
The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable
water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed
building.
Clinical areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Other Information
None
1BS 8525-1:2010, Greywater systems – Part 1 code of practice, BSi, 2010
2BS 8515:2009, Rainwater harvesting systems – Code of practice, BSi, 2009
3BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation
Programme, 2007
4AECB Water Standards: Delivering buildings with excellent water and energy performance, vol 2 The water standards,
technical background report (version 1), Grant, Thorton, AECB, 2009.
BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation
Programme, 2007.
BNWAT07: Baths - water efficiency performance tests (version 2.0). Market Transformation Programme, 2007.
BNWAT23: Reliability of information on water consumption of appliances (version 1), Market Transformation Programme,
2007.
BS6465-3:2006, Sanitary installations – Part 3: Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary and
associated appliances.
BSi, 2006.CIRIA W10, Key Performance Indicators for water use in hotel, Rachel Waggett and Catherine Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006.
CIRIA W11, Key Performance Indicators for water use in offices, Waggett, Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006.
Conserving water in buildings, a practical guide. Environment Agency, 2007.
Enhanced Capital Allowance Water Technology List criteria: www.eca-water.gov.uk
Report by Entec UK Ltd for CLG: Research to Assess the Costs and Benefits of Improvements to the Water Efficiency of New
Non-household Buildings, Final Report, Oct 2009.
SD129: Certification and Listing of Low Flush WC appliances. BRE Global, 2008
SD174: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Terminal Fittings. BRE Global, 2008.
SD175: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Baths. BRE Global, 2008.
The Building Regulations 2000, Part G: Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency (2010 edition). HM Government.
Waterwise: www.waterwise.org.uk
Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings. Communities and Local Government, 2009.
205
Water
Water efficient product labelling scheme: www.water-efficiencylabel.org.uk
Water Supply (water fittings) Regulations 1999, DEFRA.
Sustainable Products 2006: Policy Analysis and Projections, Market Transformation Programme, 2006.
Water UK - Macerators, the impact on sewers: www.water.org.uk/home/policy/positions/waste-macerators-position-paper
Water Efficient Buildings, water and planning, guidance for planners http://www.water-efficient-buildings.org.uk/
5Great Britain, The Water Industry Act 1991. London: The Stationery Office
206
Water
Minimum standards
1
Yes (criterion 1 only)
Aim
To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed, and therefore encourage reductions.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is
supplied via a borehole or other private source.
2. Water-consuming plant or building areas, consuming 10% or more of the building’s total water demand, are either
fitted with easily accessible sub meters or have water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area (see
Compliance notes).
3. Each meter (main and sub) has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System (BMS) for the
monitoring of water consumption.
4. If the site on which the building is located has an existing BMS, managed by the same occupier/owner (as the new
building), the pulsed water meter(s) for the new building must be connected to the existing BMS.
None.
Compliance Notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Criteria 1, 3 and 4
Both options: All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
Criterion 2
Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2 - Shell and Core Only: Compliance with criterion 2 must be demonstrated
207
Water
Ref
Terms
Description
for water consuming plant/building areas identifiable by the developer (also see
definitions). Water consuming plant/building areas to be added/installed by the
tenant do not need to be assessed for this issue.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
General
CN4
Water consuming
plant or building
area,
see Criterion 2
CN5
10% of water
demand,
see criterion 2.
208
As a minimum this includes the following (where present):
1. Buildings with a swimming pool and its associated changing facilities
(toilets, showers etc.).
2. On sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial
units, retail parks etc. separate sub meters are fitted on the water
supply to the following areas (where present):
Each individual unit supplied with water
Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks)
Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage,
delivery, waste disposal areas etc.)
Ancillary/separate buildings to the main development with
water supply.
3. Laboratory: in any building with a laboratory or containing laboratories,
a separate water meter is fitted on the water supply to any process or
cooling loop for ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment.
4. Healthcare: for sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health
centres or acute hospitals, separate sub meters are fitted on the supply
to the following areas where present:
Clinical areas and wards
Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit
Laundries
Main production kitchen
Hydrotherapy pools
Laboratories
CSSD/HSDU, pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other
major process water use
Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank
The sub-meter requirement does not necessarily apply in the following cases,
where the assessor confirms there will be no additional monitoring benefit
resulting from their installation:
Terms
Ref
Water
Description
1. Where a building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an
office with sanitary fittings and a small kitchen)
2. Where the building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger
than the other, and the water consumption for the larger demand is likely to
mask the smaller demand.
CN6
Extensions to
existing buildings,
see criterion 4.
If no new water supply is being installed because the occupants of the extended
building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building,
then the following must be provided in the existing building;
1. A water meter for the mains water supply
2. Sub-meters for large water consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative
cooling, swimming pool etc. (where present).
The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in
accordance with the assessment criteria.
CN7
No water supply to
the building or unit
If there is no installed water supply to the assessed building because there will be no
water-consuming fittings in the building, then in such instances the guidance given in
the above Compliance note for extensions to existing building applies.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Staff areas
Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Clinical areas
Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Patient areas
Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
CSSD
Central Sterile Supply Department.
209
Water
HSDU
Hospital Sterilisation and Disinfection Unit.
Other information
None.
210
Water
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To reduce the impact of water leaks that may otherwise go undetected.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Leak detection system
1. A leak detection system which is capable of detecting a major water leak on the mains water supply within the building
and between the building and the utilities water meter is installed. The leak detection system must be:
a. A permanent automated water leak detection system that alerts the building occupants to the leak OR an in-built
automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leaks is installed.
b. Activated when the flow of water passing through the water meter/data logger is at a flow rate above a pre-set
maximum for a pre-set period of time.
c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low level, over set time
periods.
d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers’ water consumption criteria.
e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming plant such
as chillers.
One credit - Flow control devices
2. Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area/facility according to demand are installed (and
therefore minimise water leaks and wastage from sanitary fittings).
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment
Leak detection system, criterion 1
211
Water
Ref
Terms
Description
criteria
apply.
Flow control devices, criterion 2
Option 1 -Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
and function apply.
The WC areas or facilities must be assessed as per criterion 2 regardless of whether
or not the WC areas or facilities are fitted out.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment
criteria
Leak detection systems (1 credit)
OR
2. Install automatic excess flow valves at relevant locations to protect property
from damage caused by leaking pipes or tanks.
Flow control devices (1 credit)
CN3
Automatic excess
flow valve,
See point 2 CN2.
An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch (‘fuse’) to automatically stop
the flow of water and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water
exceeds a predetermined rate (such as may occur in the event of failure of water
supply pipes and tanks).
Country specific
CN4
Country specific
CN5
Leakage ratess S
See criterion 1.
This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be
however the leak detection equipment installed must have the flexibility to
distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the
building type and owner/occupier’s usage patterns.
CN6
System criteria
See criterion 1.
It is anticipated that the leak detection credit will usually be achieved by installing a
system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters.
It does not necessarily require a system that directly detects water leakage along
part or the whole length of the water supply system.
CN7
Water utilities
meters
See criterion 2.
Where there is a water utilities meter at the site/building boundary, it may be
necessary to install a separate flow meter (or alternative measurement system) just
after the utility meter to detect leaks; however, if the water utility company agrees
to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be
acceptable.
General
212
Water
Ref
Terms
Description
CN8
Flow control device
See criterion 2.
The following could be considered as types of flow control devices:
CN9
Flow control
systemsSee criterion
2.
Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female
toilets within a core; they are not required for each individual sanitary appliance. The
criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to each WC block
when it is not being used.
CN10
Single WCs
See criterion 2.
The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single
WC (potentially within smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shutoff could be provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether
proximity detection or a manual switch).
CN11
No water supply to
the building or/ unit
These credits are still assessed where there are no installed fittings and therefore
no water supply to the building. In these instances the facilities likely to be used by
the future occupants of the assessed building must meet the criteria, e.g. those
facilities within the nearest accessible building.
CN12
Extensions to
existing buildings,
see criteria 1 and 2
If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water
supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.
A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the
water supply after a predetermined interval
A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to
switch water on and/or off at predetermined times.
A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water
supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached.
A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device detecting
occupancy or movement in an area to switch water on and turn it off when
the presence is removed.
A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for an
overall managed water control system, utilising some or all of the types of
control elements listed above.
CN13
Clinical areas in
healthcare buildings
The criteria for this issue do not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas.
Methodology
None.
213
Water
Evidence
Criteria
All
One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Clinical areas
Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Other information
None.
214
Water
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To reduce unregulated water consumption by encouraging specification of water efficient equipment.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. Identify the building's unregulated water demands and for each, estimate or model its contribution to the total nondomestic water consumption of the building.
2. Identify the system(s) or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated water demand of the
development and its operation, and demonstrate through either good practice design or specification a meaningful
reduction in the total water demand of the building.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Criteria 1 and 2
Both options: Where the only unregulated water demand comes from an irrigation
system (because this is being specified/installed by the developer), then it must be
used for the purpose of assessing compliance.
Where no irrigation systems are specified, and therefore it is not possible to
estimate or model any unregulated water demands for the building, this issue is not
applicable to these shell and core assessment options.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
215
Water
Ref
Terms
Description
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
CN4
Major impact on
water demand
For a typical office building this would constitute around 10% of total water
demand. For different building types and developments what is deemed as
'significant' will vary.
CN5
Reducing
unregulated water
consumption
BREEAM does not prescriptively define all potential means or solutions for reducing
unregulated water consumption. The design team needs to demonstrate to the
assessor that they have identified key areas of water consumption in the building
and that a reduction in unregulated water consumption has been achieved using
existing 'tried and tested' solutions or new innovative solutions relevant to the
building and its functional requirements.
The following are some examples of solutions 'deemed to satisfy compliance' for a
number of different building types or functions (where the unregulated water
demand for that function is one of/the significant contributor in the building):
1. Drip fed subsurface irrigation incorporating soil moisture sensors. The
irrigation control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different
planting assemblages.
2. Reclaimed/recovered water from a rainwater collection or waste water
recovery system, with appropriate storage, i.e. greywater collection from
building functions or processes that use potable water, e.g. vehicle wash,
sanitary facilities, irrigation etc. This should take into account the Government
Buying Standards1 where appropriate to the building type.
3. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all
seasons of the year.
4. All planting specified is restricted to contextually appropriate species that
thrive without irrigation and will continue to do so in those conditions likely as
a result of climate change, i.e. typically warmer and drier conditions.
General
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
216
Water
Unregulated water
For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, unregulated water is water not used for domestic purposes and is therefore
not regulated by building regulations or other relevant legislation. This includes, but is not limited to, equipment used
for irrigation and, for the relevant building types, vehicle wash plant/equipment.
Other information
None.
1http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/products/water-using-products/
217
Materials
Materials
218
Materials
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact (including embodied carbon)
over the full life cycle of the building.
Assessment criteria
Up to six credits
1. BREEAM awards credits on the basis of the building’s quantified environmental life cycle impact through assessment of
the main building elements, as set out in Table - 36 below:
Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type
Building type
Element Type Assessed
External
walls
Windows
Roof
Upper floor
slab
Internal
walls
Floor
finishes/coverings
Office
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Retail
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Industrial
ü
Education
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Healthcare
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Prisons
ü
ü
ü
Courts
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Multi-residential
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Other buildings
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
-
ü
2. Credits are awarded on the basis of the total number of points achieved, as set out inTable - 37 below, and calculated
using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. This point’s score is based on the Green Guide rating(s) achieved for the
specifications that make-up the main building elements (as above).
Note: Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the
219
Materials
whole life cycle, is available for a material or product that forms part of an assessed building element, this can be used to
increase the contribution of that element to the building’s Mat 01 performance (refer to Calculation procedure where a
specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material under the Methodology section for more detail).
Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points
Building
type
Total Mat 01 points achieved 1 and 2
≥2
≥4
≥5
≥8
≥ 10
≥ 12
≥ 14
Available BREEAM credits
Office
1
1
2
3
4
5
-
Retail
1
1
2
3
4
5
-
Industrial
1
2
-
-
-
-
-
Education
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Healthcare
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Prisons
1
1
2
3
4
-
-
Courts
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Multiresidential
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Other
buildings
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Please refer toMethodology section (below) for a description of the methodology used to determine the number
of points and BREEAM credits achieved.
2. Where the total points achieved exceeds the level required for maximum credits see the exemplary level criteria as
the building may be eligible for an additional innovation credit.
3. Life cycle Green House Gas emissions (kgCO eq.) for each element are also required to be reported based on a 60-year
2
building life. Where specific data is not available for a product or element, generic data should be used. Generic data can
be obtained from the online Green Guide for each element and must be entered in to the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.
The following outlines the two exemplary level routes available to achieve up to three innovation credits for this BREEAM issue.
Route 1: Using the Green Guide to Specification (elemental approach) - one credit
4. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points in addition to the
total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria (as outlined in the table above) OR
5. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point in addition to the
total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria.
Where the assessed building does not specify an element listed above, see the Compliance note regarding the exemplary
level benchmark.
220
Materials
Route 2: Using compliant life cycle assessment software tools (whole building approach) - two credits
6. Where the design team has used an IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) to measure the environmental
impact of the building.
7. Where the design team can demonstrate how the use of an IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) has benefited
the building in terms of measuring and reducing its environmental impact. See CN16
8. Where the design team submit the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or
equivalent) for the assessed building to BRE Global (via the project’s appointed BREEAM assessor).See CN17.
Further information about IMPACT is provided in the Other information section of this BREEAM issue.
Please note a project can achieve all three innovation credits where it is complying with exemplary level criteria 4 to 8, i.e. one
route is not necessarily exclusive of the other, a project can comply with both routes 1 and 2 or choose to comply with only
route 1 or only route 2
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Where floor finishes and internal walls are applicable to the building type being
assessed, the following applies to both the options:
In addition to the main building elements, all building areas where floor finishes
and/or internal walls are being specified/installed by the developer (Including those
in common areas, show areas and other fitted out areas) must be accounted for in
the assessment of this issue.
Office buildings: If the developer has specified floor finishes in a show area only (for
compliance with BREEAM issue Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes), the
area (m2) and Green Guide rating of the floor finishes in the show area must be
accounted for in the assessment of Mat 01.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
-Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
221
Materials
Terms
Description
CN4
Element not
specified
See criteria 1, 2, 4
and 5.
Where the building does not contain an element listed above, for example there are
no upper floors in a single storey building, the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator allows the
BREEAM assessor to exclude the element from the assessment. In such instances
the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator will re-calculate the standard and exemplary level
benchmarks on the basis of the remaining applicable elements.
CN5
Element consisting
of more than one
specification
See criterion 2.
Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the Green Guide
rating and area for each specification should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 01
calculator. The calculator will then determine the total points score on the basis of
each specifications rating and area as a proportion of the whole element.
CN6
Finding exact Green
Guide Ratings.
See criterion 2.
While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to
identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment
(also see note below ‘No Green Guide rating match’).
CN7
No Green Guide
rating match.
See criterion 2.
Where a generic Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification the
BREEAM assessor can use the online Green Guide calculator to determine a
bespoke Green Guide rating for the specification (for any elements except floor
finishes). Licensed BREEAM assessors can access the calculator via
www.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component is not present via the online
Green Guide calculator, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green
Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will respond to the query with a solution and /or
guidance to enable completion of a specification.
Refer to Green Guide Calculator Online Tool guidance for more information.
CN8
Environmental
Profile Certification
of products
See criterion 2.
Products with certified Environmental Profiles can be used to demonstrate
compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a “product specific”
Green Guide rating as part of a relevant elemental specification, e.g. a
manufacturer’s concrete block as part of an external wall specification. This rating
can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating for this BREEAM issue
(see the Additional informationsection for a screenshot example of a product
listing from GreenBook Live).
Where a certified product forms part of a different specification, for the same or
different element type (i.e. different to that described on the Environmental Profile
certificate), the guidance within the 'Methodology' section concerning
Environmental Product Declaration types should be followed. This procedure
outlines how BREEAM gives additional recognition for materials with robust
Environmental Product Declaration types.
Refer to BRE Environmental Profile Methodology under Additional information
section for more information on where to source an Environmental Profile
Certificate.
CN9
Reporting life cycle
GHG emissions
See criterion 3.
Where the data is available, it is a requirement that the life cycle GHG emissions
(kgCO eq.) for each specification are gathered and reported, via the BREEAM
2
scoring and reporting tool. BREEAM assessors can source this information as
follows:
For generic Green Guide ratings the. is reported via the online green guide
www.thegreenguide.org.uk. Simply click on the relevant specification type (having
Ref
General
222
Ref
Terms
Materials
Description
already defined the building, category and element type) and the. are reported
along with the individual category ratings for that element, at the bottom of the
page (see screen shot in the Additional information section). The information is not
available at present for bespoke Green Guide ratings.
For Green Guide ratings based on a product manufacturer’s certified Environmental
Profile, Assessors will find the. in the product’s Environmental Profile Certificate
appendix, in the ‘Characterised data’ section (against the ‘Climate Change’ issue).
CN10
New elements
containing re-used
materials See
criterion 2.
If a new element is specified e.g. external wall, and part of that element includes a
reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a
Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and
confirm the result to the assessor.
CN11
Existing elements reused in the new
construction
Only new elements need to be assessed. Existing in situ elements adjoining a new
construction, e.g. an existing building facade, do not require assessment. If this
BREEAM scheme is being used to assess a major refurbishment project, where the
assessed building is re-using existing in situ elements as part of its structure, those
elements can be allocated an A+ Green Guide rating. If the existing element will
contain substantial new materials the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a
Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and
confirm the result to the assessor.
CN12
Partial assessments
See criterion 1.
Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must
still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly
above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide
rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic
roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building or space can be
omitted from the assessment.
CN13
Specialist floor
finishes in
operational areas
See criterion 1.
Specialist floor finishes (See definition) in operational areas of buildings fall outside
of the scope of the Green Guide.In such instances, only non specialist floor finishes
and those in non-operational areas of the building should be included in the
assessment of this BREEAM issue. See also guidance in Additional information
section, on floor finishes.
CN14
Roof lights, patio
doors and glazed
conservatories See
criterion 1.
For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as
patio doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of
conservatories and roof lights should be assessed as windows.
CN15
Where integral
insulated cold
storage units form a
part of the building
fabric
For insulated cold storage units forming an integral part of the building fabric the
following must be followed
1. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall
element:
As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide
on the basis that it is a normal temperature building without the extra
insulation, so a standard thickness of insulation will be considered. As such, the
walls of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall
element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue.
223
Materials
Ref
Terms
Description
2. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element:
As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included
within the Green Guide. Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be
assessed as a standard construction from the deck upwards, assuming a
standard thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should
be treated as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM
issue.
3. Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element:
The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific Functional Unit
outside the scope of the internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The
wall to the insulated unit should therefore be excluded from the assessment
of the internal wall element.
CN16
Demonstrating
benefit
See Criterion 7.
This should take the form of a short qualitative statement from the design team
providing comments on the following:
1. How and at what stages of the design the tool was utilised.
2. How the tool helped (or did not help) steer the design process to optimise
cost and mitigate environmental impacts, giving examples of specific changes
to the building design/specification that resulted.
CN17
Scope of IMPACT
Compliant (or
equivalent) Tools
and Data
Submission
Requirements
See Criterion 8.
Guidance note GN08 : Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data
Submission Requirements available via the Assessor Extranet outlines in detail the
requirements for submitting the BIM from IMPACT compliant (or equivalent)
software tools. The Guidance Note also contains instructions on how tools other
than IMPACT compliant software tools can demonstrate equivalency for the
purpose of this assessment issue. Assessors should review Guidance Note GN08
and ensure that submissions meet the criteria relevant to demonstrate compliance.
CN18
Building specific
guidance
All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Methodology
Determining the number of BREEAM credits achieved as a result of each element’s Green Guide
rating
The Green Guide uses an A+ to E rating system, whereby the rating relates to the relative life cycle performance of a
specification in comparison with other types of specifications available for a particular building element type e.g. external wall.
Three steps are undertaken to translate the performance of all the separate individual elemental specifications and their
Green Guide ratings into an overall building performance score for life cycle impact, against which BREEAM credits can be
awarded. Each of these steps is undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator and the information collated by the BREEAM
assessor. The steps in this process are as follows:
Step 1: Translating the Green Guide rating into points
The first step in the calculation procedure is translating a specification’s Green Guide rating into a number of points. The table
below illustrates the points available by Green Guide rating.
224
Materials
Green Guide Rating
Mat 01 Points
A+
3.00
A
2.00
B
1.00
C
0.50
D
0.25
E
0.00
The maximum number of points available for an assessed building is a product of the number of elements assessed
multiplied by three. For example, for an office building five elements are assessed so there are a maximum of fifteen points
available; furthermore twelve of those fifteen points must be achieved to award all five BREEAM credits.
Whilst it may appear that three points are available for each element assessed, and in many assessments this may be the case,
the actual maximum number of points available for a particular element will depend on the impact of the element type
compared with the other elements present and assessed (refer to step 3 below). This is because this issue assesses the life
cycle impact of the whole building, taking in to account the relative performance and therefore contribution of the main
building elements towards the building’s overall performance.
Step 2: Weighting the performance of individual specifications within an elemental category
Where an element consists of several different specifications, the overall points achieved for that element are weighted
according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual specifications.
An example of this is provided below for an external wall element consisting of three different types of external wall
specification.
Element type
Specification
Area
(m2)
% of
element
type
Generic
Green
Guide
rating
Points
Area
weighted
points
External Wall
External wall type 1
280
26%
A+
3
0.78
350
33%
C
0.5
0.17
435
41%
B
1
0.41
1065
100%
-
-
1.36
Element Total
This adjustment is made to ensure the contribution of points is balanced in accordance with the life cycle performance of each
specification.
Step 3: Weighting the performance of individual elements relative to all elements assessed
Step three is completed in two parts:
225
Materials
Part 1: Weights the performance of the building elements based on its area relative to the overall area of the different
elements. This is done by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all
elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements.
For example, a 20-storey office block will have a smaller roof area than external wall area, and so the area weighting will take
this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the points score for the roof in comparison to the external walls.
Part 2: The range of impacts, measured using Ecopoints, for each of the elements will differ and therefore so will the
increments between each Green Guide rating level. For example, the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the
internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating, the rating of the external walls achieves a
higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction
possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element.
Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material
The Green Guide online provides users (design teams and clients) with information on the relative life cycle environmental
impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications e.g. external wall, roof, windows etc. Each specification’s
online Green Guide rating is based on verified LCA data for generic construction products assessed according to BRE’s
Environmental Profiles Methodology.
There are many different schemes producing EPD for products or services complying with BS ISO 14025 (there is specific
construction product and service variant of BS ISO 14025; BS ISO 21930) using LCA according to the BS ISO 14040 series.
Where a third party verified EPD is available for a product that forms part of an assessed element, for example a concrete
block used in an external wall, the EPD can potentially be used to uplift the element’s BREEAM performance, i.e. points and
therefore credits achieved. The degree of uplift available in such instances depends on three factors:
1. The assessed element’s existing Green Guide rating
2. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the element that the material with the EPD contributes
3. The manufacturer’s Environmental Product Declaration type for the relevant product/material(s)
Using this information, the points achieved for the existing Green Guide rating of the element is adjusted as follows (using the
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator):
1. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element that the material with the EPD contributes is
determined using the Online Green Guide Calculator 1 The Online Green Guide calculator will list the relative
environmental impact of each constituent material of a defined element as a percentage. Select the percentage for the
relevant material and enter this into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.
If an element cannot be defined using the Online Green Guide Calculator the assessor will need to complete a Bespoke
Green Guide Query Proforma and submit to BRE Global, who will then confirm the relevant proportional impact of the
material(s) in question. This will also be required for a material with a BRE Environmental Profile which is specified as part
of an element that differs from the elemental description on which that profile is based (see also relevant compliance
note above).
2. Define the Environmental Product Declaration type and tier level (seeTable - 38 below) for the material(s) in question.
Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking
EPD tier level
EPD description
1
A third-party, independently verified EPD covering the whole life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-grave).
2
A third-party, independently verified EPD covering partial life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-gate or cradleto-gate with options*).
*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:
226
EPD tier level
Materials
EPD description
1. The product stage only. Such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated
processes; this EPD is said to be “cradle to gate”;
2. The product stage and selected further life cycle stages. Such an EPD is said to be “cradle to gate with options”
In both cases, the above EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements of the ISO 14020 series, particularly
ISO 14025 and ISO 21930 2 (concerning environmental labels and declarations) and ISO 14040 3 and 14044 4 (concerning
life cycle assessment).
3. Once the element’s Green Guide rating and the relevant material(s) proportional impact and EPD type and tier level have
been defined, the points uplift can be calculated (see Table - 39 below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator does this by
multiplying the material’s proportional impact by the maximum points uplift available for the Green Guide rating
achieved for the element. The points uplift is then added to the points already achieved for that element’s generic Green
Guide rating (see worked example below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator then continues its calculation procedure, as
outlined in steps 2 and 3 above, to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.
Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type
Existing Green Guide
Rating
Generic Green Guide
rating Points
EPD Tier 1
Max points uplift
EPD Tier 2
Max. points uplift
A+
3.00
1.00
0.75
A
2.00
1.00
0.75
B
1.00
1.00
0.50
C
0.50
0.50
0.25
D
0.25
0.25
0.125
E
0.00
0.00
0.00
The points uplift for tier 1 has been linked to the points available for achieving generic Green Guide ratings. An element whose
constituent materials have each had their life cycle impacts quantified and independently verified i.e. tier 1 EPD, will achieve a
points uplift to the next level above that achieved for the elements generic Green Guide rating. The tier 2 points uplift is set
relative to tier 1, based on the fact that a tier 2 EPD covers only part of the material/element life cycle i.e. cradle to gate and not
the full life cycle i.e. cradle to grave.
Example: The following is an example of the above calculation for a theoretical external wall specification with a generic Green
Guide B rating (which equates to one point).
External wall specification
Proportion of
element impact
EPD tier
Points uplift
Load bearing concrete cladding
65%
1
0.65 x 1.0 = 0.65
Limestone finish
17%
None
0
Medium density solid block
10%
1
0.1 x 1.0 = 0.1
227
Materials
External wall specification
Proportion of
element impact
EPD tier
Points uplift
Plasterboard and paint
5%
2
0.05 x 0.5 = 0.025
Insulation
3%
None
0
Total points uplift
0.78
Total points achieved for element
1.78
In the above example therefore, having product specific Environmental Product Declarations for 80% (by impact) of the Green
Guide B rated element’s materials results in a points uplift of 0.78 (a 78% uplift on the element’s BREEAM performance in this
instance). This uplift could make a difference in the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the building.
Evidence
Criteria
1-5
1-5
A copy of output from the BREEAM Mat 01
calculator tool,including Green Guide rating
and element number for each specification
assessed 1.
As design stage
Online Green Guide calculator output (where
relevant).
6-8
A copy of the statement demonstrating
benefit of the of using IMPACT compliant
software (or equivalent) AND
BRE Global email confirmation for receipt of
the Model.
As design stage
1. Element numbers are unique but the available specifications may change. As a result assessors should keep a note
of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes.
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator
A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue, based
on each applicable element’s Green Guide rating. See Calculation procedures below for a description of how BREEAM
determines the number of credits achieved for the life cycle impact of the building’s main material elements.
228
Materials
Ecopoint
The Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that measures the total environmental impact of a
product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe. The annual environmental impact caused
by a typical European citizen therefore creates 100 Ecopoints. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the
range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building element.
Environmental Product Declaration
BS EN ISO 14025:2010 5 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the
environmental aspects of a product or service. BS EN ISO 14020:2001 6 goes on to state that environmental labels
and declarations provide information about a product or service in terms of its overall environmental character, a
specific environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BRE’s Environmental Profile Methodology and Green Guide
to Specification is an example of an EPD. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is the tool underpinning EPD and the LCA should
conform to the requirements of the BS ISO 14040 series.
BRE Environmental Profile Methodology
BRE Environmental Profile Methodology and subsequent product certification involves calculating the ‘cradle to grave'
environmental profile of a building material, product or system, and services. This is a measure of all key
environmental impacts, during extraction, processing/manufacture, use (including maintenance and refurbishment)
and disposal, over a 60-year study period. Once certified, environmental profiles are reviewed on an annual basis to
ensure they remain valid, and are recalculated every three years.
Frequently updated lists of building materials, products and systems assessed and certified under the Environmental
Profiles Certification Scheme can be viewed at www.greenbooklive.com. The listing also includes the Green Guide
rating for the approved products.
Where a product specified is claiming certification against the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology, the BREEAM
assessor should ask for a copy of the certificate and its appendix (which contains characterised data, normalised data
and the Ecopoints score) or the certificate number and certifying body from the relevant manufacturer or,
alternatively, they can verify the claim via Green Book Live listings. The BREEAM assessor should include a reference to
the BRE Global Approved certificate number in their assessment report. An example screenshot of a product specific
Environmental Profile listing on GreenBook Live is provided in the Additional Information section of this issue.
Green Guide to Specification
The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use comprehensive reference website and electronic tool, providing
guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on the relative environmental impacts for a range of different
building elemental specifications. The generic elemental ratings within the online Guide are based on LCA data
generated using the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology. The Environmental Profiles Methodology has been
peer reviewed to comply with BS ISO 14040 and represents the Product Category Rules for BRE Global’s
environmental labeling scheme (EPD - ISO 14025, Type III) for construction products and elements.
www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Green Guide element number
A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating for any particular building element type
specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those calculated using the Online Green Guide calculator will
have an element number.
Online Green Guide calculator
BRE Global have developed the online Green Guide Calculator to enable BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and
efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant proportion of specifications not listed in the Green Guide
Online. The Green Guide Calculator database is based on the components currently used to create specifications
within the Green Guide online. These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide
ratings for a multitude of different specifications.
To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for Sustainable Homes
Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is not yet available for public use.
Reused materials
Reused materials are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further
processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing
229
Materials
to other materials).
Specialist floor finishes
For the purpose of BREEAM specialist floor finishes are defined as those which have been designed to meet specific
high performance requirement such as chemical resistance, temperature resistance, impact resistance, thermal shock
protection, electrical resistivity, anti-microbial and easy decontamination.
Other information
Using the online Green Guide to Specification
The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the Green Guide online,
(www.thegreenguide.org.uk), the main page asks the user to select a building type from the following options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Domestic
Commercial (offices)
Health
Retail
Industrial
Education
To obtain the appropriate Green Guide ratings for the assessed building elements, select the category that corresponds to
the assessed building type. See below for guidance on which category to select for building types not listed above.
Please note there are a number of common building elements (see below) and therefore Green Guide ratings. As these
elements are common, any building type can be selected to determine the appropriate rating (regardless of the actual nondomestic building type being assessed).
Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings
Building
type
Green Guide ratings
Further or
Higher
Education
buildings
When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in most cases the Green
Guide ratings listed under the ‘Education’ category can be used. Alternatively, if the elemental specification
of the building/space is more akin to a commercial, retail, industrial or health specification in terms of its
Green Guide functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the relevant the building type.
Prison
buildings
To obtain appropriate ratings for elements that are not common (upper-floors, roofs and floor finishes),
select the ‘healthcare’ category. For prison building types that are more akin to commercial buildings in their
construction e.g. visitors’ centres, catering buildings, sports halls select the commercial category. These
categories include ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for these types
of prison buildings.
Law court
buildings
To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for elements that are not common (internal walls, roof, upper
floor slab and floor finishes) select the ‘schools’ category for court buildings. This category includes ratings
that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for this building type. For floor finishes, it is
permissible to select flooring from another building type other than schools, if the function/use in the
assessed building is more appropriate to that type.
Other
buildings
For many other building types assessed it may be clear which category of building type to select for Green
Guide purposes (for elements that are not common). If it is not clear the BREEAM assessor will need to
contact BRE Global for advice, supplying a description of the building including the relevant function(s). BRE
Global will then confirm to the BREEAM assessor the appropriate category to select.
Common
The following elements, for the purpose of non-domestic buildings, have common Green Guide ratings
230
Building
type
Green Guide ratings
elements
irrespective of the building type:
1. External walls
2. Landscaping
3. Windows - commercial
The user can therefore search for ratings for the above elements under any building category.
Materials
Guidance for the assessment of floor finishes
The Green Guide online, under each building type, has categories of flooring specifications commonly used for the key floor
areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for
public access areas based on the functional unit for that type of space.
However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore,
the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification
and Green Guide rating for the building (if floor finishes are one of the applicable elements). For example, for ‘back of house’
office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings
under the ‘commercial’ category of the Green Guide online. To aid users of the Green Guide online, there is a diagram that will
direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor
Finishes category.
Specialist floor finishes in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. This is due to the specific
high performance requirements of the specifications, such as chemical, temperature and/or impact resistance etc., all of which
limit the options available for specification. For this reason such floor finishes can be omitted from the assessment.
IMPACT (Integrated Material Profile And Costing Tool)
IMPACT is a specification and database for software developers to incorporate into their tools to enable consistent Life Cycle
Assessment (LCA) and Life Cycle Costing (LCC). IMPACT compliant tools work by allowing the user to attribute environmental
and cost information to drawn or scheduled items in the BIM. IMPACT takes quantity information from the BIM and multiplies
this by environmental impact and/or cost ‘rates’ to produce an overall impact and cost for the whole (or a selected part) of
the design. The results generated by IMPACT allow the user to:
analyse the design to optimise cost and environmental impacts.
compare whole-building results to a suitable benchmark to assess performance, which can be linked to building
assessment schemes.
The benefit of BIM enabled whole-building assessment is that the calculations are based on real design data and accurate
quantities, rather than generic specifications for particular building elements. IMPACT compliant tools also allow users to
accurately model the life cycle performance of primary structures and substructures, which are not covered by the Green
Guide to Specification.
IMPACT was developed by an industry consortium led by BRE. The work was funded by the UK’s Technology Strategy Board.
Further information about IMPACT and IMPACT compliant software tools (identified by the IMPACT compliant logo) is
available from www.impactwba.com
Submission of an IMPACT (or equivalent) BIM
BRE Global requires the submission of the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or
equivalent) in order to:
Facilitate the establishment of robust building level life cycle performance benchmarks in BREEAM. This will enable
future BREEAM versions to recognise and reward those designs which achieve above average performance.
Fulfil BREEAM Quality Assurance requirements
Conduct further research using data from real life projects.
231
Materials
Any data supplied to BRE Global will be treated in confidence and the use of BIM data for research purposes will ensure
individual projects are unidentifiable.
Tools equivalent to but not compliant with IMPACT
Tools that are considered by BRE Global to be equivalent to an IMPACT Compliant tool will be eligible for the same Exemplary
credits. Equivalence will be judged by BRE Global based on the following:Suitability of the BIM content for refining benchmarks
Format in which the BIM is transmitted.
Please contact BRE Global at the earliest opportunity to establish equivalence status of a non-IMPACT compliant software
tool.
Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings
The Green Guide Online does not cover the potential health and wellbeing issues associated with flooring materials and
indoor air quality, this impact is covered in BREEAM issue Hea 02 Indoor air quality.
Screenshot of a specification from the BRE Green Guide Online
232
Materials
Screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on GreenBook Live
1At the time of publishing the pre-live version of this Scheme Document (March 2011) this Online Green Guide Calculator
functionality is not present.
2BS EN ISO 21930:2007 Sustainability in building construction. Environmental declaration of building products. BSi, 2007.
3BS EN ISO 14040:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Principles and framework. BSi, 2006
4BS EN ISO 14044:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Requirements and guidelines. BSi, 2006
5BS EN ISO 14025:2010, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations, Principles and
procedures. BSi, 2010.
6BS EN ISO 14020, Environmental labels and declarations - General principles. BSi, 2001.
233
Materials
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard surfaces that have a
low environmental impact, taking account of the full life cycle of materials used.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and 80% of all boundary protection (by area) in the construction
zone achieves an A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification. Green Guide ratings for the specification
(s) of each element can be found at www.thegreenguide.org.uk
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Shell and core applicable
assessment criteria
Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Simple buildings applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
234
Materials
Ref
Terms
Description
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Green Guide Online
When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, ratings
for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The rating will
therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the Green Guide
online.
CN5
Finding exact Green
Guide ratings
Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to
identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment.
Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the
appropriate rating.
CN6
Green Guide rating
via Environmental
Profile Certification
Where applicable, products with Environmental Profiles Certification can be used to
demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a
“product specific” Green Guide rating and this rating can be used in the same way as
a generic Green Guide rating. See Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology for
more information.
CN7
Minor alteration of
existing elements
Where there is hard landscaping or boundary protection which is to remain as
existing, then provided no more than 20% of the total area of the existing hard
landscaping and boundary protection elements are subject to minor alterations,
repair or maintenance, these elements can be awarded an A+ rating for the
purposes of determining compliance with this issue.
CN8
No hard
landscaping or
boundary
protection
If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit must
be assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element e.g. hard
landscaping. Where the development has neither element, the credit can be
awarded.
CN9
Building façade
forming boundary
Any part of an external building elevation (of either the assessed building or any
other neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be
excluded from the assessment of this credit.
CN10
Existing natural
features
Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other
living barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis.
General
CN11
Prison buildings Secure Perimeter
Zones/Areas
The criteria for hard surfaces are applicable only to those areas outside of the
secure perimeter zone, but within the overall curtilage of the site. The criteria for
boundary protection apply to all specifications within the secure perimeter zone
and external zone, including its borders and curtilage, i.e. the whole site. The criteria
DO NOT apply to the secure perimeter fence, wall or any other fencing subject to
security standards.
235
Materials
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
All
The Green Guide rating and element number
for the assessed specifications.
As design stage
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site and its boundary which is being
developed for the BREEAM assessed building and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Green Guide
Green Guide Element Number
Scope of hard landscaping
For the purpose of assessment, hard landscaping includes (but is not limited to) parking areas (including manoeuvring
areas,lanes, roads within the parking area), pedestrian walkways, paths, patios. The definition excludes basement
parking, access or approach roads and designated vehicle manoeuvring areas, balconies, roof terraces, specialist
sports areas (running tracks,netball areas etc.) and retaining walls.
Other information
None.
236
Materials
Please note: BRE Global are currently consulting on a common set of criteria and process for the evaluation of schemes for
Responsible Sourcing of Materials (RSM) in BREEAM. This work will impact on the way in which BREEAM recognises RSM
schemes and their relative ranking. As a result of this work the BREEAM tier table of RSM schemes will be updated and, in
future, regularly revisited as RSM schemes are developed and evolve. It will be hosted on the BREEAM website in future to
enable this updating rather than being included in the scheme manual itself. Further information on the proposals and the
consultation process can be found at http://www.breeam.org/page.jsp?id=617. This work will be completed in May 2014
prior to the launch of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 for new project registrations.
Minimum standards
4
Yes (Criterion 1 only)
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of responsibly sourced materials for key building elements.
Assessment criteria
Pre-requisite
1. All timber used on the project is 'Legally harvested and traded timber'.
Note:
a. It is a minimum requirement for achieving a certified BREEAM rating certification (for any rating level)
that compliance with criterion 1 is confirmed.
b. For other materials there areno pre-requisite requirements at this stage.
One credit - Sustainable Procurement Plan
2. The principal contractor sources materials for the project in accordance with a sustainable procurement plan (see the
Relevant definitions in the Additional information section).
Up to 3 credits - Responsible sourcing of materials (RSM)
3. The available credits (refer to Table - 41 ) can be awarded where the applicable building and hard landscaping materials
(refer to Table - 42) are responsibly sourced in accordance with the BREEAM methodology, as defined in steps 1-4 in the
Methodology section (below).
Table - 41: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows
RSM credits
% of available RSM points achieved
3
TBC
2
TBC
1
TBC
237
Materials
4. Where (TBC)% of the available RSM points are achieved.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
No country specific guidance is applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
CN4
A government
licence
See criterion 1.
A government licence e.g. a UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, can
be used to provide evidence of legally sourced timber but does not meet the
definition of a third party timber certification scheme and so does not comply with
the responsible sourcing requirements of this issue.
CN5
Sustainable
procurement plan
See criterion 2.
For design stage assessments where the principle contractor has not yet been
appointed, a specification or a letter of intent from the party responsible for
appointing the principal contractor must be provided confirming a requirement for
the principal contractor to have in place a sustainable procurement plan. Refer
toThe BREEAM evidential requirements section for more guidance on providing
letters of commitment.
CN6
Responsible
sourcing
certification
schemes and their
A table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised under BREEAM,
their scope and associated tier levels can be found at www.TBC.com (TBC).
This table is reviewed on a regular basis and BREEAM Assessors must ensure they
use the current table.
General
238
Ref
Terms
Materials
Description
tier levels
See criterion 3.
CN7
Checking
responsible
sourcing claims See
criterion 3.
Confirmation of manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from the
relevant responsible sourcing scheme provider. Many of the organisations who
administer certification schemes will, via their website, list companies and products
that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any such
certification. Some schemes, including BES 6001 via www.greenbooklive.com, will
provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turn be used
as evidence of compliance for this BREEAM issue.
CN8
Specified reused
materials
See criterion 3.
Reused materials specified for the development are considered equivalent to
materials covered by certification schemes that fall within tier (TBC) of the
Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria.
CN9
Route 1
Percentage of
specification for the
applicable material
to be responsibly
sourced. See Step 2
in theMethodology
section.
Step 2 under Route 1 requires all specifications for an applicable material type to
have a valid certificate from the recognised scheme, for that material type to be
eligible to contribute toward achieving BREEAM credits. Recognising that in some
instances there may be a specification that does not have a responsible sourcing
certificate, provided at least 95% of the applicable material consists of
specifications covered by a recognised responsible sourcing scheme then the
applicable material type can still be considered eligible for contributing toward
achieving the credits. In such instances detailed calculations demonstrating the 95%
level are not required, provided the assessor is satisfied that the project information
shows that this level is exceeded. If there is reasonable doubt the assessor should
consider asking the project team for further information to verify and reference this
accordingly in their assessment report.
Methodology
There are two routes to demonstrating compliance with this issue. Either route may be followed for any situation:
Route 1 is intended for use in the majority of situations.
Route 2 is intended for situations where a more detailed analysis is possible sufficient detail is available on materials
and supply chains.
Route 1 : Lowest tier level ranking
The following steps outline the methodology to be followed for this route to determine the number of credits achieved for
responsible sourcing. Each of these steps outlined are undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 03 calculator and the relevant
project information collated by the assessor.
Step 1
Identify from Table - 42Table - 42 the materials specified or present in and usedfor the construction of the building being
assessed. Where composite products (such as windows, doors, etc.) are present these must be broken down into constituent
materials. Only materials that make up significant majority (at least 80%) of the product must be considered.
Note : The list below is included for indicative purposes at present. The categorisation of materials is currently under review
and this list will be amended before the scheme is finalised
239
Materials
Table - 42: Applicable materials (building and associated hard-landscaping)
Bulk Materials - TBC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Structural timber
In situ concrete
Precast concrete
Structural metals.
Cladding metals
Engineering bricks
Facing Bricks
Other ceramics (including clay tiles)
Fabric insulation
Building services insulation
Other materials - TBC
1. Non-structural timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood,Oriented strand board (OSB),
Medium Density Fibreboard(MDF), chipboard and cement bonded particleboard)
2. Stone and gravel, including dressed and building stone
3. Gypsum
4. Cementitious materials: mortars, plasterboard, plaster, cementitious renders
5. Glass
6. Bituminous materials, including roofing membranes and asphalt
7. Plastics and polymers, including rubbers,Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM),Thermoplastic PolyOlefin (TPO),
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and VET roofing and other membranes and polymeric renders
8. Pavers (concrete, clay)
Step 2
For each material type identified as applicable in step 1, determine for each specification whether or not it is covered by a
BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate.
Ensure at least [number TBC ] materials from the bulk materials (relevant to the building) list have been responsibly sourced.
Visit webpage www.TBC.com (TBC) for the most up-to-date list of BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification
Schemes (see Additional information section), their scope and corresponding tier level.
To be eligible to contribute towards achieving BREEAM credits for responsible sourcing of materials, 'all specifications' (see
CN9 ) for the applicable material type must have a valid certificate from the recognised scheme.
Step 3
Using, determine the appropriate number of Responsible Sourcing BREEAM points for each applicable material type identified
in step 1 and deemed compliant in step 2.
Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM ‘responsible sourcing of
materials’ points.
240
Tier level
Points for bulk materials
Points for other materials
TBC
TBC
TBC
Materials
Note:
1. The tier rank is determined based on the rigour of responsible sourcing demonstrated by the supplier
(s ) or manufacturer(s) of that material or element (through responsible sourcing certification schemes)
See CN6 for information on BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes and their
tier levels.
2. Where responsibly sourced materials within a single materials category fall into a mix of tier levels the
lower tier level must be considered for allocation of points.
Step 4
Determine the percentage of points achieved as a proportion of the points available. This percentage is then compared with
the credit allocation Table - 41 (see the assessment criteria section above) and the relevant number of credits awarded.
The points available are the sum of the number of applicable materials (determined in step 1) multiplied by the highest
number of points available for a Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme in the top tier level.
Route 2: Proportion of materials responsibly sourced
This route allows for a more detail analysis of the responsibly sourced materials in a building where a wide range of
specifications are used within the material categories in Table 2 above. It follows a similar methodology to that set out for
Route 1 above but allows for a detailed calculation of the impact of varying specifications and supply chains based on the
relative quantities of materials present. The alculation procedure is set out in the guidance note GNXX (TBC) available on the
BREEAM Assessor Extranet. Please review this document for detailed description of the methodology including the allocation
of points and credits.
Evidence
Criteria
All
See ‘The BREEAM evidential requirements’ section for a list of general evidence types that can be
used to demonstrate compliance with the relevant criteria for this issue.
All
A copy of the completed BREEAM Mat 03 calculator for the project.
BREEAM Mat 03 Calculator
A calculator tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for BREEAM
issue Mat 03.
BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes
These are third party schemes evaluated and approved by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Please visit
www.TBC.com for information on the evaluation criteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of
schemes, including application and appeals.
Chain of custody (CoC)
This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for products from
forests to consumers. Timber must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from
241
Materials
the transportation of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate
inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain of custody
certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion
with non-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forest
certification systems. See also definition of CITES below.
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES)
The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES) works by subjecting
international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction
from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorised through a licensing system. Each Party to the
Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system
and one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species
covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection they need.
1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in
exceptional circumstances.
2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction but in which trade must be controlled in
order to avoid utilisation incompatible with their survival.
3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties for
assistance in controlling the trade.
Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list
illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on
Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the
country/countries seeking to protect this species.
Composite material
Composite material can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with
significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level
within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render and
timber composites such as chipboardor particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber,
glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing.
Legally harvested and traded timber
BREEAM follows the UK government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the Central Point of Expertise
on Timber (CPET) 5th Edition report on the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy, which states that legal timber
and wood derived products are those that originate from a forest where the following criteria are met:
1. The forest owner/manager holds legal use rights to the forest.
2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local and national
legal criteria including those relevant to:
a. Forest management
b. Environment
c. Labour and welfare
d. Health and safety
e. Other parties’ tenure and use rights
f. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid.
3. There is full compliance with the criteria of CITES.
Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on request subject to the
availability of such materials in the country concerned. The policy requires all timber and wood-derived products to be
from only:
1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources OR
2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) - licensed timber or equivalent sources.
Further information on the UK Government's Timber Procurement Policy and compliant responsible sourcing
certification schemes is available from the CPET (Central Point of Expertise on Timber) website www.cpet.org.uk/.
242
Materials
Pre-consumer waste stream
Waste material generated during manufacturing processes; this excludes reuse of materials such as rework, regrind
or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Post-consumer waste stream
Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as endusers of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the
distribution chain.
Responsible sourcing
The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and
traceability of construction materials and components.
In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes.
Visit webpage www.link.com (TBC) for a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global
Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Reused materials
Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor
processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials).
Recycled material
Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing
before they can be used again. For further information please see Calculating and declaring recycled content in
construction products, 'Rules of Thumb' Guide (WRAP, 2008) www.wrap.org.uk
Sustainable Procurement Plan
A plan that sets out a framework for responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout a project.
The plan may be prepared and adopted at an organisational level or be site/project specific and for the purposes of
BREEAM compliance, will cover the following as a minimum:
1. Risks and opportunities are identified against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues. BS
8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for construction products- Specification can be
used as a guide to identify these issues.
2. Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities.
3. Strategic assessment of sustainably sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a policy to
procure materials locally where possible.
4. Procedures are in place to check and verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented/adhered
to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology and performance
indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success.
Tier levels
A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming
the basis for awarding points and credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 03. Visit webpage www.TBC.com (TBC) for a table
of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM
assessment.
Other information
BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products
This is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certification of the responsible sourcing of
construction products. The Standard has been structured so that compliance can be demonstrated through a combination
of meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes, establishing written policies, setting objectives and
targets and engaging with relevant stakeholders.
To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates
compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings
range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent.
243
Materials
The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products,
not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In
turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater
assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit:
www.greenbooklive.com
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC)
validity
A CPET document may be helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. See
www.cpet.org.uk.
244
Mat 04 Insulation
Materials
Mat 04 Insulation
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its
thermal properties
Assessment criteria
One credit- Embodied impact
1. Any new insulation specified for use within the following building elements must be assessed:
a. External walls
b. Ground floor
c. Roof
d. Building services
2. The Insulation index for the building fabric and services insulation is the same as or greater than 2.5. See Mat 04
Insulation section for a description of calculating the Insulation index.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
assessment criteria
Embodied Impact - Criteria 1-2
Both options: All new insulating products being specified or installed by the
developer must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
245
Materials
Ref
Terms
Description
CN2
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Insulation
incorporated as
part of an off-site
manufactured
element
If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been
manufactured offsite (in order to maximise material optimisation) e.g. a wall or
roof, and that element has been assessed as part of Mat 01, then for the purpose
of assessing the insulation for this BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should
be used. The same rule applies to insulation that has a significant additional
function, such as providing supporting structure e.g. structural insulated panels
(SIPS). In the Green Guide the actual insulation will be listed within the element title,
rather than under the generic insulation category.
General
CN4
CN5
Building specific
guidance
No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
Methodology
Insulation index calculation
The Insulation Index is calculated using the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator which uses the following calculation methodology:
For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided
by each type of insulation is calculated as follows:
1. (Area of insulation (m2) x thickness(m))/Thermal Conductivity (W/m.K) OR
2. Total volume of insulation used (m3)/Thermal conductivity (W/m.K)
The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the relevant Green Guide point(s)
from the following table to give the Green Guide Rating corrected value:
Table - 44: Green Guide rating points/element
Green Guide rating
Points/element
A+
3
A
2
246
Mat 04 Insulation
Materials
Green Guide rating
Points/element
B
1
C
0.5
D
0.25
E
0
To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of the Green Guide rating corrected values for all insulating elements is divided by the
sum of the volume weighted thermal resistance values (See example calculation below).
Note
a. Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the rating, area and conductivity
for each insulation type should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator and an average is
calculated (by volume).
b. Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate
rating.
c. Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of
or the whole life cycle, is available for an insulating material/product, this can be used to increase the
contribution of that material/product to the building’s Mat 04 performance See below for more detail.
Example calculation as carried out by the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator
The Insulation Index is calculated for a building using the following types of insulation:
Type 1 Walls
Area = 450m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.023 W/mK Green Guide rating = A (2 points)
Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((450x0.100)/0.023) = 1956
Green Guide rating correction: 1956 x 2.0 = 3912
Type 2 Building Services
Volume of insulation used = 21m3. Thermal conductivity = 0.022 W/mK
Green Guide rating = C (0.5 points)
Volume weighted thermal resistance: (21/0.022) = 955
Type 3 Roof
Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = A+ (3
points)
Type 4 Ground Floor
Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = B (1 point)
247
Materials
Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 1956+955+933+933 = 4777
Green Guide rating correction = 3912 + 477 + 2799 +933 = 8121
Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction/Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 8121/4777 = 1.7 (credit not
achieved)
Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material
Please refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology
Note: Step 1 of the Methodology outlined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 (the proportion of the total environmental impact
of the assessed element) is not applicable for this issue as the insulation is assessed as a single material in BREEAM issue
Mat 04 and not as part of a larger building element containing other materials (as in BREEAM issue Mat 01).
Evidence
Criteria
All
1-2
Copy of the output from the BREEAM Mat 04
calculator tool.
As design stage
Environmental Product Declaration
Green Guide
Green Guide element number
Insulation index
A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal properties of insulation products used in
the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating material.
BREEAM Mat 04 calculator
A spreadsheet based tool used by the BREEAM assessor to determine the Insulation Index and therefore, whether the
BREEAM credit is achieved.
Materials optimisation
Material optimisation means adopting a resource efficient approach to design which results in less material being
used in the design (i.e. lean design), and/or less waste is produced in the construction process, without compromising
the design concept. Whilst this assessment issue is focused on the embodied impact of the insulation material
specified, the design team should consider solutions that optimise the use of the material and therefore minimise
construction waste.See Mat 06 Material efficiency for more information.
248
Mat 04 Insulation
Materials
Other information
None
249
Materials
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed elements of the building and landscape, therefore minimising
the frequency of replacement and maximising materials optimisation.
Assessment criteria
One credit
Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage.
1. The building incorporates suitable durability and protection measures or designed features/solutions to prevent
damage to vulnerable parts of the internal and external building and landscaping elements. This must include, but is not
necessarily limited to:
a. Protection from the effects of high pedestrian traffic in main entrances, public areas and thoroughfares (corridors,
lifts, stairs, doors etc).
b. Protection against any internal vehicular/trolley movement within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage,
delivery, corridor and kitchen areas.
c. Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular collision where vehicular parking and manoeuvring
occurs within 1m of the external building façade for all car parking areas and within 2m for all delivery areas.
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation
2. The relevant building elements incorporate appropriate design and specification measures to limit material
degradation due to environmental factors.
See Table - 45 under 'Checklists and tables' for list of applicable elements, environmental factors and material degradation
effects to consider.
Table - 45: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to consider.
Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects
Applicable building elements
1. Foundation/substructure/lowest floor/retaining walls
2. External walls
3. Roof/balconies
250
Materials
Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Glazing: windows,skylight
External doors
Railings/Balusters (where exposed to external environment)
Cladding (where exposed to external environment)
Staircase/ramps (where exposed to external environment)
Hard landscaping
Environmental factors
1. Environmental agents, including:
a. Solar radiation
b. Temperature variation
c. Water/Moisture
d. Wind
e. Precipitation e.g rain and snow
f. Extreme weather conditions: High wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow
2. Biological Agents, including:
a. Vegetation
b. Pests, insects
c. Pollutants, including:
d. Air contaminants
e. Ground contaminants
Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Corrosion
Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage
Fading/discolouration
Rotting
Leaching
Blistering
Melting
Salt crystallisation
Abrasion
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
assessment criteria
Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage - Criterion 1
Where vulnerable elements identified form part of the shell and core developer’s
remit.
apply and must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue.
Where vulnerable elements identified are internal and do not form a part of the
shell and core developer's remit, i.e. they are in speculative areas and compliance is
251
Materials
Ref
Terms
Description
subject to the tenants/future occupiers fit-out specification:
Both options: These areas can be excluded from assessment.
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation - Criterion 2
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Suitable durability
measures See
criterion 1
Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building can
include:
1. Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas
2. Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high
3. Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-2 1 and, for
healthcare buildings, see CN8.2
4. Protection rails to walls of corridors
5. Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc) on doors
6. Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation
areas (i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc)
7. Designing out the risk without the need for additional materials specification
to protect vulnerable areas.
CN5
Vehicle impact
protection See
criterion 1c
Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an
adequate distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any
vehicle with a measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in particular
for any goods delivery areas.
In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall
construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must be
provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from vehicle
movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails.
CN6
Preventing excessive
material use
The specification or design measures chosen should reflect the need to balance the
additional specification of materials with the need to protect building elements to
minimise their replacement, insuring against excessive material use and promoting
materials optimisation.
CN7
Public/Common
Areas
Consideration should be given to materials specification in public/common areas
(especially public waiting areas and toilet areas) to provide protection against
General
252
Ref
Terms
Materials
Description
potential malicious or physical abuse in as far as it is possible.
CN8
Healthcare :
Suitable durability
measures for
corridor walls
The following lists the Standards or/ Building Regulations etc. relevant for the
provision of durability measures for corridor walls
England
Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, Department of Health, 2013
Norhtern Ireland
same as England.
Wales
Welsh Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, NHS Wales, 2014 3
Scotland
Scottish Health Technical Memorandum 58: Partitions, NHS National Services
Scotland, 2006 4
.
Methodology
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation
The following outlines the process to assess criterion 2.
1. Identify from the list of ‘applicable building elements’ under Table - 45 the elements that are appropriate to the building
being assessed.
2. Establish from the ‘environmental factors’ list those factors that are likely to cause material degradation effects in the
identified applicable building elements.
3. Confirm the design and specification measures in place to limit these degradation effects.
4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the measures proposed are appropriate
in terms of demonstrating compliance and meeting the aim of the criterion/issue.
Evidence
Criteria
All
Materials efficiency
Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 04 Insulation
253
Materials
Other information
None
1BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and robustness
including methods of test, BSI1992.
2Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, Department of Health, 2013
3Welsh Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, NHS Wales, 2014
4Scottish Health Technical Memorandum 58: Partitions, NHS National Services Scotland, 2006
254
Materials
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures to optimise material efficiency in order to minimise environmental impact of material
use and waste.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to show compliance for:
One credit
1. Opportunities and measures to optimise the use of materials in building design, procurement, construction,
maintenance and end of life have been identified,investigated and implemented by the design/construction team as
appropriate in consultation with the relevant parties (see CN4) at each of the following RIBA stages:
a. Preparation and Brief
b. Concept Design
c. Development Design
d. Technical Design
e. Construction
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
255
Materials
Ref
Terms
Description
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Relevant parties
All parties involved in the design, specification and/or construction of the building
should be consulted. This includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Client/developer
2. Cost consultant
3. Architect
4. Engineers - Structural,civil
5. Building services engineer - mechanical, electrical
6. Principal contractor
7. Demolition/strip out contractor
8. Environmental consultant
9. Project management consultant
10. Materials/component manufacturers/suppliers
General
CN4
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
Material efficiency
The process of undertaking a building project to enable the most efficient use of materials over the lifecycle of the
building and its component. This includes using fewer materials, reusing existing demolition/strip-out materials and,
where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of recycled content 1 It may also include the adoption of
alternative means of design/construction that result in lower materials usage and lower wastage levels including offsite manufacture and use of pre-assembled service pods.
256
Materials
Other information
Specifying materials for resource efficiency
The construction industry accounts for approximately 55% of the total annual materials consumption and 50% of total CO2e.
It is also responsible for 30% of total UK water use and 35% of arising waste.
The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% is used to make five stock materials- steel (25%),
cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and aluminium (3%).
Tools for achieving material efficiency
The following provide frameworks for the consideration and review of resource efficiency in design and construction:
BS 8895
Designing for material efficiency in buildings projects - Part 1 : Code of practice for Strategic Definition and Preparation and
Brief standard outlines specific material efficiency process, key tasks, team members and their responsibilities and outputs
specific to each RIBA Work Stage along with supporting guidance and tools. This serves as a useful tool to assist the design
team in developing and implementing material efficiency strategies for their developments.
WRAP
Designing out Waste: A design team guide for buildings. This standard outlines five principles of designing out waste and can
be applied during design development, and serve as prompts for investigating opportunities for material efficiency in design.
1BS 8895: Designing for material efficiency in building projects- Part1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and
Preparation and Brief. BSI, 2013.
257
Waste
Waste
258
Waste
Minimum standards
4
Yes
Aim
To promote resource efficiency via the effective management and reduction of construction waste.
Assessment criteria
Construction resource efficiency (3 credits)
Diversion of resources from landfill (1 credit).
Up to three credits - Construction resource efficiency
1. Where a Construction Resource Management Plan (CRMP) has been developed covering the non-hazardous waste
related to onsite construction and offsite manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste)
generated by the building’s design and construction (see CN4).
2. Where construction waste related to on-site construction and off-site manufacture/fabrication (excluding demolition
and excavation waste) meets or is lower than the following Table - 46:
Table - 46: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks
BREEAM credits
Amount of waste generated per 100m2 (gross internal floor area)
m3
tonnes
≤ 13.3
≤ 11.1
Two credits
≤ 7.5
≤ 6.5
Three credits
≤ 3.4
≤ 3.2
Exemplary level
≤ 1.6
≤ 1.9
One credit
Note - Volume (m3) is actual volume of waste (not bulk volume).
3. Where existing buildings on the site will be demolished a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or
hard surfaces is completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible and, if not, to
maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high-grade/value applications. The audit must be
referenced in the CRMP and cover:
a. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials.
b. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition
materials in accordance with the waste hierarchy.
259
Waste
One credit - Diversion of resources from landfill
4. The following percentages of non-hazardous construction (on-site and off-site manufacture/fabrication), demolition
and excavation waste (where applicable) generated by the project have been diverted from landfill:
Table - 47: Diversion from landfill benchmarks
BREEAM credits
Type of waste
One credit
Exemplary level
Volume
Tonnage
Non demolition
70%
80%
Demolition
80%
90%
Excavation
N/A
N/A
Non demolition
85%
90%
Demolition
85%
95%
Excavation
95%
95%
5. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups see Table - 48 (according to the waste streams
generated by the scope of the works) either onsite or offsite through a licensed contractor for recovery.
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
6. Non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s design and on-site construction and off-site
manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste) is no greater than the exemplary level resource
efficiency benchmark (outlined in Table - 46).
7. The percentage of non-hazardous construction (onsite and offsite manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation
waste (if relevant) diverted from landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmark (outlined in Table 47).
8. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the CRMP.
One credit - Construction resource efficiency - simple buildings
9. Where projects have a Construction Resource Management Plan (CRMP) with the aim of minimising and monitoring
waste.
Two credits - CRMP measurements and reporting - simple buildings
10. Where criterion 9 above has been met.
11. The developed and implemented waste management procedures recorded in the CRMP ensure that the following are
measured and reported on :
a. Construction waste generated by the project in m3 or tonnes per 100 m2 gross internal floor area (excluding
demolition and excavation waste).
b. The proportion of this construction waste diverted from landfill, i.e. reused/recycled/recovered.
This data must be reported at the final post-construction stage of the BREEAM assessment, via the BREEAM assessment
and reporting process (in addition to any other internal or external reporting of the data that may occur). Note: where
existing buildings on the site will be demolished, a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard
surfaces must be completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible. If the audit finds
that this is not feasible, then its purpose is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent highgrade/value applications. The audit must be referenced and cover:
c. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials.
d. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition
materials.
260
Waste
Exemplary level criteria - simple buildings
12. The first three construction resource efficiency credits have been achieved.
13. Non-hazardous construction waste measurement/monitoring records details of the source of the waste arisings, by
associating the waste with project work packages (see Methodology).
14. Where the project meets or improves on the BREEAM exemplary level benchmark (Table - 47) for the diversion from
landfill of non-hazardous construction and demolition waste (where generated).
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Construction resource efficiency (3 credits available)
One credit
1. Criterion 9.
Two credits
2. Criteria 10 and 11.
Diversion from landfill (1 credit available)
3. Criteria 4 and 5.
Exemplary level credit
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Construction
Resource
Management Plan
records
The project waste arisings should be recorded and include construction, demolition
and excavation waste. Note that the performance benchmarks for the award of
credits do not include demolition and excavation waste.
General
CN4
261
Waste
Ref
Terms
Description
CN5
Limited site space
for segregation and
storage See criterion
5.
Where space onsite is too limited to allow materials to be segregated, a waste
contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials offsite.
Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where this is the
case, evidence must be produced which demonstrates that segregation of
materials is carried out to the agreed levels and that materials are reused/recycled
as appropriate. Such evidence could be Environment Agency / Scottish Environment
Protection Agency / Environment Agency Wales / Northern Ireland Environment
Agency Waste Return Forms.
CN6
Waste from
temporary support
structures
Any waste generated onsite for the purposes of the development (excluding
demolition and excavation waste) must be taken account of in the assessment of
this issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials/system brought
onsite to facilitate construction of a building, enter the waste stream (albeit for
recycling), then they will need to be classified as construction waste and therefore
contribute to the construction waste benchmark necessary to facilitate assessment
with this issue.
If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on
other sites, then it hasn’t been discarded and therefore doesn’t enter the waste
stream. Thus wouldn’t be included in the waste generated and hence the
benchmark figures for this issue. The same would apply to timber formwork where
re-used.
CN7
Waste from offsite
manufacturing
Where a system manufactured offsite is being used on the project, the
manufacturer will need to supply the amount of waste generated during the
assembly of that system within the factory environment. The total amount of waste
generated needs to be reported per 10 m2 of the assembled system. This must
then be added to the waste generated onsite to determine the overall project
construction waste generated.
Methodology
Work packages
For the simple building exemplary criteria, the waste arisings need to be associated with the source of waste by project work
packages. These work packages could include
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Asbestos removal
External and site works Fixtures and fittings
Groundworks and excavation
Refurbishment
Remediation
Re-roofing
Services
Soft strip
Substructure
Superstructure
262
Waste
Evidence
Criteria
All
All
A copy of the Construction Resource
Management plan and, where relevant, predemolition audit.
Best practice waste management plan
Best practice is a combination of commitments to:
1. Design out waste (materials optimisation)
2. Reduce waste generated onsite
3. Develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse/recycle construction and demolition waste on and offsite
(as applicable)
4. Follow guidance from:
DEFRA (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs)
BRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd)
WRAP (Waste and Resources Action Programme)
Welsh Government.
Construction Resource Management Plan (CRMP)
The aim of the CRMP is to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency
includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use,
reuse and recycling of materials and products on and off the site.
A compliant CRMP is one that defines:
1. A target benchmark for resource efficiency, i.e. m3 of waste per 100m2 or tonnes of waste per 100m2
2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the target benchmark
3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste
4. A waste minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken
5. Procedures for estimating, monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste. If
waste data is obtained from licensed external waste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable, e.g.
by using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA Waste Return Forms
6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups (see additional
guidance section), either on site or through a licensed external contractor
7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan
8. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
Diversion from landfill
Actions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include:
Reusing the material onsite (in situ or for new applications)
Reusing the material on other sites
Community reuse and recycling
Salvaging or reclaiming the material for reuse
263
Waste
Returning material to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme
Recovery of the material from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled or sent for
energy recovery.
Offsite construction systems
These systems are defined as the pre-assembly of components, elements or modules before installation into their
final location. These can include volumetric and panellised systems, and sub-assemblies and components such as
floors, ceilings, bathroom and kitchen pods.
Site Waste Management Plans
Some locations may have a legal requirement, due to government requirements, to produce a Site Waste
Management Plan (SWMP) containing prescribed details. This should be complied with as necessary. To achieve any of
the construction waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of value or locality, must have a
BREEAM compliant Construction Resource Management Plan that includes best practice (see best practice waste
management plan).
Waste hierarchy
The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in
descending order of environmental preference in The Waste (England and Wales) Regulation 2011 1 as:
Prevention
Re-use
Recycle
Recover
Dispose.
Waste Minimisation
This term encompasses two elements of the waste hierarchy:
Waste reduction/prevention = using less material in design, manufacture and installation, keeping products for
longer, using no hazardous materials
Reuse = using products again for the same purpose for which they were conceived, which may require checking,
cleaning or repairing (preparing for reuse).
Types of waste minimisation actions include:
1. Set and report against waste reduction targets
2. Design for standardisation of components
3. Avoid waste from excavation/groundworks and consider opportunities for zero cut and fill
4. Return packaging for reuse
5. Consider community reuse of surplus/off-cuts
6. Include waste minimisation initiatives and targets in tenders/contracts and engage with the supply chain
7. Consider use of BIM (Building Information Modelling)
8. Design for offsite/modular build
9. Design for flexibility, adaptability and future deconstruction
10. Design to use fewer materials
11. Use of reusable temporary elements such as shuttering and protection.
This list is not exhaustive and other waste minimisation actions can be taken.
Construction waste groups
Table - 48: Construction waste groups
European Waste
Catalogue
Key Group
Examples
170102
Bricks
Bricks
170101
Concrete
Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ
264
Waste
European Waste
Catalogue
Key Group
Examples
170604
Insulation
Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic
1501
Packaging
Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands,
polythene sheets
170201
Timber
Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood, chipboard,
medium density fibreboard (MDF)
1602
Electrical and electronic
equipment
Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps
equipment
200301
Canteen/office
Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation
1301
Oils
Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil
1703
Asphalt and tar
Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt
170103
Tiles and ceramics
Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware
1701
Inert
Mixed rubble/excavation material, glass
1704
Metals
Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet
170802
Gypsum
Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets
170101
Binders
Render, cement, mortar
170203
Plastics
Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet
200307
Furniture
Tables, chairs, desks, sofas
1705
Soils
Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone
Most relevant
EWC
Liquids
Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments
Most relevant
EWC
Hazardous
Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste
Catalogue (EWC)
Most relevant
EWC
Floor coverings (soft)
Carpets, vinyl flooring
Most relevant
EWC
Architectural Features
Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces
170904 (Mixed)
Mixed/other
Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories
wherever possible
265
Waste
Other information
BREEAM construction resource efficiency benchmarks
The resource efficiency benchmarks used in BREEAM have been derived using data collected from hundreds of real life
projects using BRE's SMARTWaste system, from July 2008 to March 2013. The BREEAM credits are aligned to the benchmarks
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
One credit: Performance in the top 50% of projects (better than standard practice)
Two credits: Performance in the top 25% of projects (good practice)
Three credits: Performance in the top 10% of projects (best practice)
Exemplary level: Performance in the top 5% of projects (exemplary practice).
For more information please go to www.smartwaste.co.uk
Why does BREEAM exclude demolition and excavation waste from the resource efficiency benchmarks?
BREEAM does not include demolition and excavation (D&E) waste in its resource efficiency benchmark, despite it often being
the largest tonnage of waste onsite, because the amount of D&E waste produced is site-dependant. Furthermore, it is not
necessarily possible to reduce the amount of demolition waste (unless a decision is taken not to demolish in the first place).
Including D&E waste in an overall construction resource efficiency benchmark would:
1. Not encourage sites with unavoidably large amounts of D&E waste to focus on reducing waste arising from
construction materials (which would have further knock-on environmental impacts); and
2. Mean that sites with little or no D&E waste would find compliance with the benchmark more straight forward, which
would weaken the drivers for reducing construction waste resulting from the specification and use of new building
materials.
BREEAM aims to ensure that, where D&E waste is generated, it is diverted from landfill and where possible reused for high
grade use onsite to reduce the volume of new materials produced/required in the supply chain (which themselves may go on
to generate additional waste). One credit and an exemplary level credit are available where it can be demonstrated that D&E
waste has been diverted from landfill.
Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a CRMP
SMARTWaste® Construction is a web-based membership tool allowing users to comprehensively measure and monitor
construction site impacts, including construction waste.
The tool can be used for:
1. Preparing, implementing and reviewing Site Waste Management Plans (SWMPs)
2. Online measuring and reporting on:
a. Waste (aligned to defined waste groups)
b. Site energy, fuel and water use; and
c. Procurement of certified/sustainable timber.
3. Industry waste benchmarks
4. Links to BREMAP, a geographical information system of waste management facilities. See www.bremap.co.uk
SMARTWaste® Construction is frequently updated and offers a greater level of flexibility, reporting and support. Templates
are available to meet the latest BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded.
SMARTWaste Plan is a free version of the tool that can be used to manage all aspects of creating SWMPs and measuring
waste generated on projects. The free tool is occasionally updated, only providing support up to BREEAM 2008, and does not
support the measuring and reporting on energy/fuel/water use or timber procurement.
Other tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a CRMP are available from the Waste and Resources Action
Programme (WRAP) www.wrap.org.uk.
266
Waste
WRAP and UKCG waste reporting guidelines
WRAP have guidelines for measuring and reporting construction, demolition and excavation waste which have been
developed with the United Kingdom Contractors Group (UKCG). This differs from SMARTWaste in a number of ways.
For the WRAP/UKCG method, only materials taken offsite as waste are to be recorded as waste. It is optional to record data
for materials that are reused onsite but these should not be reported.
The WRAP/UKCG method also has default diversion from landfill rates for waste sent offsite to waste destinations. For
example, it is assumed that 50% of inert soil and stones (EWC 17 05 04) and brick, concrete, tiles and ceramics (EWC 17 01 01,
EWC 17 01 02, EWC 17 01 03, and EWC 17 01 07) sent to landfill will go to beneficial reuse (e.g. landfill engineering and
restoration). SMARTWaste and BREEAM do not make this assumption.
1The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, Environmental Protection, England and Wales, Statutory Instrument No.
988.
267
Waste
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, thereby reducing the demand for virgin material
and optimising material efficiency in construction.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Recycled aggregates
1. The percentage of high-grade aggregate that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate, specified in each application
(present) must meet the following minimum % levels (by weight or volume) to contribute to the total amount of recycled
and/or secondary aggregate, as specified in the table below.
Table - 49: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high-grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is
recycled and/or secondary aggregate
Min. %
One credit
Application
Min. %
Exemplary
performance
Bound
Structural frame
15%
30%
Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for
paved areas and roads
30%
75%
Building foundations
20%
35%
Concrete road surfaces
15%
45%
Pipe bedding
100%
N/A
Granular fill and capping (see Relevant definitions section)
100%
N/A
Unbound
268
Waste
2. The total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate specified, and meeting criterion 1, is greater than 25% (by
weight or volume) of the total high-grade aggregate specified for the development. Where the minimum level in
criterion 1 is not met for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate
when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified.
3. The recycled and/or secondary aggregates are EITHER:
a. Construction, demolition and excavation waste obtained onsite or offsite OR
b. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer industrial by-product source (see
Relevant definitions section).
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue.
4. The percentage of high-grade aggregate, that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate, specified in each application
(present) must meet the exemplary minimum levels (by weight or volume), as defined in the table above. Where this
minimum level is not met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when
calculating the total high grade aggregate specified.
5. Where the total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate specified is greater than 35% (by weight or volume)
of the total high-grade aggregate specified for the project. Where the minimum level in criterion1 is not met for an
application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total
high grade aggregate specified.
6. The contributing secondary aggregate must not be transported more than 30 km by road transport.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
General
269
Waste
Ref
Terms
Description
CN4
Offsite recycled
aggregates
Where offsite recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation
waste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant Quality Protocol
and/or comply with the relevant BS/EN standards for aggregates.
Methodology
None
Evidence
Criteria
All
2
Calculation confirming the amount of
recycled/secondary aggregate to be used.
Air cooled blast furnace slag
Air cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a by-product (rather than a waste) and can therefore be used as an
aggregate without the need for a quality protocol. The slag used must meet the requirements of the European and
BS Aggregates Standards that apply to the end use application (e.g. bitumen bound, unbound etc.).
Granular fill and capping
Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now
common place on construction sites due to landfill costs.
For granular fill to be considered a ‘high grade aggregate’, it must conform to one of the following classes under the
Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 600 Earthworks:
1. Class 6A, 6I and 6N - Selected well graded granular material
2. Class 6B - Selected coarse granular material
3. Class 6C, 6D, 6J and 6L - Selected uniformly graded granular material
4. Class 6E, 6G, 6H, 6K, 6M, 6P and 6R - Selected granular material
5. Class 6F (and the various sub classes) - Selected coarse and fine graded material
6. Class 6Q – Well graded, uniformly graded or coarse graded material.
If the application is capping, then granular materials should conform to one of the following classes under the
1. Class 6F – Selected coarse and fine graded material
2. Class 6S – Selected well graded granular material.
If the application is capping, then stabilised materials should conform to one of the following classes under the
270
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Waste
Class 9A - Cement stabilised well graded granular material
Class 9B - Cement stabilised silty cohesive material
Class 9C - Cement stabilised conditioned pulverised fuel ash cohesive material
Class 9D – Lime stabilised cohesive material
Class 9E – Lime and cement stabilised cohesive material
Class 9F – Lime and cement stabilised well graded material.
Low grade aggregate uses
Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now
common place on construction sites due to increased landfill costs.
Materials optimisation
Mat 04 Insulation
Post-consumer waste stream
Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as endusers of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the
distribution chain.
Waste materials generated during manufacturing processes are pre-consumer waste streams and are excluded.
These streams include re-utilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable
of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Quality Protocol
The purpose of a Quality Protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can
reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also
provides purchasers with a product quality-managed to common standards, which increases confidence in
performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a Quality Protocol and/or relevant aggregate
standards will still be considered waste.
Protocols exists for:
Aggregates produced from inert waste
Use of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications.
Recycled aggregates
Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed
concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material.
Secondary aggregates
By-products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary
aggregates are sub-divided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source.
Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by-products include:
1. China clay waste
2. Slate overburden
3. Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)
4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS)
5. Air-cooled blast furnace slag
6. Steel slag
7. Furnace Bottom Ash (FBA)
8. Incinerator bottom ash
9. Foundry sands
10. Recycled glass
11. Recycled plastic
12. Spent oil shale
13. Colliery spoil
14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues
271
Waste
Other information
Further guidance
Details on the European Standards for Aggregates (2004) are available at:
http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/quality/aggregates_standards/european.html
The Environment Agency publishes and updates Quality Protocols:
http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/sectors/142481.aspx
Currently:
The Quality Protocol for production of aggregates from inert waste is due for re-publication in
2013.http://www2.wrap.org.uk/downloads/0083_Quality_Protocol_A4.0bd6bd91.87.pdf
Steel slag, incinerator bottom ash aggregates and furnace bottom ash (from coal fired power generation) are not
covered by the above Quality Protocol but are/will be covered by their own quality protocols.
WRAP has information, tools and guidance on the use of recycled and secondary aggregates:http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/
272
Waste
Minimum standards
1
Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable waste
streams, so that this waste is diverted from landfill or incineration.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Operational waste
1. Dedicated space(s) is provided for the segregation and storage of operational recyclable waste volumes generated by
the assessed building/unit, its occupant(s) and activities. This space must be
a. Clearly labelled, to assist with segregation, storage and collection of the recyclable waste streams
b. Accessible to building occupants or facilities operators for the deposit of materials and collections by waste
management contractors
c. Of a capacity appropriate to the building type, size, number of units (if relevant) and predicted volumes of waste that
will arise from daily/weekly operational activities and occupancy rates.
2. Where the consistent generation in volume of the appropriate operational waste streams is likely to exist, e.g. large
amounts of packaging or compostable waste generated by the building’s use and operation, the following facilities are
provided:
a. Static waste compactor(s) or baler(s); situated in a service area or dedicated waste management space.
b. Vessel(s) for composting suitable organic waste resulting from the building’s daily operation and use; OR adequate
space(s) for storing segregated food waste and compostable organic material prior to collection and delivery to an
alternative composting facility.
c. Where organic waste is to be stored/composted onsite, a water outlet is provided adjacent to or within the facility
for cleaning and hygiene purposes.
Additionally for healthcare buildings only
3. The specified/installed operational waste facilities are compliant with HTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare
waste1 (England), WHTM07-01 Safe management of healthcare (Wales)1, HTM07-01 (Northern Ireland version) or
SHTN3 NHS Scotland Waste Management guidance Part A- Best Practice Overview and Part B Waste Management
Policy template2 (Scotland).
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with self contained dwellings/bedsits only
4. Each dwelling/bedsit has a provision of three internal storage containers, as follows:
a. A minimum total capacity of 30 litres
b. No individual container smaller than 7 litres
c. All containers in a dedicated non obstructive position
d. The storage containers for recycling are provided in addition to non-recyclable waste storage.
1WHTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste, NHW Wales Shared Services Partnership - Facilities Services, 2013
273
Waste
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with individual bedrooms and communal facilities only
5. The above storage requirements (criterion 4) for self-contained dwellings/bedsits are met for every six bedrooms
6. The recyclable storage is located in a dedicated non obstructive position in either:
a. Communal kitchens; OR
b. Where there are no communal kitchens present, in a communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas.
7. Home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet is provided within the kitchen area or
communal space for each self contained dwelling, bedsit or communal kitchen.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Criteria 1 and 2
Both options:All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
For criterion 2, if the end-occupier is known the criterion is assessed as written. If the
end-occupier is not known but the function/areas of the assessed building suggest
that large amounts of packaging or compostable waste is likely to be generated
during the building’s operation, e.g. it is a retail or industrial development or
contains a large catering facility, then an appropriately sized space and
services/infrastructure to accommodate the relevant facilities must be provided.
The facilities themselves do not necessarily need to be provided/installed to
demonstrate compliance for a shell and core project assessment.
Criteria 3-7
These criteria are not applicable to shell and core assessments.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. All criteria relevant to the
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to this
Determining if the
dedicated space
The design team demonstrates that the provision of waste management facilities
for the assessed building is adequate given the building type, occupier (if known),
General
CN4
274
Waste
Terms
Description
complies See criteria
1 and 2.
operational function and likely waste streams and volumes to be generated.
Where it is not possible to determine what provision should be made, the following
guide for minimum storage space provision should be used:
1. At least 2m2 per 1000 m2 of net floor area for buildings < 5000 m2
2. A minimum of 10 m2 for buildings ≥ 5000 m2
3. An additional 2 m2 per 1000 m2 of net floor area where catering is provided
(with an additional minimum of 10 m2 for buildings ≥ 5000 m2).
The net floor area should be rounded up to the nearest 1000m2.
CN5
Extensions to
existing buildings
Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to assess
compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for the total
volume of predicted recyclable waste arising from the new and existing buildings.
CN6
Multiple building
assessments and
buildings that form
part of a wider
estate See criterion
1c.
Where the assessment applies to one or more buildings/units that are part of a
wider estate or campus, the design team can choose to demonstrate compliance
through the provision of dedicated centralised storage space and waste
management facilities with the capacity to accommodate the recyclable waste
material generated from all buildings and their activities.
CN7
Limited space or
vehicle access for a
compactor/baler
See criterion 2.
For developments that have limited space for static installations, compliance can be
assessed on the basis of the provision of adequate space for a smaller portable
compactor or baler.
CN8
Internal storage
areas
Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and
manoeuvring and loading space must be sized to ensure ease of access for vehicles
collecting recyclable materials.
CN9
General waste
The area for storage of recyclable materials must be provided in addition to areas
and facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste
management facilities, e.g. compactors, balers and composters.
CN10
Small industrial units
See criterion 1.
For an industrial building or development consisting of a number of smaller units,
each ≤ 200m2 floor area, shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the
building/development as a whole are sufficient to achieve this credit.
CN11
Shopping centres
and retail parks
See criterion 1.
For shopping centres and retail parks there must be adequate space to cater for
each tenant and their potential recyclable waste volumes. Tenants that occupy a
large proportion of the centre, i.e. ‘flagship tenants’, must have their own dedicated
compliant facilities. For smaller non-flagship tenant units, compliant central or
common facilities onsite or dedicated spaces for individual units will meet the
assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
CN12
Home composting
information leaflet
(multi-residential
buildings)
See criteria 4, 5, 6
and 7.
The leaflet must provide information on:
Ref
How composting works and why it is important
The materials that can be composted (e.g. raw vegetable peelings and fruit,
shredded paper, tea bags, etc.); and
275
Waste
Ref
Terms
Description
Details of the operation and management plan for the communal
composting scheme.
Where a green/kitchen waste collection scheme is in operation, the information
leaflet provided by the Local Authority is sufficient to meet the information leaflet
criteria.
Building specific
CN13
Multi-residential:
supported living
facility
Where it is not possible to locate the recycling bins within a communal area, which is
accessible to residents, for safety reasons (e.g. where the residents have mental
health problems and free access to these facilities would pose significant risk of self
harm or harm to others) it is acceptable to locate them within a dedicated nonobtrusive position accessible to staff only, but in close proximity to the areas where
recyclable waste material is generated.
Methodology
None
Evidence
Criteria
All
Accessible space
Accessible space is typically within 20 m of a building entrance. Depending on the size of the building, site restrictions
or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible for the facilities to be within 20 m of a building entrance. In such
circumstances, judgement on whether the space is ‘accessible’ to the building occupants and vehicle collection must
be made.
Clinical waste
Waste derived from medical practices and defined as bodily fluids and wastes, drugs and medical equipment; and
other waste which, unless rendered safe, may prove hazardous or infectious to persons coming into contact with it.
Dedicated non-obstructive position
An easily accessible cupboard under the sink or any other cupboard in the kitchen, next to the storage or likely area for
storing non-recyclable waste, where practical. Where a kitchen cupboard location is not possible the bins can be
located near to the kitchen, in a utility room or connected garage, for example.
276
Waste
Flagship or anchor tenant
The largest and primary tenant within a retail development, typically department store-type retailers.
Waste compactor or baler
A machine that is designed to compress waste streams in order to improve storage and transport efficiency.
Other information
Recyclable storage
The following footprint dimensions (informed by the Metric handbook, Planning and design data) can act as a guide when
determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space:
1. Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4 m
2. Skip: the footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4 m x 1.8 m, therefore allow a minimum of 2.0 m width and
4.0 m length or 8 m2 area for the storage and access of such containers
3. Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86 m x 0.62/660 L= 1.2 m x 0.7 m/1100 L = 1.28 m x 0.98 m
4. Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1 m x 2.4 m
5. Vehicle access: the following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste. Therefore gate
height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements:
a. Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4 m Height = 4 m width 3.1 m
b. Skip lorry: length = 7 m Height = 3.35 m width 3.1 m.
Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll on/off
containers.
Recycling bins
Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise recycling rates.
1HTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste, Department of Health, 2013
2SHTN3 NHS Scotland Waste Management guidance Part A- Best Practice Overview and Part B Waste Management Policy
template, Health Facilities Scotland March 2010
277
Waste
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To encourage the specification and fitting of floor and ceiling finishes selected by the building occupant and therefore avoid
unnecessary waste of materials.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Speculative floor and ceiling finishes
Office building types only
1. For tenanted areas (where the future occupant is not known), prior to full fit-out works, carpets, other floor finishes and
ceiling finishes have been installed in a show area only.
2. In a building developed for a specific occupant, that occupant has selected (or agreed to) the specified floor and ceiling
finishes.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Option 1- Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2- Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
278
Waste
Ref
Terms
Description
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
General
None.
General
CN4
Building specific
CN5
Office: Show area
See criterion 1.
A show area could be either a floor plate or an individual office. However, to award
this credit it must be less than 25% of the net lettable floor area.
Methodology
None
Evidence
Criteria
All
None
Other information
None
279
Waste
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to mitigate the impact of extreme weather conditions arising from climate
change over the lifespan of the building.
Assessment criteria
A number of BREEAM issues within the New Construction scheme contain assessment criteria which aim to support mitigation
of the impacts of extreme weather events arising from climate change. The main credit focuses on structural and fabric
resilience not covered in other issues. An Exemplary Credit is awarded where other issues relating to adaptation to climate
change are covered holistically.
One credit - Adaptation to climate change – structural and fabric resilience
1. Conduct a climate change adaptation strategy appraisal for structural and fabric resilience by the end of Concept
Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), in accordance with the following approach:
a. Carry out a systematic risk assessment (specific to structural and fabric resilience) to identify and evaluate and where
feasible mitigate against the impact of the expected increase in extreme weather conditions arising from climate
change on the building over the projected life-cycle of the building. The assessment should cover the following
stages:
i. Hazard Identification
ii. Hazard assessment
iii. Risk estimation
iv. Risk Evaluation
v. Risk Management
Exemplary credit – Responding to adaptation to climate change
Achievement of this criteria represents a holistic approach to designing and construction for the impacts of climate change
which this lifecycle stage of BREEAM aimed to mitigate..
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
1. Achievement of the Structural and fabric resilience issue and following issues and the following criteria points or credits:
Hea 04 – Thermal comfort
(Link to Wst 5 issue- to preventing increasing risks of overheating)
Criterion 7 in the second credit of the Hea 03 issue is met..
Ene 01 – Reduction of CO2 emissions and energy efficiency
(Link to Wst 5 issue – to maximise energy efficiency contributing to low carbon emissions resulting from increasing energy
demands)
280
Waste
At least (TBC) credits in this issue have been achieved.
Ene 04 – Low carbon design
(Link to Wst 5 issue– to maximise opportunities to avoid unecessary carbon emissions)
The Passive design analysis credit in this issue is achieved.
Wat 01 – Water consumption
(Link - to minimise water demands in periods of drought)
A minimum of three credits in this issue are achieved.
Mat 05 – Designing for resilience and robustness
(Link to Wst 5 issue - to avoid increased risks of deterioration and higher maintenance demands)
The Material degradation credit in this issue is achieved.
Pol 03 – Surface water run off
(Link to Wst 5 - to minimise the risks of increased flood risk and surface water run off affecting the site or others)
Flood risk – a minimum of one credit is achieved.
Surface water run off – a minimum of two credits are achieved.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Adaptation to climate change – structural fabric and resilience
1. Criterion 1
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
281
Waste
Ref
Terms
Description
Relevant bodies
See criterion 2.
General
CN4
Local authorities
Statutory bodies e.g. Defra, EA, NIEA, SEPA etc
Technical bodies e.g. CIBSE, UKCIP
Methodology
Hazard identification
1. Review the evidence/information from relevant bodies to identify and understand the expected impacts of increased
extreme weather events climate change for on the building.
2. Identify likely hazards (see Relevant definitions).
Hazard assessment
1. Identify the scale of the hazards identified.
Risk estimation
1. Identify the risk presented by these hazards to the building and the likely impact of the hazards taking into account the
following aspects as a minimum:
a. Structural stability
b. Structural robustness
c. Weather proofing and detailing
d. Material durability
e. Health and safety of building occupants and others
f. Impacts on building contents and business continuity
Risk evaluation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Evaluate the potential impact of these risks on the building
Determine the tolerable risk threshold
Check the sensitivity of the risk assessment
Identify areas where the risks are unacceptable in health and safety, life cycle assessment and financial terms
Risk management
1. Identify risk reduction measures
2. Mitigate the hazards where as far as is practically feasible.
3. Adapt the design/specification to incorporate the measures identified by the risk assessment in the final design.
Evidence
Criteria
All
282
Waste
Structural and fabric resilience
BREEAM defines this as the ability A quality inof a structural to withstand increased burden of weather/increase
pressure/hazards associated with climate change.. Examples of increased pressures/hazards include:
1. Solar radiation
2. Temperature variation
3. Water/ moisture
4. Wind
5. Precipitation e.g rain and snow
6. Extreme weather conditions: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow; rainwater ponding
7. Subsidence/ ground movement
Durability
The ability to withstand wear, pressure, or damage.
Hazard
A hazard is a situation or event which has the potential to cause harm. It may be an accidental or a malicious action,
insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation from intended limits
Resilience
The ability of a building or structural system or material to withstand an accidental or exceptional loading or other
incident without experiencing an undue degree of damage or decrease in performance, such that progressive
collapse, loss of performance or disproportionate degree of damage occurs.
Systematic risk assessment
A structured approach to help professionals identify, evaluate and manage risk, where the reduction of the risks
identified is integral to the process,
It includes:
Identifying the hazards
Eliminating the hazards, so far as reasonably practicable
Reducing the risks from each hazard, so far as reasonably practicable
Developing the building design to be robust.
Other information
This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to mitigate the future impacts of climate change on the
building by considering a number of relevant factors during the design stages. BRE have avoided being overly-prescriptive
with the assessment criteria in order to allow a degree of flexibility in its application and demonstrating compliance,
recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by
site location and building specific factors. This places a greater emphasis on the BREEAM Assessor to use their judgement in
determining whether the project team and the building design has met the aim and intent of the credit and its criteria, using
appropriate project information to back their judgement. BRE will endorse the BREEAM Assessors judgement through the
Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of project team actions and
proposed design solutions is evident. BRE would welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist
with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions.
The National Adaptation Programme1 report has been drawn up by the government, industry and other non-government
organisations working together. It contains a mix of policies and actions to help the UK to adapt successfully to future
weather conditions, by dealing with the risks and making the most of the opportunities.
283
Waste
The book "Design for climate change"2 describes buildings and issues as part of the Design for Future Climate, Adapting
Buildings programme, the largest programme focusing on the climate-change adaptation of buildings in the UK. This
programme from the Technology Strategy Board (TSB) is aimed at improving the climate resilience of building projects. The
book has guidance on construction, including structural stability.
The BRE report 3, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment, discusses climate change adaptation
strategies, including some for structural resilience.
The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.
284
Waste
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to accommodatefuture changes of use of the building over its lifespan.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Functional adaptability
1. Conduct a building specific functional adaptation strategy appraisal by Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent),
which includes consideration of:
a. Adaptability of the internal environment to accommodate changes in working practices
b. Adaptability of the internal physical space and external shell to accommodate change in use
c. Design for ease of replacement of all major plant within the life of the building e.g. panels in floors/ walls that can be
removed without affecting the structure, providing lifting beams and hoists.
d. Local services accessibility, such as local power, data etc.
e. Ability for major refurbishment, including replacing the façade
2. Functional adaptation measures have been implemented in accordance with the functional adaptation strategy and its
implementation plan, where practical and cost effective.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
285
Waste
Ref
Terms
Description
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Functional
adaptation
implementation
plan
The content of the functional adaptation implementation plan will be specific to the
building type, but should broadly include information on the following:
1. The feasibility for multiple/alternative building uses and area functions
2. Options for multiple building uses and area functions
3. Routes and methods for major plant replacement
4. Accessibility for local plant and service distribution routes
5. Potential for the building to be extended, horizontally and/or vertically
6.
General
CN4
Methodology
None
Evidence
Ref
All
All
Functional adaptation strategy and implementation
plan report
As per design stage evidence
Building functional adaptation
Work to an existing building that responds to a required change of use or requirements and goes beyond
maintenance and repairs. These changes solve functional problems and could provide significant improvements. The
functional adaptation works could include alterations, conversions and/or extensions.
The ability of a building to be adapted to be used as a different building type or for different requirements.
286
Waste
Other information
The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 4 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.
1National Adaptation Programme: Making the country resilient to a changing climate. Defra; 2013
2Gething B, Puckett K, Design for climate change. RIBA; 2013
3Graves HM, Phillipson MC, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment. BRE Centre for Environmental
Engineering: BRE East Kilbride; 2000
4Health Technical Memorandum 07-07: Sustainable health and social care buildings. Department of Health; 2013
287
Land use
Land Use and ecology
288
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To encourage the use of previously occupied and/or contaminated land and avoid land which has not been previously
disturbed.
Assessment criteria
Previously occupied land (1 credit)
Contaminated land (1 credit).
One credit - Previously occupied land
1. At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously been occupied by
industrial, commercial or domestic buildings or fixed surface infrastructure.
One credit - Contaminated land
2. The site is deemed to be significantly contaminated as confirmed by a contaminated land specialist’s site investigation,
risk assessment and appraisal, which has identified:
a. The degree of contamination
b. The contaminant sources/types
c. The options for remediating sources of pollution which present an unacceptable risk to the site.
3. The client or principal contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with the
remediation strategy and its implementation plan.
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
289
Land use
Ref
Terms
Description
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
. This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Temporary works
See criterion 1.
Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary
offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as development
on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations unless they have
been defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (LE 02 Ecological value of site and
protection of ecological features).
CN5
Infill development
See criterion 1.
New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not automatically
comply with the re-use of land criteria. At least 75% of the land on which the new
building will be sited must meet the definition of previously occupied (for prisons,
refer to the building type specific compliance note below).
CN6
Prior
decontamination
The credit for use of contaminated land can only be awarded where remediation
has taken place to enable development of the site for the assessed building, or a
larger phased development that includes the assessed building (see below). The
credit is not achievable for instances where historical remediation and development
of the site has occurred outside the scope of the current development proposals.
CN7
Large sites split into
smaller plots
Where contamination of a large site has been remediated and has then been
packaged up into smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a
phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot
location of the assessed building within the wider development plan. This is on the
condition that the site could not have been developed without remediation work
taking place.
CN8
Health and safety
related
decontamination
Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety
reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does not comply.
CN9
Asbestos
Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within an existing
building fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where
asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination
for the purposes of assessing this issue.
General
290
Ref
Terms
Description
Building specific
CN10
Education (schools
only)
Playing fields
See criterion 1.
Development of a playing field within the construction zone can be counted as
development on previously occupied land only if an equivalent area of playing field
is reinstated within one year of the completed construction works; and where such
reinstatement will not encroach on land of high ecological value as defined in
BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
CN11
Prisons
See criterion 1.
All land within a secure perimeter fence on an existing prison site can be classified as
previously occupied land. Therefore assessments of buildings located within this
area will achieve the credit.
If the secure perimeter fence of a prison is being extended to accommodate the
proposed building, or the proposed building is located on a completely new site,
then the building must comply with the assessment criteria defined above.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
3
A copy of the remediation strategy and
implementation plan
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being
developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, soft landscape, site access, plus a 3m wide zone
measured outward from the boundary. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings.
If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be located it must be
assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.
Contaminant
A contaminant is defined as any solid, liquid or gaseous material in, or on the ground to be covered by the building,
which is classed as a hazard and therefore presents an unacceptable risk to human health and the environment. The
definition also includes land significantly infested by non-native invasive plant species (see definition below).
291
Land use
Contaminated land specialist
An individual that holds a degree or equivalent qualification in chemistry, environmental science/management, earth
sciences, civil engineering or a related subject, and has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last
five years) in site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal. Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical
knowledge of site investigation methodologies and understanding of remediation techniques and national
legislation on the subject; as well as acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for remediation.
Non-native invasive plant species
Non-indigenous species that adversely affect the habitats they invade economically, environmentally or ecologically.
Note: For the purposes of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme this currently includes Japanese Knotweed and
Giant Hogweed. Further information on control and disposal, together with legislative requirements relating to such
species can be obtained from statutory agencies, such as the Environment Agency.
Pollution linkages
A relevant pollutant linkage is one that has been identified during the risk assessment stage as representing
unacceptable risks to human health or the environment.
Proposed development
Any development (building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads) that falls within the boundary of the
assessed site.
Previously occupied land
For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines previously occupied land as that which is or was occupied by a
permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure (the definition is based on the National
Planning Policy Framework1 definition of Previously Developed Land).
The definition excludes:
1. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings.
2. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for
restoration has been made through development control procedures.
3. Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although may feature paths,
pavilions and other buildings, has not been previously occupied.
4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure
have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part
of the natural surroundings), typically over a period of more than 50 years.
Remediation
Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human
health, the environment or local resources such as sources of potable water.
Significant contamination
For the purposes of this issue, significant contamination is contamination compliant with the above definition of
contaminant and that which without remediation, development of the site is not possible.
Other information
None.
1National Planning Policy Framework. www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-framework--2
292
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of
ecological features
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing ecological features from
substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction works.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Ecological value of site
1. Land within the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ using either:
a. The BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value (see Additional Information section below);
OR
b. A Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’ within an ecological
assessment report, based on a site survey.
One credit - Protection of ecological features
2. All existing features of ecological value within and surrounding the construction zone and site boundary area are
adequately protected from damage during clearance, site preparation and construction activities in line with BS42020:
2013 1.
3. In all cases, the principal contractor is required to construct ecological protection prior to any preliminary site
construction or preparation works (e.g. clearing of the site or erection of temporary site facilities).
BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value
If the answer to all questions in the checklist is ‘no’, the land can be defined as having a low ecological value and the credit
awarded. Should any of the questions be answered ‘yes’, the credit can only be awarded on confirmation from a Suitably
Qualified Ecologist that the site is of low ecological value.
The checklist should be completed by either the BREEAM Assessor, using appropriate evidence submitted by the design team
or completed by the design team and submitted to the assessor along with appropriate supporting evidence. The answers
to the checklist must be based on an evaluation of the site prior to any site clearance or construction activities (refer to
Compliance notes for further details).
1BS 42020: 2013: Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning and Development, BSI 2013
293
Land use
Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value
ID
Question
Yes
No
Q1
Has the Planning Authority required that an
ecological survey or statement be prepared?
□
□
Q2
Is the development within 2 km of a Special
Area of Conservation (SAC), Special
Protection Area (SPA) or Ramsar site?
1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk
2. www.magic.gov.uk
3. Local Plan Proposals Map.
□
□
Q3
Is the development within 500m of a Site of
Special Scientific Interest (SSSI)
1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk
2. www.magic.gov.uk
3. Local Plan Proposals Map.
□
□
Q4
Are any of the following habitats present on,
or within 100m of the construction zone?
1. Broad-leaved woodland*
2. Water courses (rivers, streams or canals)
**
3. Wetlands (ponds, lakes, marshland,
fenland, reed bed)
4. Flower-rich meadow/grassland
5. Heathland (habitat/plants that thrive on
acidic soils, such as heather and gorse).
□
□
Q5
Are any of the following features present
within or on the boundary of the construction
zone?
1. Trees more than 10 years old
2. Mature hedgerow (field hedgerows
over 1m tall and 0.5m wide)***
3. Existing buildings (occupied or derelict)
with either pitched tile, slate or shingle
roofs, lofts, wall hanging tiles,
weatherboarding or dense climbing
plants, soffits and cellars, basements, ice
houses etc.
□
□
Notes:
* The Countryside Survey defines woodland as ‘having over 25% canopy cover of trees and shrubs, over a metre high’.
Broad-leaved woodland should be taken to mean broad-leaved, mixed and Yew woodland.
** The Countryside Survey defines the broad habitats of rivers and streams as running watercourses ranging from small
headwater streams to large rivers. This broad habitat, along with wetlands, includes the open water itself and the
vegetation along the water’s edge.
*** The Countryside Survey defines a hedge as ‘a line of woody vegetation that has been subject to management so that
trees no longer take their natural shape.’
http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/
294
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
guidance on how to apply the criteria.y.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
CN4
No features of
ecological value
See criterion 1.
The credit for the protection of ecological features can be awarded where the
construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ and where the
surrounding site contains no features of ecological value.
CN5
Use of a Suitably
Qualified Ecologist
See criterion 1.
Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is employed and has, using their
professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this
assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using the BREEAM
checklist for defining land of low ecological value. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist
must base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at
appropriate time(s) of the year, when different plant and animal species are
evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing
site’s ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e.
before RIBA Stage 5 Construction). Where the ecologist has not visited the site at
the appropriate times the credit cannot be awarded (except in the circumstances
indicated below in the Compliance note 'Site clearance prior to purchase of the
site'). See Additional Information for the BREEAM definition of a Suitably Qualified
Ecologist (SQE).
CN6
Features of little or
no ecological value
See criterion 1.
If a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has confirmed that a feature present on the site has
little or no ecological value, or where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger
to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then
that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological features'
requirement of this issue.
CN7
Prior removal of
features of
ecological value
If features of ecological value have been removed as part of the site clearance
activities then the development cannot achieve the credits, even if they are to be
replaced as part of a new soft landscape strategy.
General
295
Land use
Ref
Terms
Description
CN8
Site clearance prior
to purchase of the
site
See criterion 1 and 2.
For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years before
assessment, a Suitably Qualified Ecologist should estimate the site’s ecological value
immediately prior to clearance using available desktop information (including aerial
photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the site. Where it is not
possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value
prior to the site clearance then the credits must be withheld, i.e. where there is no
evidence and therefore justification for awarding the credits. For sites cleared more
than five years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be based on the current
situation on the basis that within five years, ecological features would have started
to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological
value.
CN9
Verification of a
report written by an
ecologist not
meeting the
BREEAM SQE criteria
See criterion 1b.
Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by
another ecologist who does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum,
review the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to:
1. Represent sound industry practice
2. Report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively
3. Be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed
4. aAoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with
the definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
1
Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is not employed:
BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological
value.
Construction zone
As defined for BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection.
296
Features of ecological value
Features requiring protection during site clearance and construction in accordance with BS 42020: 2013 to maintain
their presence and ecological value, which include as a minimum:
1. Trees of over 100 mm trunk diameter, and/or of significant ecological value (as defined by BS 5837: 2012 1 and
confirmed by the Suitably Qualified Ecologist or qualified arboriculturalist).
2. Hedges and natural areas requiring protection.
3. Watercourses and wetland areas.
Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE)
An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of
compliance with BREEAM:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject.
2. Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such
experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to
construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for
ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological
impact assessments; Preliminary Ecological Appraisals (PEA); Phase 2 habitat and fauna surveys; and habitat
creation.
3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review. Full members of the following
organisations, who meet the above criteria, are deemed Suitably Qualified Ecologists for the purposes of
BREEAM:
a. Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM)
b. Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM)
c. Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA)
d. Landscape Institute (LI)
e. The Institution of Environmental Sciences (IES).
Peer review
A peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current
full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of
conduct and professional ethics.
Ecology related subject
Depending on the ecological content (minimum 60%), the following degrees might be considered relevant: Ecology,
Biological Sciences, Zoology, Botany, Countryside Management, Environmental Sciences, Marine and Freshwater
Management, Earth Sciences, Agriculture, Forestry, Geography, Landscape Management.
Other information
Very often there is the potential for a site to increase its biodiversity value through appropriate design and management,
regardless of whether enhancing biodiversity is required to gain planning consent. This BREEAM assessment issue provides
the opportunity to reward those projects that contribute to protecting and enhancing biodiversity, improve living
environments and meet environmental objectives.
Whilst not mandatory, BREEAM recommends that a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is appointed to ensure that a project
maximizes biodiversity gains. Although a large number of developments are not required to undertake formal ecological
assessments as part of the planning process because of the nature of the existing site, they may have potential to be of
biodiversity value. Verification of this is best achieved by the appointment of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
The Suitably Qualified Ecologist’s recommendations may impact on specifications worked-up by other design team
members, such as landscape architects or drainage engineers. BREEAM recommends that collaborative input between the
ecologist and relevant professionals is sought from the concept stage of the development to highlight opportunities and
constraints and allow effective integration of these aspects into the ecologist’s recommendations.
1BS 5837: 2012: Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction - Recommendations, BSI 2012
297
Land use
Organisations and institutes, including the Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) and the
Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC), provide lists of ecologists working within a particular region that may meet
the SQE requirements.
Relating Ecology Reports to BREEAM
Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This
information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
298
Minimum standards
2
Yes
Aim
To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology.
Assessment criteria
Two credits - Change in ecological value 1
1. The change in ecological value of the site is equal to or greater than zero plant species, i.e. no negative change, using the
methods outlined in either (a) or (b) below:
a. Determine the following information and input this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator:
i. The broad habitat type(s) that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and
proposed state (see Table - 51).
ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat types.
OR
b. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) has been appointed and, based on their site survey, they confirm the
following and either the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator:
i. The broad habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and
proposed state.
ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat plot types.
iii. Average total taxon (plant species) richness within each habitat type.
One credit - Change in ecological value 2
2. Where the change in ecological value of the site is less than zero but equal to or greater than minus nine plant species i.e.
a minimal change, using the methods outlined in either 1(a) or (b) above.
Table - 51: Broad habitat types(Source: Countryside Survey 2007)
Broad habitat
name
Description
Acid grassland
Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on a range of lime-deficient soils which have been
derived from acidic bedrock or from superficial deposits such as sands and gravels. They
characteristically include a range of calcifuge or ‘lime-avoiding’ plants.
Arable and
Includes all arable crops such as different types of cereal and vegetable crops, together with
299
Land use
Broad habitat
name
Description
horticultural
orchards and more specialist operations such as market gardening and commercial flower
growing. Freshly ploughed land, fallow areas, short-term set-aside and annual grass leys are also
included in this category.
Boundary and
linear features
This habitat includes a diverse range of linearly arranged landscape features such as hedgerows,
lines of trees (whether they are part of a hedgerow or not), walls, stone and earth banks, grass
strips and dry ditches. These features may occur separately or in combinations forming multielement boundaries. This habitat type also includes some of the built components of the rural
landscape, including roads, tracks and railways. The narrow strips of semi-natural vegetation
along verges or cuttings are also included.
Bracken
Stands of vegetation greater than 0.25 ha in extent which are dominated by a continuous canopy
cover (> 95% cover) of bracken (Pteridium aquilinum) at the height of the growing season.
Built-up and
gardens
Covers urban and rural settlements, farm buildings, caravan parks and other man-made built
structures such as industrial estates, retail parks, waste and derelict ground, urban parkland and
urban transport infrastructure. It also includes domestic gardens and allotments.
This category has been split in to three individual broad habitat categories for the purpose of
BREEAM:
1. Gardens, allotments and urban parkland
2. Built-up (maintained buildings and infrastructure)
3. Derelict land (where the land was previously used for major historical industrial use or
development).
This split is to reflect the differing impact of development in these types of habitats.
Broadleaved,
mixed and yew
woodland
This form of woodland is dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which
form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy with a cover of greater than 20%. It includes
stands of native broad leaved trees (such as oak, ash and beech), non-native broad leaved trees
(such as sycamore and horse chestnut), and yew trees, where the percentage cover of these
trees in the stand exceeds 20% of the total cover of the trees present. Scrub vegetation, where
the woody component tends to be mainly shrubs (usually less than 5m high), is included if the
cover of woody species is greater than 30%.
Calcareous
grassland
Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on shallow, well-drained soils, which are alkaline, as
a result of the weathering of chalk, limestone or other types of base-rich rock. They
characteristically include a range of calcicoles or ‘lime-loving’ plants.
Coniferous
woodland
Dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct, although
sometimes open, canopy which has a cover of greater than 20%. It includes stands of both native
conifers (Scots pine but not yew) and non-native conifers (such as larch and Sitka spruce) where
the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 80% of the total cover of the trees
present.
Mixed woodland
This is not a category in its own right, but has been included separately by BRE Global for
clarification.
Many areas of woodland contain both broad leaved and coniferous trees. There is not a
separate Broad Habitat for mixed woodland. Instead where mixtures occur they are assigned to
the Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew Broad Habitat type if the proportion of conifers is less than
80%.
300
Broad habitat
name
Description
The separation of coniferous from Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew habitat is applied at a stand or
sub-compartment level within large woodlands to avoid areas that are predominantly
coniferous being treated as mixed because they are part of a larger wood, of which 20%
consists of pure broadleaved trees. Therefore, most areas of mixed woodland that are assigned
to the Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew Broad Habitat would normally have much more than 20%
broad leaved or yew trees.
Dwarf shrub heath
Vegetation that has a greater than 25% cover of plant species from the heath family or dwarf
gorse species. It generally occurs on well-drained, nutrient-poor, acid soils.
Improved
grassland
Occurs on fertile soils and is characterised by the dominance of a few fast-growing species, such
as rye-grass and white clover. These grasslands are typically used for grazing and silage, but they
can also be managed for recreational purposes. They are often intensively managed using
fertiliser and weed control treatments, and may also be ploughed as part of the normal rotation
of arable crops but if so, they are only included in this Broad Habitat type if they are more than
one year old.
Inland rock
Habitat types that occur on both natural and artificial exposed rock surfaces, such as inland cliffs,
caves, screes and limestone pavements, as well as various forms of excavations and waste tips,
such as quarries and quarry waste.
Neutral grassland
Found on soils that are neither very acid nor alkaline. They support different types of vegetation
communities compared to Acid and Calcareous Grasslands in that they do not contain calcifuge
(‘lime-avoiding’) plants which are found on acid soils, or calcicole (lime-loving) plants which are
found on calcareous soils. Unimproved or semi-improved Neutral grasslands may be managed
as hay meadows, pastures or for silage. They differ from Improved grassland in that they are less
fertile and contain a wider range of herb and grass species. Usually the cover of rye grass is less
than about 25%.
Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels
plots’ in Great Britain.
Habitat type
Previously
undeveloped
land
Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & ***
(Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and
therefore derelict)
Average total taxon (plant species) richness*
< 5 Years
5-10 Years
10 - 20 Years
20 - 30+
Years
Acid grassland
19.58
0
5.87
14.69
19.58
Arable and horticultural land
10.25
-
-
-
-
Boundary and linear features
15.42
-
-
-
-
301
Land use
Habitat type
Previously
undeveloped
land
Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & ***
(Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and
therefore derelict)
Average total taxon (plant species) richness*
Bracken
19.29
-
-
-
-
Built-up (buildings and
infrastructure)**&*** &
-
0
-
-
-
Calcareous grassland
43.02
0
12.91
32.27
43.02
Coniferous woodland
14.05
-
-
-
-
-
0
6.00
14.99
19.99
Gardens, allotments and
urban parkland***
19.99
0
6.00
14.99
19.99
Dwarf shrub heath
15.87
0
4.76
11.90
15.87
Improved grassland
14.28
0
4.28
10.71
14.28
Inland rock
16.74
-
-
-
-
Mixed, broadleaved and yew
woodland
20.91
-
-
-
-
Neutral grassland
20.44
0
6.13
15.33
20.44
Derelict land**
Source: Acknowledgement - Countryside Survey data owned by NERC – Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. Countryside
Survey © Database Right/Copyright NERC– Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. All rights reserved.
*Total taxon richness is higher plant species only, no bryophytes (non flowering plants). Figures are based on the average
species richness per 200m2 plot.
**The derelict land and built-up figures are not from the Countryside survey data (see Additional information).
***BRE Global have split the 'Built-up and gardens' Countryside survey category into these headings to reflect the
differing impact of building on these types of land.
****The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent; a linear scale has been used to determine intermediate values
between zero ecological value, where development occurs within 5 years from the end of occupation and maintenance
works, and the value at 30 years based on the full species richness for the relevant broad habitat. This presents a
minimum figure which can be amended on the advice of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist and their site survey.
302
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Assessment of a
single development
on a larger site
Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger
development and the soft landscape and ecological features form a common part
of the whole site, for the purpose of assessing this issue the plot types and areas
for the entire site must be used.
CN5
Infill developments
on existing occupied
site
Where a new building is an infill on an existing occupied site, then the construction
zone for the new building would be the area of site assessed for the purposes of
this issue.
CN6
Site clearance prior
to purchase of the
site
Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological
features – Compliance notes
CN7
Green roofs/walls
See criterion 1b.
The contribution of plant species on a green roof can only be incorporated within
the calculation where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has been appointed to advise on
suitable plant species for the roof.
Presently green walls cannot be considered compliant within this BREEAM issue due
to concerns over high maintenance requirements which are often not self
supporting/sustainable, resulting in deterioration of these plants. If the assessor
feels that the green wall specified meets the aims of this issue and will be self
sustaining, details can be sent to BRE for consideration. Ground planted plants
trained up a framework supported by the building would be acceptable
(confirmed by the SQE) as these are not so dependent on systems and
maintenance.
General
303
Land use
Methodology
Calculating the change in ecological value for a site
The change in ecological value is determined by measuring the diversity (species richness and cover) of plants on the site
immediately before site clearance/preparation and after construction of the assessed development. The ecological value is
expressed as an area-weighted average of plant species richness for the site’s broad habitat types. This enables BREEAM to
use plant species as an indicator of the development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value.
A simple example of the calculation is outlined below.
1. Calculate the ecological value of a previously developed existing site:
A 2065m2 existing site consists of the following types of land and, using data from the table above, plant species richness:
1. a. 1865m2 hard landscape = 0 species
b. 200m2 urban parkland = 19.99 species
The ecological value of the site in its existing condition is calculated as follows, for each plot type;
Number of species on plot type x plot type area as % of total area.
Therefore, for the example site:
1. a. Hard landscape: {(0 species x (1865m2/2065m2)} = 0
b. Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (200m2/2065m2)} = 1.94
c. Ecological value of the existing site = 0 + 1.94 = 1.94
2. Calculate the ecological value of the site in its proposed, post-developed state:
The 2065m2 post-construction site consists of the following types of land:
a. 1375m2 of building = 0 species.
b. 550m2 of hard landscape = 0 species
c. 140m2 has remained as urban parkland = 19.99 species
The ecological value of the proposed site is as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Building: {(0 species x (1375m2/2065m2)} = 0
Hard landscape: {(0 species x (550m2/2065m2)} = 0
Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (140m2/2065m2)} = 1.36
Ecological value of the proposed site = 0 + 0 + 1.36 = 1.36
The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values:
a. Change in ecological value: 1.36 (after) – 1.94 (before) = - 0.58
Therefore, as the ecological value has decreased by no less than minus nine, for this example one credit can be awarded.
Evidence
Criteria
All
1-2
Where relevant:
304
Criteria
A completed copy of the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04
calculator
For large mixed-use/multi-building
developments, where the whole site has not
been completed and ecological
enhancements have not yet been added, or
where features are being added at a later
date in an appropriate planting season:
Evidence from the client or principal
contractor confirming planting will be
completed within 18 months from
completion of the development.
Average total taxon (plant species richness)
The ecological value of a site expressed as an area weighted average of plant species richness for a site's broad
habitat types.
Note: BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site and
therefore an indication of ecological impact resulting from its development.
Construction zone
Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.
Other information
See LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features ‘Other information’ for information that also apply to
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology.
Where green roofs are specified The GRO Green Roof Code1 provides guidance on green roof design, installation and
maintenance and maximising their environmental benefits.
Countryside Survey (2007) data
The data used in this BREEAM issue has been obtained from the Countryside Survey 2007 tables;
http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/data_access/Graphs/SummaryResults.aspx
Broad habitat definitions have been sourced from: http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/archiveCS2000/Report_
pdf/appen.pdf
Some of the Countryside Survey broad habitat data have not been used within this BREEAM issue either because the broad
habitat supports no taxon richness or because it is unlikely that buildings will be constructed within these habitat types e.g.
bog, fen etc.
BREEAM assumptions
In order to use the Countryside Survey data within BREEAM, BRE Global have made the following assumptions:
1The GRO Green Roof Code: Green Roof Code of Practice for the UK 2011, Groundwork Sheffield
305
Land use
1. Built-up (maintained buildings and hard landscaping) have a plant species richness of zero.
2. The previously developed land category is relevant for derelict sites within a broad habitat type where plant species
found in that habitat are likely to reclaim the site if left to do so over a defined period of time. BRE have assumed this is
the case for land found within the grassland, heath, derelict, gardens, allotments and urban parkland habitats. It has not
been assumed for other categories as BRE Global are unable to confirm an appropriate period over which planting will
re-establish itself on derelict land within these other broad habitat types.
3. A period of 5 to 10, 10 to 20 and 20 to 30 year’s dereliction is used; the species richness figures against each period for
a particular habitat type are based on a re-establishment rate of 30% of richness, 75% and 100% respectively.
4. BRE have split the ‘Built up and gardens’ category from the Countryside Survey into ‘Gardens, allotments and urban
parkland’, ‘Derelict’ and ‘Built-up’ habitat types. This split is to reflect the differing impact of building on this type of land.
306
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To encourage actions taken to enhance the ecological value of the site as a result of development.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Ecologist's report and recommendations
(Except buildings on HM Prison sites where two credits are available for compliance with criteria 1 and 2)
1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed by the client or their project representative by the end of the
Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to report on enhancing the ecology of the site, and:
a. The SQE provides an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for the enhancement of the site’s ecology.
b. The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE (see also CN4).
2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been, or will be, implemented in
the final design and build.
Two credits - Increase in ecological value
(All building types except those on HM Prison sites)
3. The criteria of the first credit are met.
4. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been implemented in the final
design and build, and the suitably qualified ecologist confirms that this will result in an increase in ecological value of the
site, with an increase of six plant species or greater (refer also to Compliance note CN8 for alternative means of
compliance).
5. The increase in plant species has been calculated using the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator, using actual plant species
numbers.
One credit - Simple buildings specific
6. The project team has sought recommendations from recognised ‘local’ ecological expertise and generic guidance in the
form of published guidance documents, information leaflets to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological
measures that enhance the ecological value of the site. These measures may include:
a. Planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife
b. Adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no or low use of residual pesticides)
c. Installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.
Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose
of enhancing the ecological value of the site.
OR
Criteria 1 to 5 are applicable as an alternative means of demonstrating compliance with this issue.
307
Land use
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria Local expertise
See criterion 6.
Note that guidance may be sought from bodies such as The Wildlife Trust, The Royal
Horticultural Society, etc. to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological
measures that enhance the ecological value of the site.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
Timing of ecologist's
survey and report
See criterion 1.
The suitably qualified ecologist must be appointed to carry out site surveys of
existing site ecology, on which their report is based (or to provide verification where
the report is prepared by others) at the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or
equivalent) in order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement.
CN5
Appropriate
recommendations
See criterion 1.
Appropriate recommendations for enhancing the ecological value of the site are to
include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation
relating to protected species and habitats.
These recommendations may include ecological recommendations as detailed in
the definitions.
CN6
Guidance for
ecologists and
assessors
Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New
Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note
to be provided on the BREEAM website.
CN7
Plant species
See criterion 4.
Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional and/or UK Priority
Species/Habitats, or those species specified by the SQE with a known attraction or
benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number
General
308
Ref
Terms
Description
of species on site, as well as general enhancement.The planting area, density and
mixture of different species must be specified with input from both the SQE and the
landscape architect (where employed), to address the following three points;
The enhancement of the ecological value of the site
The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the
species within the habitat
Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.
CN8
Increase in
ecological value
See criterion 4.
BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of
the assessed site. The second credit is achieved on the basis that an increase in
ecological value post development is achieved, compared to the value of the site
pre-development. Where the SQE identifies that an increase in the ecological value
of the site can be achieved without meeting the target of an increase of 6 plant
species the credit can be awarded if there is clear justification which addresses the
following three points:
The enhancement of the ecological value of the site
The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the
species within the habitat
Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.
The BREEAM Assessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQE when
determining compliance for this issue.
CN9
Infill construction on
existing sites with
limited space for
ecological
enhancements or
overriding security
requirements
See criterion 1.
Where it is not possible to implement ecological enhancements within the
construction zone due to overriding security issues, or where space for ecological
enhancements within the zone is severely limited, ecological enhancements made to
other areas of the site can be taken into account and used to determine the number
of BREEAM credits achieved. These enhancements must be made within the
boundary of the wider existing development and be planned and commissioned
on a similar time scale to the assessed development. Examples of instances where
this Compliance note may apply include new ‘infill’ building developments within
existing HM Prison sites, further and higher education campuses, retail or business
parks.
Methodology
For the methodology used to calculate the increase in plant species refer to the Methodology section in BREEAM issue LE 03
Minimising impact on existing site ecology – Methodology
Evidence
Criteria
All
309
Land use
Criteria
5
A completed copy of the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04
calculator
For large mixed-useor multi-building
evidence from the client or principal
contractor confirming any planting will be
6
-
For large mixed-use/multi-building
evidence from the client or principal
contractor confirming any planting will be
Ecological recommendations
Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site. Measures may
include but are not limited to:
1. The planting of locally appropriate native species or non-native species with a known attraction or benefit to local
wildlife.
2. The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides).
3. The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.
4. Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key times of the year
(e.g. breeding seasons).
5. The proper integration, design and maintenance of SUDs (such as rain gardens), green roofs, green walls,
community orchards, community allotments etc.
Other information
Flora Locale (www.floralocale.org) may be a useful site for finding suppliers of British flora.
Biological Records Centres and the National Biological Network collate data on species findings for the UK. Design teams,
assessors and ecologists can support the collation of species data by providing survey records from the assessed
development to the local Biological Records Centre (www.brc.ac.uk/irecord) or nationally to the National Biological Network.
310
Minimum standards
2
No
Aim
To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site and the surrounding area’s biodiversity.
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits
1. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed prior to commencement of activities onsite and they confirm that
all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to the protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with during
the design and construction process.
2. Where a landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least the first five
years after project completion in accordance with BS 42020:2013 1 Section 11.1. This is to be handed over to the
building owner/occupants for use by the grounds maintenance staff.
3. Where, in addition to criteria 1 and 2, measures to improve the assessed sites long term biodiversity are adopted,
according to Table - 53. The BREEAM credits can then be awarded as follows:
No. of credits
No. of additional measures
1
2
2
4
Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) confirms that some of the additional measures listed in Table - 53 are not
applicable to the assessed development, the credits can be awarded as follows:
Applicable additional measures
All
4
3
2
1
Credits
Number of additional measures to assess
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
4
4
3
2
1
1BS 42020: 2013 Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning Development, BSI 2013
311
Land use
Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity
Ref
Additional measure for the improvement of long term biodiversity
1
The principal contractor nominates a Biodiversity Champion with the authority to influence site
activities and ensure that detrimental impacts onsite biodiversity are minimised in line with the
recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
2
The principal contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the
project. Specific training must be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are
aware of how to avoid damaging site ecology during operations onsite. Training should be
based on the findings and recommendations for protection of ecological features highlighted
within a report prepared by a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
3
The principal contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their
effectiveness throughout key stages of the construction process. The requirement commits the
principal contractor to make such records available where publicly requested.
4
Where a new ecologically valuable habitat appropriate to the local area is created. This includes a
habitat that supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is
nationally, regionally or locally important itself; including any UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP)
priority habitats1 Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) habitats, those protected within statutory
sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites identified in local plans. Local biodiversity
expertise should be sought during the Preparation and Brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to help
identify species of local biodiversity importance onsite and ensure that the proposals support
local priorities.
5
Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist onsite, the contractor programmes site works to
minimise disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and soft
landscape have been, or will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise
disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works may have a significant impact on, for example, breeding
birds, flowering plants, seed germination, amphibians etc. Actions such as phased clearance of
vegetation may help to mitigate ecological impacts. This additional requirement will be achieved
where a clear plan has been produced detailing how activities will be timed to avoid any impact
on site biodiversity in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
6
Education buildings (pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges only)
A partnership has been set up by the design team with a local group that has wildlife expertise
(e.g. local wildlife trust or similar local body) and the group has:
a. Provided advice early in the design process regarding protecting and/or providing habitat
for species of local importance on the site.
b. Provided advice to ensure the design is in keeping with the local environment. In particular
this should draw on their local knowledge of any features or species of ecological interest
on or near the site.
c. Provided, or will continue to provide, ongoing support and advice to the educational
establishment to help them manage, maintain and develop the outdoor space in the
longer term.
A suitable starting point for discussion with the local wildlife group would be to ask for advice on
how to take account of the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) in the school/college landscape
design.
1For information on UK BAP Priority Habitats refer to Joint Nature Conservation Committee: www.jncc.defra.gov.uk,
312
None.
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
apply.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Where additional
measures are not
applicable
See criterion 1,2 and
3.
In all cases it is necessary to employ a Suitably Qualified Ecologist to achieve these
credits. As a minimum the ecologist must provide the following in writing:
1. Confirmation that criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved
2. Clarification on how many of the additional measures for criterion 3 are
applicable and have been achieved
3. Guidance on how to achieve additional measure 4 (where possible).
Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist confirms that none of the additional
measures are applicable (due to the nature of the site and its surroundings) full
credits can be awarded for demonstrating compliance with criteria 1 and 2.
General
CN4
Building specific
CN5
Education (preschool, school and
sixth form college
buildings only)
Additional measure
6: Ongoing support
and advice
This could take the form of meetings several times a year with staff/pupils/students
working party to help them plan conservation and ecological enhancement work,
or activities relating the ecology in or near the school or college grounds.
313
Land use
Ref
Terms
Description
CN6
Prisons
Additional measure
4
The Prison Service Biodiversity Action (PSBAP)1 should be referred to for prison
buildings where additional measure 4 is being assessed. For habitats that are not
listed in the PSBAP guidance on appropriate habitat creation should be sought
from the National Biodiversity Network and the UKBAP.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Criteria
All
6
Where Additional Measure 6 is assessed:
1. Scope of the partnership.
2. Details and remit of wildlife group.
3. A description of the process for
ongoing support that the group
commit to give to the partnership.
4. Details of the meetings and actions to
date.
Where Additional Measure 6 is assessed:
Documentary evidence from the design team
or wildlife group detailing as a minimum
meetings, actions, advice given, framework
for future support including a timetable for
meetings and events.
Biodiversity
Biodiversity is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal, plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the
habitats that they depend upon.
Biodiversity Action Plan
A plan which sets specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time bound conservation targets for species and
habitats. The JNCC (Joint Nature Conservation Committee) website www.jncc.defra.gov.uk provides information on
Biodiversity Action Plans and the UK Post-2010 Biodiversity Framework.
Biodiversity Champion
An individual formally tasked by the principal contractor with the responsibility for monitoring and influencing site
activities and minimising detrimental impact on biodiversity. The individual must have sufficient authority and time on
site and knowledge of ecology and construction to carry out the role. The Biodiversity Champion does not have to be
1Statement of Action and Strategy for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan, HMPS, 2003.
314
an ecologist or ecological expert. This may be the same person as the Sustainability Champion inMan 03 Responsible
construction practices.
Local group with wildlife expertise
A local group with wildlife expertise could be the local Wildlife Trust or an alternative group that has been involved
with local wildlife conservation/enhancement projects.
Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plans (BAPs)
In March 2003 HM Prison Service produced a Strategy Statement of Action for a Prison Service biodiversity action
plan. The Prison Service BAP comprises three stages, the first of which involves managing SSSI sites. The second stage
addresses the management of sites that are not designated, but which may have land which has local, county or
regional importance on biodiversity. The third stage addresses the rest of the prison estate, principally comprising
urban prisons. The PSBAP falls under the Ministry of Justice (MOJ) Statement for Biodiversity, the MOJ’s commitment
to supporting its diverse biological estate.
Refer to LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
Other information
Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This
information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
BS 42020: 2013 Section 11.1 states that the following should be included in long-term management plans for habitats,
species and biodiversity features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Description and evaluation of features to be managed.
Ecological trends and constraints onsite that could influence management.
Aims and objectives of management.
Appropriate management options for achieving aims and objectives.
Prescriptions for management actions.
Preparation of a work schedule (including an annual work plan capable of being rolled forward over a five year period).
Body or organisation personnel responsible for implementation of the plan.
Monitoring and remedial measures (see 11.2).
Funding resources and mechanisms to ensure sustainable long-term delivery of the proposed management.
BS 42020: 2013 also states that the level of detail required for any given site should be that which is necessary to ensure the
effective management of the biodiversity features present.
315
Pollution
Pollution
316
Pollution
Minimum standards
3
No
Aim
To reduce the level of greenhouse gas emissions arising from the leakage of refrigerants from building systems.
Assessment criteria
Buildings that use no refrigerants (3 credits)
OR for buildings that use refrigerants
Pre-requisite
Impact of refrigerant (1 to 2 credits)
Leak detection (1 credit).
Three credits - No refrigerant use
1. Where the building does not require the use of refrigerants within its installed plant/systems.
OR alternatively, where the building does require the use of refrigerants, the three credits can be awarded as follows:
Pre-requisite
2. All systems (with electric compressors) must comply with the requirements of BS EN 378:2008 1 (parts 2 and 3) and
where refrigeration systems containing ammonia are installed, the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia Refrigeration
Systems Code of Practice2.
Two credits - Impact of refrigerant
3. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 100
kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity. To calculate the DELC CO2e please refer to the Relevant definitions in the Additional
information section and the Methodology section.
OR
4. Where air-conditioning or refrigeration systems are installed the refrigerants used have a Global Warming Potential
(GWP) ≤ 10.
OR
One credit - Impact of refrigerant
5. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 1000
kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity.
1BS EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements, BSI, 2008
2Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009
317
Pollution
One credit - Leak detection
6. Where systems using refrigerants have a permanent automated refrigerant leak detection system installed; OR where
an in-built automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leakage is installed. In all instances a robust and tested
refrigerant leak detection system must be installed and must be capable of continuously monitoring for leaks.
7. The system must be capable of automatically isolating and containing the remaining refrigerant(s) charge in response to
a leak detection incident. A system which initiates an automated shut down and pump down of the refrigerant into a
separate storage tank would meet this criterion.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment criteria
Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2 – Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
If the building is designed in such a way that it avoids the need for refrigerant
containing building services, and therefore no 'refrigerant using' building services or
systems will be specified for the fit out, then the available credits can be awarded by
default (this would apply to Option 2 only).
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
Refrigerant charge
of less than 6kg
For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only where the refrigerant
charge in each unit is less than 6kg, the credit for leak detection and containment
can be awarded by default. This is on the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant
leak due to system failure is minimised, as individual leaks from each system will be
small where leakage occurs, and therefore there is little life cycle benefit of requiring
leak detection equipment on each small system.
General
CN4
318
Terms
Ref
Pollution
Description
Note: solutions such as this may be less energy efficient and as such may impact on
the achievement of credits under Ene 01.
CN5
Specification of
multiple systems
Where more than one air conditioning/refrigeration system is installed in the
building, the assessor must source the relevant technical data for each system and
enter it in to the Pol 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the weighted
average DELC for the multiple installation and the BREEAM credits can be awarded
or withheld accordingly.
CN6
Leak detection See
criteria 6 and 7.
The refrigerant leak detection criteria are still applicable in instances where any type
of non-solid refrigerant is present, i.e. even if the refrigerant meets BREEAM’s DELC
CO2e benchmark(s). Exceptions to this are systems that use natural and
environmentally benign refrigerants, such as air and water (for example lithium
bromide/water absorption chillers) and installations of small multiple hermetic
systems, where compliance note 1 above applies. These types of
system/refrigerants will achieve the leak detection credit by default.
Methodology
The number of Pol 01 BREEAM credits achieved is determined by the assessor using the BREEAM Pol 01 calculator.
The Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions (DELC) per kW of cooling capacity are calculated using the following equation:
[Refigerant loss operational + refrigerant loss system retirement] × GWP
Cooling Capacity (kW)
Where:
Refrigerant loss operational: (Ref charge x Sys op-life x (L1 + L2 + S1 + S2)) /100
Refrigerant loss system retirement = Ref charge x (1 - Ref RecEff /100)
Where:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg)
Sysop-life: System operational lifetime (years)
Ref RecEff : Refrigerant Recovery Efficiency factor (%)
L1: Annual Leakage Rate (units: % Refrigerant charge)
L2: Annual Purge Release factor (% Refrigerant charge)
S1: Annual Service Release (% Refrigerant charge)
S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (%Refrigerant charge loss/year)
GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant
Cooling/heating capacity (kW).
The following default values must be used, where system specific data is not available:
System operational design life (*years): See Table - 54
Refrigerant recovery efficiency factor (%): - 95%
Annual leakage rates (% refrigerant charge): See Table - 55
Annual purge release factor (% refrigerant charge):- 0.5 (if the system does not require an annual purge, zero should be used).
319
Pollution
Annual service release (% refrigerant charge): 0.25 (this applies where the system requires opening up to carry out the annual
service. For systems which do not require opening up, there will be no associated annual release of refrigerant, therefore a
default of zero should be used).
Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year): 1% (based on a failure rate of 1 in 100 systems).
The following information must be sourced from the design team’s mechanical and electrical engineer and/or system
manufacturer:
System type
Refrigerant charge (kg)
GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant(s)
Cooling/heating capacity (kW).
Table - 54: Default system operational design life values
System type
Default system operational design life values (years)
Small/medium capacity chillers
15
Large capacity chillers
20
Unitary Split
15
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system
15
All other systems
10
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for Air Conditioning units and the British Refrigeration Association’s
(BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI (2006)1
Note: The following should be considered when determining whether the system specified is defined as
small/medium/large:
Large capacity chiller: Centrifugal compressor
Medium capacity chiller: Scroll/screw compressor
Small capacity chiller : Scroll compressor
Table - 55: Average annual leakage rates for the UK
Annual leakage rate
(% of charge per annum)
System type
Cold storage and display systems
Integral cabinets
3%
Split/condensing units
18%
Centralised
19%
1Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification.
320
Pollution
Annual leakage rate
(% of charge per annum)
System type
Air conditioning systems
Unitary split
15%
Small scale chillers
10%
Medium/large chillers
5%
Heat pumps
6%
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for Air Conditioning units and also Table 2 of the Market
Transformation Programmes Briefing Note for Commercial Refrigeration no. 36, ‘Direct Emission of Refrigerant Gases’
(version 1.2). The figures are based on the average of the leakage rates from the four separate studies reported in Table
2 (where a range is reported the higher value was used).
Evidence
Criteria
Final post- construction stage
All
3 and 5
Completed copy of the Pol 01 calculator tool
Direct effect life cycle (DELC) carbon dioxide equivalent
A measure of the effect on global warming arising from emissions of refrigerant (in the case of this BREEAM
assessment issue) from the equipment to the atmosphere over its lifetime (units: kgCO2eq.). The calculation involves
estimating the total refrigerant release over the period of operation and subsequent conversion to an equivalent
mass of carbon dioxide. Should the system use several different refrigerants, e.g. a primary refrigerant and a
secondary coolant, or a cascade system, individual calculations are made for all refrigerants which contribute to the
direct effect (see Methodology section for a description of how DELC is calculated).
Moderately airtight enclosure
This can be defined as an enclosure that does not produce a draught or significant fresh air ingress that would dilute
any leaked refrigerant gas (dilution may prevent detection).
Ozone
Refrigerant leak detection
An automated permanently installed multi-point sensing system, designed to continuously monitor the atmosphere
in the vicinity of refrigeration equipment and, in the event of detection, raise an alarm. The system may be aspirated or
321
Pollution
have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available including infra-red,
semi-conductor or electro-chemical.
Refrigerant recovery
The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container.
Refrigerant pump down
The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to the
environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United Kingdom 1990
Environmental Protection Act unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are classified as either controlled or
hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the environment, but there are procedures regarding
transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate disposal. Article 16 of EC regulation 2037/2000 specifies that
used CFCs and HCFCs must be recovered for destruction or recycling/reclamation.
Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system
This is normally defined as that included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List 1 (or
an equivalent list). Where the system does not fall within the scope of the ECA energy technology product list or an
equivalent list, the design team must demonstrate to the assessor that the system specified meets the principles of
the scheme as far as is applicable.
Small scale white goods
These should be defined as domestic scale white goods and would also include small individual display cabinets, for
example drinks cabinets in small retail shops.
Systems using refrigerants
The criteria of this issue apply to air conditioning and refrigeration systems installed in the building for the following
uses, regardless of the systems refrigerant charge (kg), including:
Comfort cooling and/or space heating (including assessment of refrigerants in heat pumps)
Cold storage, including commercial food/drink display cabinets but excluding small scale white goods (see
definition above)
Process based cooling loads e.g. servers/I.T equipment.
Global Warming Potential (GWP)
GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the
primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the refrigerant, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
(IPCC) methodology using a 100-year Integrated Time Horizon (or ITH) should be applied.
Refrigerant
There are three main make-ups of refrigerants:
1. Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon. Because they do
not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be one of the least damaging to the
earth's ozone layer.
2. Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine, and carbon.
These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the environment as some
other refrigerants.
3. Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry high
amounts of chlorine so they are known for being the most hazardous to the ozone layer.
The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocol. Phase out
programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new build
and most existing situations. The industry’s favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are often potent global
warming contributors. Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are therefore
preferred long term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all buildings,
provided health and safety issues are fully addressed.
The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) hosts a HCFC Help Centre which contains information about the
1www.etl.decc.gov.uk
322
Pollution
management and phase out of HCFCs and alternatives to HCFCs in the refrigeration and air conditioning sector
http://www.uneptie.org/ozonaction/topics/hcfc.asp.
Other information
Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP
R-Number
Chemical name
GWP
100-yr
R-30
Dichloromethane
9
R-170
Ethane
3
R-290
Propane
3
R-600
Butane
3
R-600a
Isobutane
3
R-702
Hydrogen
5.8
R-717
Ammonia
0
R-718
Water
0.2 ±0.2
R-729
Air (nitrogen, oxygen, argon)
1
R-744
Carbon dioxide
1
R1150
Ethylene
3
R-1234yf
2,3,3,3-Tetrafluoropropene
4
R-1270
Propylene
3
Sources: The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) ‘2006 Report of the Refrigeration, Air conditioning and
Heat Pumps Technical Options Committee’ (page 32-34): http://ozone.unep.org/teap/Reports/RTOC/index.shtml
Appendix A of the Department of Trade and Industry guidance ‘Refrigerant and Air Conditioning CFC and HCFC Phase
Out: Advice on Alternatives and Guidelines for Users’.http://www.berr.gov.uk/files/file29101.pdf
BS EN 378-1:2008+A2:2012: Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. Part 1:
Basic requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria - Annex E.
The formula used to calculate the Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions in BREEAM is based on the Total Equivalent Warming
Impact (TEWI) calculation method for new stationary refrigeration and air conditioning systems. TEWI is a measure of the
global warming impact of equipment that takes into account both direct emissions (as assessed in this BREEAM issue) and
indirect emissions produced through the energy consumed in operating the equipment (which is assessed in the BREEAM
energy section).
Refer to BS EN 378-1 1 and the British Refrigeration Association’s (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI for further
details. The BRA publication also includes sectoral release factors for new systems designed to best practice standards.
323
Pollution
REAL Zero
The refrigeration and air conditioning sector supported by the Carbon Trust is working across all sectors of business and
industry, to help achieve significant reductions in carbon emissions due to refrigerant leakage from installed systems. The
Institute of Refrigeration led initiative, Real Zero, is building a clearer understanding of where and why leakage occurs as well as
how to prevent it.
For further information including guidance notes, calculators/tools and case study information
visit:http://www.ior.org.uk/real-zero
1BS EN 378-1 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements Part 1: Basic requirements,
definitions, classification and selection criteria. BSI, 2008
324
Pollution
Pol 02 NO emissions
x
Minimum standards
No
Aim
To contribute to a reduction in national NO emission levels through the use of low emission heat sources in the building.
x
Assessment criteria
Up to three credits (all building types except Industrial)
1. Where the plant installed to meet the building’s delivered heating and hot water demand has, under normal operating
conditions, a NO emission level (measured on a dry basis at 0% excess O2) as follows:
x
NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh)
x
Credits
≤ 100 mg/kWh
1 credit
≤ 70 mg/kWh
2 credits
≤ 40 mg/kWh
3 credits
Two credits (Industrial building types only)
NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh)
x
Credits
Office and associated areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh
1 credit
Operational areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh
1 credit
2. Report via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool the direct and indirect NO emissions in mg/kWh and energy
x
consumption in kWh/m2/yr arising from systems installed to meet the building's space heating, cooling and hot water
demands.
None
325
Pollution
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment
criteria
Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option.
Option 2 – Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment
criteria
This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on
how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3
Country specific
guidance
CN4
New build
extensions to
existing buildings
If the heating/hot water demand for the new extension is being met by an existing
system, then the NO emission level for the existing system must be assessed against
x
the criteria of this issue.
CN5
Highly insulated
building
Where the heating load for a highly insulated building is less than or equal to 7% of the
heat load for a Building Regulations compliant building of the same size and type, one
credit can be awarded regardless of the NO emission level. Figures used for
x
calculations of the percentage of total heat demand must be based on the output from
approved building energy calculation software.
CN6
NO data
x
provided in
different units
Where NO data is provided in different units or at a level of excess oxygen greater than
x
zero, the manufacturer/supplier will need to be asked to convert this to comply with the
BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may adjust the figure using the relevant
correction factors provided in the Methodology section. Note that the conversion
factors provided do not apply where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are
being assessed. Where CHP systems are used, the information must be obtained from
the system manufacturer.
CN7
Grid electricity
Where grid electricity is used to supply a heating system, the NO should be assumed to
x
be 617 mg/kWh for the purpose of BREEAM. This is to reflect the likely NO emissions
x
fromgrid electricity over the next 10 years based on the predicted generation mix in the
UK.
General
326
Pollution
Ref
Terms
Description
CN8
Heat recovery
Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NO emissions for the purpose of this
x
issue.
CN9
Open flues
No credits may be awarded for open flue heating or hot water systems.
CN10
Water heating
benchmark and
point of use
heaters
Where the water heating can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the buildings
total energy consumption, these credits can be awarded based solely on the NO
x
emissions from space heating.
CN11
Assessment and
reporting of a
building'sNO
x
emissions from
cooling
At present the Pol 02 issue does not benchmark and award credits for NO emission
x
levels associated with a building's cooling demands. To facilitate possible future
benchmarking of this kind and alignment with European Standards on the Sustainability
of Construction Works, BREEAM does require, as a condition of achieving any credits for
this issue, the reporting of both direct and indirect NO emissions resulting from
x
meeting the buildings heating, cooling and hot water demands.
In the case of indirect emissions, this refers primarily to emissions associated with grid
electricity, where grid electricity is a/the source of energy for the building's heating,
cooling and/or hot water demands. Direct NO emissions are those resulting from the
x
burning of fuel on site or in the assessed building to meet heating, cooling and/or hot
water demands, for example via a gas/oil fired/biomass boiler.
CN12
Industrial
Office/operational
areas not present
First credit: Where the assessed building is designed without an office area, the first
credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the
operational area benchmark is met.
Second credit: Where the operational area of the assessed building is designed to be
untreated, the second credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where
compliance with the office area benchmark is met.
Where there is no office area and no heating in the operational area, this issue is not
assessed.
Methodology
Conversion factors
Manufacturers should be asked to supply NO emissions data in mg/kWh, measured on a dry basis. Where this is not possible
x
the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in ppm, mg/MJ, mg/m3 or wet.
It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and are likely to give conservative answers.
This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits achieved. Note that these conversion factors are not applicable
where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being used. Please see the calculation procedures below for further
details on assessing CHP systems for this issue.
1. Figures in mg/m3 should be multiplied by 0.859 in order to gain emissions in mg/kWh1 A conversion may also be
necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below)
2. Figures in parts per million (ppm) should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to obtain mg/kWh. A conversion may also be
necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below)
1BS EN 15502-1:2012 Gas-fired heating boilers Part 1: General requirements and tests.
327
Pollution
3. Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to show emissions in mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6 MJ). A conversion may
also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).
Wet NO conversion factor
x
This issue’s criteria are based on dry NO values – almost all manufacturers will quote emissions measured on a dry basis.
x
However if wet NO figures are supplied, these will need to be converted to dry. The following formula should be used to
x
determine the wet NO conversion factor 1:
x
Conversion factor c = 100/(100-y)
Where y is the % water vapour content measured in the gas.This figure should be obtained from the manufacturer.
Excess oxygen correction
If a NO emission rate is quoted by the manufacturer in mg/m3 or ppm, then it should be established at what % excess oxygen
x
this emission was measured. The greater the amount of excess oxygen in the flue gases at the time of measurement, the
more 'diluted' the NO emissions. It is therefore important to convert any emission rate back to 0% excess oxygen. For the
x
purpose of BREEAM, the following conversion factors can be used for the most frequently used rates supplied by
manufacturers:
Table - 57: Excess oxygen conversion factors
% Excess O 2
Conversion (c)
3%
x 1.17
6%
x 1.40
15%
x 3.54
Conversion factor c = 20.9/(20.9 – x)
Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air.
Calculating NO emission levels from combined heat and power (CHP) systems
x
Where CHP systems are specified, it is only necessary to consider the heat related NO emissions for the assessment of this
x
issue.
NO emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the respective power outputs. A NO emission rate equivalent to
x
x
the current rate for grid electricity should be assumed for the electrical output (i.e. 617 mg/kWh supplied), and the remaining
NO should be allocated to the heat output. Only the heat-related component is then compared with the benchmark scale.
x
The following formula should be used to determine this:
X = (A - B)/C
Where:
Term
Description
X
NO emissions per unit of heat supplied (mg/kWh heat).
x
A
NO emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWhelec), i.e. the NO emitted by the CHP
x
x
1BS EN 14792:2005 Stationary Source emissions - Determination of mass concentration of nitrogen oxides (NO ) - Reference
method: Chemiluminescence.
328
x
Term
Pollution
Description
system per unit of electricity generated. It is essential that this figure is obtained from the
installer/supplier of the system and should be based on the system when operating at full load.
B
NO emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWhelec) this should be
x
assumed to be 617 mg/kWh.
C
Heat to Electricity Ratio of the CHP scheme.
The above methodology determines the net NO emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared with central
x
generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where x is calculated to be negative, it should be
assumed to be zero.
Calculating the average NO emission levels from multiple systems
x
Where the CHP or other heating system type operates in conjunction with another system, an average NO emission rate
x
should be used based on the ratio of power output from each source, i.e. multiply the emissions of each system by the
percentage of heat demand it supplies and total these values.
This is likely to be the case where a CHP system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and
therefore a secondary heating system is required.
The following formula can be used for such cases:
(
(
)
)
(
)
AverageNOX = N 1 × H 1/ HT + N 2 × (H 2 / HT ) … + Nn × (Hn / HT )
Where:
Term
Description
N1
NO emissions rate for source 1
x
N2
NO emissions rate for source 2
x
Nn
NO emissions rate for source n
x
HT
Total heat output from all sources
H1
Heat output from source 1
H2
Heat output from source 2
Hn
Heat output from source n
Calculating NO emission levels from heat pumps
x
For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, either of the formulas below can be used to determine the contributing NO
x
emissions from a heat pump:
MHeat =
M Elec ×WElec
WHeat
OR
MHeat =
M Elec
EER
329
Pollution
Where:
Term
Description
MHeat
NO emission per unit of heat generated in mg/kWhHeat
x
MElec
NO emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be 617 mg/kWhElec
x
WElect
Total quantity of electricity consumed by heat pump kWhElec
WHeat
Total quantity of heat produced by heat pump kWhHeat
EER
Energy Efficiency Ratio (also referred to as Co-efficient of Performance)
Evidence
Criteria
All
1-2
Calculations showing the average NO
x
emissions for the building where multiple
systems are present.
Approved building energy calculation software
NO emissions
x
NO emissions are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NO reacts with heat and sunlight to
x
x
produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain which has a
detrimental effect on ecosystems. For the purposes of BREEAM, NOx emission levels are required in units of mg/kWh,
measured on a dry basis at 0% excess oxygen levels.
Other information
Some systems may find it difficult to achieve credits in this issue, including:
Heat pumps
Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission rates higher than those required by BREEAM
and are therefore typically unable to achieve credits under this issue. However, there is a formula for determining NO
x
emissions from heat pumps in the Methodology section. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat pumps
is recognised in the energy section of BREEAM.
330
Pollution
District heating
District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NO emission rates higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM
x
credits.
Biomass
Biomass systems are recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion, by employing a renewable fuel source
(provided it is sustainably sourced). However, biomass can produce a significant amount of NO and so may not achieve this
x
credit. They may, however, gain recognition in the energy section of BREEAM.
331
Pollution
Minimum standards
5
No
Aim
To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to public sewers and watercourses, thereby minimising the risk and impact
of localised flooding on and off site, watercourse pollution and other environmental damage.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts;
Flood risk - (1 to 2 credits)
Surface water run-off - (2 credits)
Minimising water course pollution - (1 credit).
Up to two credits - Flood resilience
Two credits - Low flood risk
1. Where a site specific flood risk assessment (FRA) confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as
having a low annual probability of flooding (in accordance with current best practice national planning guidance). The
FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see CN6).
One credit - Medium/high flood risk
2. Where a site specific FRA confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or high
annual probability of flooding and is not in a functional floodplain (in accordance with current best practice national
planning guidance). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see CN6).
3. To increase the resilience and resistance of the development to flooding, one of the following must be achieved:
a. The ground level of the building and access to both the building and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at
least 600 mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located (see CN9
); OR
b. The final design of the building and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate consultant
in accordance with the hierarchy approach outlined in section 5 of BS 8533:2011 1.
Two credits - Surface water run-off
Pre-requisite
4. An appropriate consultant is appointed to carry out, demonstrate and/or confirm the development's compliance with
the following criteria:
1BS 8533:2011 Assessing and managing flood risk in development - Code of Practice, 2011
332
Pollution
One credit
5. Where drainage measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the watercourses
(natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. This should comply
at the 1 year and 100 year return period events.
6. Calculations include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice
planning guidance (see definitions).
One credit
7. Where flooding of property will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused either by extreme rainfall
or a lack of maintenance); AND
EITHER
8. The post development run-off volume, over the development lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the
assessed site’s development for the 100 year 6 hour event, including an allowance for climate change (see criterion 13).
9. Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration or other
SuDS techniques.
OR (only where criteria 8 and 9 for this credit cannot be achieved)
10. Justification from the Appropriate Consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltration
or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options.
11. The post development peak rate of run-off is reduced to the limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is defined as the
highest flow rate from the following options:
a. The pre development 1-year peak flow rate; OR
b. The mean annual flow rate Qbar; OR
c. 2L/s/ha.
Note that for the 1-year peak flow rate the 1 year return period event criterion applies (as described in the peak run-off
criteria above).
12. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in
place.
13. For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance
with current best practice planning guidance.
One credit - Minimising water course pollution
14. There is no discharge from the developed site for rainfall up to 5mm (confirmed by the Appropriate Consultant).
15. In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollution prevention treatment is
provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques.
16. Where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil (see Compliance notes for a
list of areas), separators (or an equivalent system) are installed in surface water drainage systems.
17. Where the building has chemical/liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted to the site drainage system
(i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural watercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding
failure).
18. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of
documents such as Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 (PPG 3)1 and/or where applicable the SUDS manual2 For areas
where vehicle washing will be taking place, pollution prevention systems must be in accordance with Pollution Prevention
Guidelines 13 1.
19. A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the building/site occupiers.
20. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS must
be in place.
21. Where present, all external storage and delivery areas designed and detailed in accordance with the current best
practice planning guidance (see CN3 for further information).
1Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 13 Vehicle washing and cleaning, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage
Service, 2007
333
Pollution
Surface water run-off - Two credits - Simple buildings
For 'simple buildings', the below criteria should be applied in place of the surface water run-off criteria above (please see CN2
for more information).
22. Either of the following criteria is met:
a. There is a decrease in the impermeable area by 50% or more, from the pre-existing impermeable hard surfaces; OR
b. Where all run-off from the roof for rainfall depths up to 5 mm from all new and existing parts of the building have
been managed on site using source control methods
OR
Surface water run-off - One credit - Simple buildings
23. Either of the following criteria is met:
a. There is no increase in the impermeable surfaces as a result of the new construction; OR
b. If there is an increase in the impermeable surface as a result of the new construction then the following must be met:
i. Hard standing areas - where there is an extension or increase in the hard standing areas and hence an increase in
the total impermeable area as a result of the new construction, the hard standing area must be permeable or be
provided with onsite SuDS to allow full infiltration of the additional volume, to achieve the same end result. The
permeable hard standing must include all pavements and public rights of way, car parks, driveways and nonadoptable roads, but can exclude small garden paths which will drain onto a naturally permeable surface.
ii. Building (new build/extension) - where there is an increase in building footprint, extending onto any previously
permeable surfaces, the additional run-off caused by the area of the new build/extension must be managed on
site using an appropriate SuDS technique for rainfall depths up to 5 mm.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
Applicable
assessment
criteria
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment
criteria
Flood risk (1-2 credits available)
Two credits
1. Criterion 1.
OR
One credit
2. Criteria 2 and 3
Surface water run-off (1-2 credits available)
Two credits
334
Ref
Terms
Pollution
Description
3. Criterion 22
OR
One credit
4. Criterion 23
Minimising water course pollution (1 credit available)
One credit
5. Criteria 15 to 21
6. Criterion 14
Exemplary level credit
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this
BREEAM issue:
7. Criteria 4 to 13
Country specific
CN3
External storage
and delivery areas
guidance
documents
See
Criterion 21.
The following lists the standards/building regulations relevant for the assessment of
this issue in a specific UK country:
Scotland and Northern Ireland
For assessment in Scotland and Northern Ireland, the 'Pollution Prevention Pays
Guidelines' from the Environment Agency reference the following documents which are
relevant:
Introducing Pollution Prevention: PPG1
Above ground oil storage tanks: PPG2
The use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems: PPG3
Working at demolition and construction sites: PPG6
Vehicle washing and cleaning: PPG13
Managing firewater and major spillages: PPG28
Dewatering underground ducts and chambers: PPG20
Incident response planning: PPG21
Dealing with spills: PPG22
Drums and intermediate bulk container: PPG26
Underground storage tanks: PPG27
Wales and England
For assessment in Wales and England, the recommendations of the Environment
Agency’s publication Pollution Prevention Pays Guidance, 2013 3 should be followed.
General
CN4
Alternative
standards and
recommendations
from an
appropriate
statutory body
See criteria 1 and
2.
None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded
against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding
implications are too great (this includes a recommendation given by the statutory body
even where such a recommendation cannot or is not statutorily enforced).
Where the local authority (or other statutory body) has set more rigorous criteria than
those above these must be met in order to achieve the relevant credit(s).
CN5
Contaminated
Drainage designs for sites must take into account legislation relating to contaminated
335
Pollution
Terms
Description
sites
See criteria 8 and
9.
sites, however in many circumstances even on contaminated sites there may be
opportunities for the installation of some SuDS techniques. Please see the Other
information section for more details.
CN6
Sources of
flooding
See criteria 1 and
2.
The FRA must detail the risk of flooding from the following sources:
1. Fluvial (rivers).
2. Tidal.
3. Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural).
4. Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock
(aquifers).
5. Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers.
6. Reservoirs, canals and other artificial sources.
Please see Other informationsection which provides more detail on the above sources
of flooding.
The content of the FRA should be based on historic trends, but should also account for
predicted changes to the climate which may impact on the flood risk to the site in future.
CN7
Functional flood
plain
See criterion 3.
The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual probability’
cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional flood plain. Technical
Guidance to the National Planning Policy Framework 4 defines the functional flood plain
as a ‘zone [that] comprises land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood’.
If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’,
confirmation should be provided from the local planning authority that they are
satisfied with the proposals.
CN8
Flood defences
See criteria 1, 2
and 3.
Third party defences
There are many landscape feature defences, owned by third parties, which due to their
location act as a flood defence by default, e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls
etc. It can be assumed that such embankments will remain in place for the lifetime of the
development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to believe otherwise. For
walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to remain for the design life of the
building.
Ref
Flood risk
Pre existing flood defences
In an area protected by existing flood defences (designed to withstand a certain
magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of flood risk credits can be awarded
where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the following conditions
are met:
1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to be,
or have been, constructed to minimise the risk of flooding to the site and its
locality purely for the purpose of the development and/or its wider master plan.
2. The development is located on previously developed land (as defined by the
criteria in BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection.
3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a flood
event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk. If firm confirmation is not
provided then the credit cannot be awarded.
A statutory body’s local/regional office may be able to provide more information on
existing defences in the area in which the assessed development is located.
336
Pollution
Ref
Terms
Description
CN9
600 mm
threshold See
criterion 3a.
It is accepted that, for buildings located in medium and high risk flood zones, areas of
the car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600
mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to the site,
and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600 mm above the
design flood level) to ensure the building and site do not become an ‘island’ in the event
of a flood.
Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the
topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600 mm
threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical
solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access to
it, meets the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or as
required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the
threshold.
For buildings located in medium or high flood risk zones, any areas used to store
sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and perishable materials, e.g. radioactive
materials, microbiological facilities, server rooms, libraries, etc., must be located above
the 600 mm threshold.
CN10
Level of detail
required in the FRA
for smaller sites
See criteria 1 and
2.
For smaller sites, e.g. less than 1 ha (10,000 m2), the level of detail required in an
acceptable FRA will depend on the size of the site and the arrangement of buildings on
that site. For a small site with a relatively simple arrangement of buildings this might
consist of a brief report. For larger sites with a higher density of buildings a more
detailed assessment would be appropriate.
For small simple sites (2000 m2 and less), an acceptable FRA could be a brief report
carried out by the contractor’s engineer confirming the risk of flooding from all sources
of flooding, including information obtained from the Environment Agency, water
company/sewerage undertaker, other relevant statutory authorities, site investigation
and local knowledge.
CN11
Sites with many
buildings
Where the assessed building is part of a larger development of buildings, there are a
number of options for assessment of the surface water run-off credits:
1. The individual building and its associated hard standing areas can be assessed
independently where the run-off is being dealt with on a building-by-building
basis (i.e. each building has its own dedicated sub-catchment that serves only that
building).
2. When assessing the run-off from a number of buildings (including domestic and
non-domestic buildings) the assessment must take into account the drainage
from the local sub-catchment serving all those dwellings/buildings. Note that
proportioning cannot be used to calculate the percentage of run-off discharging
into the local sub-catchment resulting from just the assessed building.
3. The whole development can be assessed for compliance.
Whichever approach is taken to demonstrate compliance, it must be consistent when
completing both the rate of run-off and volume of run-off calculations.
CN12
Discharge to the
sea or tidal
estuaries
The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by
default if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary or the sea.
The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteria
are to be awarded by default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes would only
carry run-off from the site and that they would not need to cross privately owned land
337
Pollution
Ref
Terms
Description
outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea. Please see Relevant
definitions section for a definition of tidal estuary.
CN13
No change in
impermeable area
Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or
municipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post-development, the peak and
volume rate of run-off requirements for the surface water run-off credits will be met by
default.
Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly showing
the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be provided for
the pre- and post-development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on the
drawings) to show a comparison between the areas of drained impermeable surfaces
pre- and post-development.
In this instance a flood risk assessment must be carried out and any opportunities
identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.
CN14
Limiting discharge
flow rate
See criterion 11.
For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would
require a flow rate of less than 5 l/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5 l/s may
be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.
CN15
Highways and
impermeable
areas
Where new non-adoptable highways are built, including those for developments with a
mixture of buildings, all of the new impermeable surfaces must be included in
calculations to demonstrate compliance with the peak rate of run-off and volume of
run-off criteria. Where buildings are built beside existing highways or where adoptable
highways are built, the impermeable area of the highway does not need to be included
in the calculations.
CN16
Derelict sites.
See criteria 7,
10,11 and 13.
If the site has been derelict for over five years, the Appropriate Consultant must assess
the previous drainage network and make reasonable assumptions to establish
probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice simulation
modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at the relevant
discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will be
required unless accurate data already exists from a previous survey. The resultant
professional report can then be used to determine the pre-development volumes and
rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site must be deemed greenfield
pre-development, assuming Soil type 5 for the calculation of the pre development site
run-off.
CN17
Rainwater
harvesting
BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A5 must be followed
where rainwater harvesting systems are specified for storm water control. To ensure
flood risk is not increased if the rainwater harvesting system is, for some reason,
unavailable, the exceedance flow route capacity provided in accordance with CIRIA
report C635 should ignore the beneficial effect of the rainwater harvesting system.
Watercourse pollution
CN18
338
5 mm discharge
for minimising
watercourse
pollution
See criterion 14.
In a small number of sites it may not be possible for the first 5 mm of rainfall to be
prevented from leaving site completely. Where this is the case, an appropriately
qualified professional must design the system to ensure that the intent of this criterion
has been met as far as possible and provide justifications to explain why the criterion
could not be fully achieved on the site. Where this can be justified, the awarding of the
Ref
Terms
Pollution
Description
water quality credit would not be affected, provided all other relevant criteria have been
achieved.
CN19
5 mm
requirement end-of-pipe
solutions
See criterion 14.
End-of-pipe solutions, such as ponds and basins, will only be deemed to comply with
the 5 mm criteria where the principal run-off control to prevent discharge from the first
5 mm of a rainfall event, is achieved using source control and site control methods.
CN20
5 mm
requirement green roofs
See criterion 14.
Green roofs can be deemed to comply with this requirement for the rain that falls onto
their surface. However evidence is still required to demonstrate that the 5 mm rainfall
from all other hard surfaces on site is being dealt with, to allow this credit to be
awarded.
CN21
Areas that are a
source of pollution
See criteria 16, 17
and 18.
For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, an area that presents a
risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste
disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.
CN22
Extension or infill
building on
existing site
Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill
development, the watercourse pollution criteria apply to areas within the construction
zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction
zone that are affected by the new works, i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed
development.
CN23
Suitable level of
treatment
See criteria 15 to
21.
In all cases the Appropriate Consultant should use their professional judgement to
determine the most appropriate strategy for minimising watercourse pollution.
CN24
Roof plant
See criteria 17,18
and 20.
Roof top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from polluting
substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under the pollution
aspect of this issue, as the main risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse.
Methodology
Calculating peak rate of run-off
Key publications that should be referred to for guidance on calculating the peak rate of run-off include:
1. The SuDS Manual6.
2. Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments 7.
3. Development and Flood Risk, Planning Policy Statement 25 (or where available equivalent national planning policy
guidance/statement) along with the latest version of the practice guide.
4. IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994)8.
5. Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999)9.
339
Pollution
Greenfield sites of less than 50 ha
The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments
(Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). The pro-rata method on the size of catchment detailed in Table 4.2 in The SuDS Manual, CIRIA
C697 (2007) must be followed.
Greenfield sites of 50 ha to 200 ha
The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments
(Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) can be used for these
sites as an alternative, where there is a preference to do so, but only if the catchment is considered to be suitable for its
application.
Greenfield sites of more than 200 ha
The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with the Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology
and Hydrology, 1999) and any subsequent updates. Where the Flood Estimation Handbook is not considered appropriate
for the development IH Report 124 can be used.
Brownfield sites
The calculation of brownfield run-off rates should be as follows:
If the existing drainage is known then it should be modelled using best practice simulation modelling, to determine
the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at discharge points (without allowing surcharge of the system above cover
levels to drive greater flow rates through the discharge points).
If the system is not known, then the brownfield run-off should be calculated using the greenfield run-off models
described above but with a Soil Type 5.
Limiting discharge rate
The limiting discharge for each discharge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site. The
calculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point (this should include
both BREEAM assessed and non BREEAM assessed parts of the development, if applicable). The discharge point is defined as
the point of discharge into the watercourse/sewers (including rivers, streams, ditches, drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices,
public sewers and passages through which water flows, see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section). Where
this calculation results in a peak flow rate of less than 5 l/s, the limiting discharge rate may be increased up to a level of no more
than 5 l/s at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the risk of blockage.
For example, if the flow rate for the 1 year and 100 year events were 4 l/s and 7 l/s respectively, then the limiting discharges
would be 5 l/s and 7 l/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2 l/s and 4 l/s, then a maximum of 5 l/s limiting discharge rate could
be applied to both discharge points.
Sites should not be subdivided to enable higher overall limiting discharge rates to be claimed. It is, however, recognised that
some sites may require more than one discharge point as a result of the local topography or existing surrounding drainage
infrastructure, and in such cases, the limiting discharge flow rate may be increased to a level no more than 5 l/s at each
discharge point. The assessor should seek evidence that the number of discharge points is necessary due to topography
and/or infrastructure limitations. Evidence may be in the form of a topographical map and an explanation from the
Appropriate Consultant as to why multiple discharge points are required, stating that it is not feasible to have fewer
discharge points.
100-year peak rate event: excess volume of run-off
The storage of excess flows from the 100-year event does not necessarily have to be contained within the drainage system
or SuDS features (the features designed solely for the purpose of drainage). Where appropriate, storage of some or all of this
volume can be achieved using temporary surface flooding of areas such as a playing field. Specific consideration should be
given to overland flow routing. Overland flood flows and temporary storage of flood water on the surface must not be so
frequent as to unreasonably inconvenience residents and other users.
340
Pollution
Designing for exceedance guidance
CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedence in urban drainage – good practice 10 should be referred to for
guidance.
Evidence
Criteria
All
8
Information showing the proposed drainage
solution, system failure flood flow routes,
potential flood ponding levels and ground
floor levels
13 and 20
-
Relevant maintenance agreements for the
ownership, long term operation and
maintenance of all specified SuDS.
Please note this section will be revised when the National Standards for Sustainable Drainage and associated regulations
come into force.
Adoptable highways
For the purposes of BREEAM, an ‘adoptable’ highway is a highway that is the responsibility of the highways authority
in terms of installation and maintenance of surface water drainage which only carries run-off from the highway itself.
This means that to fall under the definition of an ‘adoptable highway’ the drainage network must not be directly
connected to any other upstream drainage network (e.g. from a private development) and only handle run-off from
the adoptable highway. Where drainage within the highway will carry run-off from both the highway and housing, it is
not regarded as an 'adoptable' highway. In this instance the drainage design must take account of the highway runoff.
Appropriate consultant
A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SUDS and flood prevention measures and
completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are
required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
Appropriate statutory body
This refers to either the Environment Agency in England and Wales, the Environment Agency, Department of the
Environment, and the Rivers Agency in Northern Ireland, the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland or the
local authorities and internal drainage boards.
Catchment
The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into subcatchments.
341
Pollution
Control devices
Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices are
check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir/orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditional control
devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable of regular
inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not result from
blockage or other malfunction. For guidance on control devices, refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007) and
other best practice guidelines.
Current best practice national planning guidance
These are current at the time of publication: Technical Guidance to the National Planning Policy framework– England;
Planning Policy Statement 15 – Northern Ireland; Scottish Planning Policy 7 - Scotland; Technical Advice Note - Wales.
Design flood level
The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be
determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.
Design flood event
An historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Design storm event
Historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Discharge point
The discharge point(s) is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a
watercourse.
Flood defences
Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood
defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore
preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still
preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk
of flooding purely for the sake of new development.
Flood event
A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph.
Flood probability
The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period.
For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.
Flood risk
The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.
Flood risk assessment
A study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will
have on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment should be prepared according to relevant
planning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRA must account for future climate change and detail any
necessary adaptation measures where/if required. Where more than five years have passed since the FRA was carried
out, evidence would be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has not changed in that time.
Flood storage
The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood
event.
342
Pollution
Flood zones
Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the UK:
PPS25 (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15 (Northern Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise
flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in
Northern Ireland will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to
determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for
England (Table - 58 ). The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or
recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk
Whilst the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK, there
are some differences. The definitions are outlined in Table - 58.
Greenfield
A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more.
Greenfield run-off rate
The rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state.
Hard surfaces
These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and external hard landscaping.
Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded.
Infiltration
The passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on.
Limiting discharge
The limiting discharge is based upon the calculated pre-development flow rate at a discharge point.
Level of pollution prevention treatment
When used in the context of one, two or three levels of treatment for surface water, the treatment level should be
regarded as the number of SuDS components in series through which run-off passes from the originating surface on
which rainfall fell to the site discharge point. Where a SuDS component has more than one treatment process, it might
be considered to provide more than one level of treatment. In these circumstances advice should be sought from the
BREEAM office.
Low risk areas (with respect to watercourse pollution)
Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil
is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas.
Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m3/sec])
This is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the
drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream
point only.
Pre-development
The state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client/developer (or, where
the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current state).
Qbar
An estimation of the mean annual flood flow rate from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood estimations for small
catchments).
Rainwater discharge
Rainwater discharge is the rainwater which flows from the development site to watercourses and sewers. It is also
referred to as run-off.
Run-off
This is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources.
343
Pollution
Sewerage undertaker
This is a Body, typically a water company, with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and also
surface water from roofs and yards of premises.
Soakaways
A sub-surface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water into the ground. As a general point,
soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point
source soakaways should be avoided for road and car park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in
an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators.
SuDS management train
An approach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surface water drainage structures using
SuDS systems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-off rate in
order to minimise man’s impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated with operation and maintenance,
ecology and amenity are aspects which are considered when designing a management system. The management
train incorporates a hierarchy of techniques:
1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
Soakaways
Porous/pervious paving
Roof water directed to garden (rather than piped drains)
Rainwater re-use/harvesting
Green roofs
Other surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that deal with run-off at source.
2. Site/local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
Swales
Pond
Infiltration basins
Detention basin
Larger soakaways
Pervious (porous or permeable) paving
3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include:
Balancing ponds
Wetlands
Large detention basin
SuDS techniques
One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for
example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving,
soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes, green roofs
and underground attenuation storage. For more information refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).
Water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if
the rainfall is particularly intense.
Tidal estuary
A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea and
within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should be
unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flow
of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other sites
which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall water levels in the estuary.
Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidal movements) cannot
be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.
Treatment
Improving the quality of water by physical, chemical and/or biological means.
344
Pollution
Types of oil separator
Class 1 Separators:
These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They should be
used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off.
Class 2 Separators:
These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They are
suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages.
Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators:
Full retention separators:
These treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally equivalent to the flow generated
by a rainfall intensity of 50 mm/hr.
Bypass separators:
These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5 mm/hr. Flows above this rate are allowed to bypass
the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full treatment for high flows.
Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 contains more detailed guidance on the selection and sizing of an appropriate type
of separator.
Volume of run-off
The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres.
Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and postdevelopment.
Watercourses and sewers
A term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages through which water
flows.
Other information
Definition of flood zones by country
Table - 58: Definition of flood zones by country
Definition
England
Wales
Scotland
Low annual probability of
flooding
Zone 1
Less than 1 in 1000 chance
of river and sea flooding (<
0.1%).
Zone A
Considered to be at little
or no risk.
Zone B
If site levels are greater
than the flood levels used
to define adjacent
extreme flood outline.
Little or no risk area
As defined for England.
Medium annual
probability of flooding
Zone 2
Between 1 in 100 and 1 in
1000 chance of river
flooding (1% – 0.1%) and
between a 1 in 200 and 1 in
1000 chance of sea
flooding (0.5% – 0.1%).
Zone B
If site levels are not
greater than the flood
levels used to define
adjacent extreme flood
outline.
Zone C
Equal to or greater* than
0.1% (river, tidal or coastal
flooding).
* For the purposes of
BREEAM assume upper
Low to medium risk area
Watercourse, tidal or
coastal flooding in the
range 0.1% – 0.5%
(1:1000 – 1:200).
345
Pollution
Definition
England
Wales
Scotland
probability of flooding no
greater than that
specified for England.
High annual probability of
flooding
Zone 3a High Probability
1 in 100 or greater chance
of river flooding (>1%) and
a 1 in 200 or greater
chance of flooding from
the sea (>0.5%).
Zone 3b The Functional
Floodplain
Land where water has to
flow or be stored in times
of flood.
Zone C1 and C2
* For the purposes of
BREEAM assume the same
lower and upper
probability of flooding as
that specified for England.
Medium to high risk areas
Annual probability of
watercourse, tidal or
coastal flooding: greater
than 0.5% (1:200).
Please note: Northern Ireland PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood
maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or
other relevant data/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same
definitions as those outlined for England. The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer
further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk
Sources of flooding and flood risk
1. Streams and Rivers: Flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due to high levels
of rainfall in the catchment.
2. Coastal or Estuarine: Flooding that can occur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a combination of
both.
3. Groundwater: Where the water table rises to such a height where flooding occurs. Most common in low-lying areas
underlain by permeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather.
4. Sewers and highway drains: Combined, foul or surface water sewers and highway drains that are temporarily overloaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage.
5. Surface water: The net rainfall falling on a surface (on or off the site) which acts as run-off which has not infiltrated into
the ground or entered into a drainage system.
6. Infrastructure failure: Canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed pumping
stations.
SuDS - sustainable drainage systems:
A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion
than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include:
Holding ponds.
Swales.
Reed beds.
Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved
surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less
permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in
some areas.
Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local
geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function.
Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system.
Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.
Green roofs.
346
Pollution
For more information refer to The SuDS Manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).
Specification of oil/petrol interceptors
For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, Pollution Prevention Guide 3 Use and design of oil separators
in surface water drainage systems (2006) defines the type of areas on a development where separators are required.
PPG3 is produced on behalf of the Environment and Heritage Service (Northern Ireland), Scottish Environment Protection
Agency and Environment Agency (England and Wales).
In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be
required if appropriately designed sustainable urban drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance.
Contaminated sites
Examples of contamination legislation that should be considered includes: the Water Resources Act 1991, the Environmental
Protection Act 1990, the Groundwater Directive (2006/118/EC) and, more recently the Groundwater (England and Wales)
Regulations 2009. Where the site risk assessment confirms that infiltration SuDS techniques are not appropriate, SuDS
techniques that do not allow infiltration, such as swales lined with an impermeable membrane, can be used. It may be the case
that only some areas of the site are contaminated and therefore infiltration SuDS techniques can be used elsewhere on the
site. There may also be a requirement to remediate the contaminated soils, creating opportunities for the use of infiltration
SuDS post-remediation.
1Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems, Environment
Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage Service, 2006.
2C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
3Pollution Prevention Pays, Environment Agency, 2013.
4Technical Guidance to the National Planning Policy Framework, DCLG, March 2012.
5BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A
6C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
7Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments, W5-074/A/TR/1 Revision D, EA/DEFRA (September 2005) Useful
Link:
http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130123162956/http:/www.defra.gov.uk/environment/flooding/documents/
research/sc030219.pdf
8IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994)
9Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999)
10CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedence in urban drainage – good practice
347
Pollution
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised, reducing
unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. Where external lighting pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for external
lighting without adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 2 (and its accompanying notes) of the ILP
Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2011 1. Buildings located in Scotland must comply with the light
pollution criteria in the guidance note ‘Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption2’. This can
be demonstrated via completion of the checklists in Annexes B and C of the guidance note by a relevant member of the
design team.
3. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 23:00 and 07:00.
4. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 23:00 and 07:00, this part of the lighting system
complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 2 of the ILP’s Guidance notes.
5. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 – The
Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements3
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
CN1
348
Applicable
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Ref
Pollution
Terms
Description
assessment
criteria
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment
options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment
criteria
This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how
to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3
Country
specific
guidance
No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building
type and function apply.
General
None.
General
CN4
Methodology
The following provides guidance on when and how to apply the criteria to the external lighting associated with a building
being assessed:
1. Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only those areas affected by the works, i.e.
within the construction zone, need to be assessed. Where the assessment is of a building that forms part of an entire
new development, the criteria apply site-wide.
2. If the scope of the assessment covers a new extension only, then it is only new lighting specified as part of the extended
works that need to be assessed.
3. Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment.
4. Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM criteria
they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain evidence
confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.
Evidence
Criteria
All
349
Pollution
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM
assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Other information
The ILP Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2011 are available free of charge from the ILP website
www.theilp.org.uk.
Table 2 of the ILP guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow.
Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue.
Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries.
Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.
In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city centre). A
calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so that light in
potentially obtrusive directions is blocked.
1GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Professionals(ILP), 2011. www.theilp.org.uk,
2Guidance Note Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption, Scottish Executive, 2007.
3Technical Report No. 5: The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Third Ed, 2001.
350
Pollution
Minimum standards
1
No
Aim
To reduce the likelihood of noise arising from fixed installations on the new development affecting nearby noise-sensitive
buildings.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. Where there are, or will be, no noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800 m radius of the assessed development.
OR alternatively, where the building does have noise sensitive areas or buildings within 800 m radius of the
development, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. Where a noise impact assessment in compliance with BS 7445 1 has been carried out and the following noise levels
measured/determined:
a. Existing background noise levels at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive development to the proposed
development or at a location where background conditions can be argued to be similar.
b. The rating noise level resulting from the new noise-source (see CN5).
3. The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant holding a recognised
acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body (see Relevant definitions in the Additional
information section).
4. The noise level from the proposed site/building, as measured in the locality of the nearest or most exposed noisesensitive development, is a difference no greater than +5dB during the day (07:00 to 23:00) and +3dB at night (23:00
to 07:00) compared to the background noise level.
5. Where the noise source(s) from the proposed site/building is greater than the levels described in criterion 4, measures
have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will comply with criterion 4.
None
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Shell and core
351
Pollution
Ref
Terms
Description
CN1
Applicable
assessment
criteria
Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option.
Option 2 – Shell and Core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment
options.
Simple buildings
CN2
Applicable
assessment
criteria
Country specific
CN3
Country
specific
guidance
No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building
type and function apply.
CN4
Attenuating
noise at its
source
See criteria 4
and 5.
BS 8233:1999 2 gives recommendations for the control of noise in and around buildings.
Confirming the specification of attenuation measures in accordance with this Code of
Practice can be used as a method of demonstrating compliance with criterion 4.
CN5
Compliance
at the design
stage
See criterion
2.
At the design stage of assessment, where noise sensitive areas or buildings are present,
actual measurement is unlikely to be possible due to the planned but non-existent installation.
In such situations compliance can be demonstrated through the use of acousticians’
calculations or by scale model investigations. For such cases BS 7445-2 states that 'as
universally agreed prediction models do not exist, the method adopted should be carefully
described in the acoustician’s report” and that 'when available, prediction models accepted
by relevant authorities should be used'.
Where prediction through these methods is not possible, measurement will be necessary
using either a noise source similar to that proposed or, alternatively, measurement of the
actual noise from the installation (once installed); compliance with the latter approach
requires a written commitment to appoint a suitable qualified acoustician to carry out the
required measurements post-installation, and a further commitment to attenuate the noise
source in compliance with criteria 4 and 5 of BREEAM (if proved necessary by the
measurements).
CN6
Untreated
buildings
This assessment issue does not apply to buildings designed to be untreated, i.e. where
internal spaces will not be serviced by heating, ventilation or air conditioning systems and
therefore have no noise generating plant. Examples of such building types could include
industrial warehouse storage.
General
Methodology
None
352
Pollution
Evidence
Criteria
All
1, 2
Map of local area highlighting noise sensitive
buildings.
Noise sensitive area
Landscapes or buildings where the occupiers are likely to be sensitive to noise created by the new plant installed in the
assessed building, including:
1. Residential areas
2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor’s surgeries etc.
3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments
4. Libraries
5. Places of worship
6. Wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens
7. Located in an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) or near a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI)
8. Any other development that can be considered noise sensitive.
Suitably qualified acoustician
An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body.
The primary professional body for acousticians in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.
Other information
None
1BS 7445:1 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 1: Guide to quantities and procedures, British
Standards Institute, 2003.
BS 7445:2 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 2: Guide to the acquisition of data pertinent to land
use, British Standards Institute, 1991.
BS 7445:3 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 3: Guide to application to noise limits, British Standards
Institute, 1991.
2BS 8233 Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings, Code of practice, British Standards Institute, 1999.
353
Innovation
Innovation
354
Inn 01 Innovation
Innovation
Inn 01 Innovation
Minimum standards
10
No
Aim
To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not
rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance;
Up to a maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combination of the following:
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues
1. Where the building demonstrates exemplary performance by meeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in
one or more of following BREEAM assessment issues:
a. Man 03 Responsible construction practices
b. Man 05 Aftercare
c. Hea 01 Visual comfort
d. Hea 02 Indoor air quality
e. Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
f. Wat 01 Water consumption
g. Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
h. Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials
i. Wst 01 Construction site waste management
j. Wst 02 Recycled aggregates
k. Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change
l. Pol 03 Surface water run off (Simple buildings only)
Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this Scheme Document for the exemplary level performance
assessment criteria.
Approved innovations
2. One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the building
complies with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation Application Form.
None
355
Innovation
Compliance notes
Ref
Terms
Description
Exemplary level of
performance
Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that
contain exemplary performance levels.
General
CN1
Methodology
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues
For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the 'Methodology' section of the relevant BREEAM
issues.
Approved innovations
Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a Licensed BREEAM Assessor using the formal Approved
Innovation Application Form.
Evidence
Criteria
All
1
As defined within existing BREEAM issues.
As defined within existing BREEAM issues.
2
A copy of the Approved Innovation
Application Form
AND
A copy of the Innovation Application Report
stating the application outcome as
‘approved’
AND
Relevant documentary evidence
demonstrating specification of the
approved innovation.
As interim design stage
AND
Relevant documentary evidence confirming that the project
has achieved/installed the approved innovation as described
and quantified within the approved innovation application
form.
356
Inn 01 Innovation
Innovation
Approved innovation
Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method or process that can be
shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider industry in
a manner that is not covered elsewhere in BREEAM. In addition the innovation has been approved by BRE Global in
accordance with its published BREEAM Innovation credit procedures.
Other information
Applying for innovation credits
Refer to the BREEAM Innovation section documents available from the BREEAM Assessor Extranett for more information on
BREEAM Innovation credit eligibility criteria, application process, application fees and, previously approved innovations.
357
Appendices
Appendices
358
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types
Appendices
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope
and Healthcare building types
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following healthcare
establishments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Teaching/specialist hospitals
General acute hospitals
Community and mental health hospitals
GP surgeries
Health centres and clinics
The table below provides a description of the typical facilities and services offered by and forming a part of one of the above
healthcare buildings. Where a healthcare development does not fit one of the building type descriptions below, BREEAM New
Construction can still be used to assess that building type provided it falls within the building type category descriptions
outlined in the scope section of this document. Where it does not fall in to one of these categories, the project will require the
development of bespoke assessment criteria.
Typical descriptions
Facility
Service
Teaching Hospital
Specialist Acute
Hospital
In-patient
High concentration of energy- intensive
engineering services and specialist
equipment
Diagnostic and treatment services for physical
healthcare together with specialist services
Consultant-led
General Acute
Hospital
In-patient
Medium concentration of energy- intensive
engineering services and specialist
equipment
Diagnostic and treatment services for physical
healthcare
Consultant-led
Community
Hospital
Cottage Hospital
Mental Health
Hospital/Unit
Learning Disability
Unit
In-patient
Basic engineering services and equipment
Limited diagnostic and treatment services for
physical healthcare
Nurse- or GP-led
Care services for physical healthcare
Nurse- or GP-led
Mental health and learning disability services
Consultant- or nurse-led
GP Surgery
Non in-patient
Use typically 50-65 hours/week
Primary care consultation
GP-led
Health Centre/Clinic
Non in-patient
Use typically 35-45 hours/week
Primary care and mental health
Nurse/dental/visiting consultant or specialist
Other ‘healthcare’ associated building types
BREEAM New Construction can also be used to assess the following:
359
Appendices
1. Ambulance Trust buildings (‘Other buildings’ type)
2. Residential care homes and staff residential accommodation (Multi-residential accommodation building type)
3. Non-patient building types e.g. offices, laboratories, storage buildings (as listed in the table of building types in the
scope section).
360
Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings
Appendices
Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope
and Education buildings
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following educational
establishments:
1. Pre-school, including;
a. Nursery schools1
b. Children’s centres2
2. Schools, including;
a. Primary schools
b. Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges)
c. All age-range schools (including education or teaching buildings at boarding schools)
d. Academies
e. Non-acute special educational needs (SEN) schools
3. Sixth form colleges
4. Further and higher education or vocational colleges and Institutions, including;
a. Teaching facility
b. Learning Resource Centre
c. Laboratory/workshop/studio
d. Student union
e. Or a mixture of the above types.
All age range schools and academies
All age range schools and academies can typically be assessed using the guidance/criteria applicable to secondary schools. In
some cases, for these types of education establishments, it may be more appropriate to use the assessment criteria for
further education colleges or primary schools. For example, where an all age range school or academy will contain functional
or operational areas more akin to further or higher education buildings or where the needs of the accommodation and
occupiers are similar to those of primary or early years pupils. Based on the information received about the proposed
building, the BREEAM assessor should determine the most appropriate BREEAM criteria to apply in the assessment of the
building.
Acute special educational needs (SEN) schools
Acute special educational needs (SEN) refers to children with severe disabilities/learning difficulties that prevent them from
interpreting their surroundings without feeling anxious or distressed. These children can become easily distracted and/or
over-stimulated. This group of pupils mainly include children with a behavioural, emotional or social difficulties (BEDS) and
children with communication and interaction disability (autistic spectrum disorder (ASD)).
This BREEAM scheme has not been specifically tailored to assess acute SEN schools. However assessment using the
methodology is still possible, except where highly specialised accommodation is provided. Acute SEN schools are therefore
defined as an 'Other' building type and BREEAM assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs will
need to consider carefully all the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for such
building users, e.g. View out, Cyclist facilities, etc. Where it is not explicit within this scheme document for this building type, the
assessor will need to decide which, if any, building type assessment criteria is appropriate and apply accordingly, seeking
confirmation from BRE Global Ltd. on the application of alternative building criteria where appropriate to do so.
For more information on SEN please refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for disabled children with special educational
needs, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families (available from www.education.gov.uk)
361
Appendices
Student residential accommodation
BREEAM New Construction can be used to assess boarding school residential and halls of residence accommodation
buildings. These types of building are classified as a multi-residential accommodation building type for the purpose of a
BREEAM assessment.
1Nursery school/education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not attained compulsory
school age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities/buildings for the teaching of children who are between
the ages of two or three to five years old.
2Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early education, full day
childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors and health screening.
Children’s centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school site.
362
Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings
Appendices
Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope
and Multi-residential buildings
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess multi-occupancy residential buildings that are not suitable for
assessment under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, or under EcoHomes in
Scotland. The UK New Construction scheme provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to
buildings which contain dwellings assessed under the CSH, but also communal facilities within the same building, to allow
assessment of the whole building.
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess the following types of multi-residential buildings:
1. Student halls of residence
2. Key worker accommodation
3. Care homes that do not contain extensive or specialist medical facilities (limited consulting rooms and medical rooms
are acceptable)
4. Sheltered housing
5. Other multi-residential buildings which contain a mix of residential accommodation with communal areas such as some
military accommodation.
BREEAM Multi-residential and the Code for Sustainable Homes
BREEAM New Construction for non domestic buildings provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be
applied to a building containing self-contained dwellings and communal facilities.
Where both a Code for Sustainable Homes and a BREEAM assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort, evidence
collected for the purpose of a CSH assessment can be used towards demonstrating compliance with the equivalent BREEAM
assessment criteria and vice versa.
363
Appendices
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and
shell and core project assessments
Non-fitted, speculative new buildings (often referred to as shell and core buildings) can be assessed using the BREEAM UK
New Construction 2014 scheme.
The BREEAM New Construction version can be applied to both fully fitted and shell and core building projects. This section
provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to shell and core projects.
A shell and core building project is defined as one where the developer’s scope of works is the design and construction of the
base building only, leaving a range of construction and fit out works to be completed before the building is able to be
occupied. This may include some or all of the following elements: the structure, building envelope, core building systems
including building servicing strategy and installations (such as HVAC) or plant support for installation of such systems and
where present, fit-out of common areas. Upon completion, the whole building or space within the building is sold or let to be
fitted out as appropriate for occupation. The new owner(s) or tenant(s) will fit-out the building’s accommodation in
accordance with their corporate and operational needs.
In these projects, where areas of the development are not fully-fitted, performance of the building and compliance with
BREEAM is verified based on the developer’s scope of works.only.This performance is measured using two standard project
type options that in turn define appropriate assessment criteria applicable to that project type. Whilst some projects will differ
to some extent from the scope of these standard options, for the purpose of BREEAM, issues not included within the chosen
option will be excluded from the assessment, even where they are within the Developer’s scope of works. This approach is
necessary to ensure clarity, consistency and comparability within the property market. A fully flexible filtering of issues based
on each individual projects scope would not allow comparability between BREEAM ratings, either in terms of performance
benchmarking or promotional/publicity purposes.
Defining the shell and core project type
For the purpose of defining the scope of assessment and BREEAM certification labelling, a shell and core new construction
project can be categorised in to one of the following types:
Option 1: Shell only assessment and certification
Option 2: Shell and core assessment and certification
Option 1: Shell only assessment
This assessment and certification option is available where the developer’s scope of works covers new build works to the
fabric, sub and superstructure of the building only, including:
External walls, windows, doors, roof, core internal walls, floors
Hard and soft landscaping areas (where present and within scope of works)
Option 2: Shell and core assessment
This option is available where the developer's scope of works covers shell works, as described in Option 1, plus core building
services. Core building services relates to the installation of central or communal transportation systems, water systems, fitout of common areas, central mechanical and electrical systems including HVAC, but without local fitting of systems within
tenant areas. The systems will typically be centralised with capped off distribution to each tenanted area (for future
connection as part of a tenant’s fit-out works).
These shell and core assessment options are available only for the following non-domestic building types:
364
Appendices
Office
Retail
Industrial
Assessing new build shell and core projects
In the main the assessment process and application of a majority of the BREEAM assessment issues will be unaffected by the
scope of new build shell and core works. This is because most of the BREEAM criteria are concerned with impacts, processes
and management procedures that occur with any new build development, regardless of whether it is a shell and core or fully
fitted project. However, several BREEAM issues and criterion are tailored for the assessment of fitted-out buildings, for
example acoustics performance.Therefore, additional guidance is given within the assessment issue in the form of a
compliance note. These shell and core compliance notes confirm whether the assessment issue applies to a shell and core
project and, where it does apply, how to assess it for the shell and core project types defined above.
Table 77-1summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues and their applicability to shell and core
projects.
Shell and core building assessments and minimum BREEAM standards
All minimum BREEAM standards remain applicable to shell and core building assessments for the developers scope of
works.The only exception is minimum standards for BREEAM issues/credits/criteria which are not assessed in a shell and core
project (confirmed by the shell and core compliance note in each relevant issue).
BREEAM UK New Construction and the BREEAM UK Refurbishment Fit-Out scheme
At the time of writing, BRE Global Ltd. are developing a standalone BREEAM scheme to cover the refurbishment and fit out
stages of the life cycle for non-domestic buildings. Under this scheme, only criteria that would fall under the tenant's fit-out
works would be assessed and certified.
When launched, certified assessments of shell and core projects that opted for either option 1 or option 2 under BREEAM UK
New Construction 2014 can choose to assess fit–out related issues under BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme to
gain a fully fitted-out status under BREEAM.
By having a two part assessment for the shell and core projects, where the shell and core parts and fit–out parts are assessed
separately, BREEAM aims to provide a flexible yet robust way of assessing shell and core projects.
Table 77-1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues: Shell and core applicability
Ref
Issue
Applicable to shell and core option type
Option 1: Shell
only
Option 2: Shell and
core
Managment
Man 01
Project brief
Y
Y
Man 02
Life cycle costing and service life planning
Y
Y
Man 03
Responsible construction practices
Y
Y
Man 04
Commissioning and handover
Y
Y
Man 05
Aftercare
N
N
365
Appendices
Ref
Issue
Option 1: Shell
only
Option 2: Shell and
core
Healthand wellbeingW
Hea 01
Visual comfort
Y
Y
Hea 02
Indoor air quality
Y
Y
Hea 03
Safe containment in laboratories
N
N
Hea 04
Thermal comfort
Y
Y
Hea 05
Acoustic performance
Y
Y
Hea 06
Safety and security
Y
Y
Ene 01
Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
Y
Y
Ene 02
Energy monitoring
Y
Y
Ene 03
Energy efficient external lighting
Y
Y
Ene 04
Low carbon design
Y
Y
Ene 05
Energy efficient cold storage systems
N
Y
Ene 06
Energy efficient transportation systems
N
Y
Ene 07
Energy efficient laboratory systems
N
N
Ene 08
Energy efficient equipment
N
N
Ene 09
Drying space
N
N
Tra 01
Public transport accessibility
Y
Y
Tra 02
Proximity to amenities
Y
Y
Tra 03
Cyclist facilities
Y
Y
Energy
Transport
366
Ref
Issue
Appendices
Option 1: Shell
only
Option 2: Shell and
core
Tra 04
Maximum car parking capacity
Y
Y
Tra 05
Travel plan
Y
Y
Wat 01
Water consumption
N
Y
Wat 02
Water monitoring
Y
Y
Wat 03
Water leak detection and prevention
Y
Y
Wat 04
Water efficient equipment (process)
Y
Y
Mat 01
Life cycle impacts
Y
Y
Mat 02
Hard landscaping and boundary protection
Y
Y
Mat 03
Responsible sourcing of materials
Y
Y
Mat 04
Insulation
Y
Y
Mat 05
Designing for durability and resilience
Y
Y
Mat 06
Material efficiency
Y
Y
Wst 01
Construction waste management
Y
Y
Wst 02
Recycled aggregates
Y
Y
Wst 03
Operational waste
Y
Y
Wst 04
Speculative floor finishes
Y
Y
Wst 05
Adaptation to climate change
Y
Y
Wst 06
Y
Y
Water
Materials
Waste
367
Appendices
Ref
Issue
Option 1: Shell
only
Option 2: Shell and
core
LE 01
Site selection
Y
Y
LE 02
Ecological value of site and protection of ecological
features
Y
Y
LE 03
Minimising impact on site ecology
Y
Y
LE 04
Enhancing site ecology
Y
Y
LE 05
Long term impact on biodiversity
Y
Y
Pol 01
Impact of refrigerants
N
Y
Pol 02
NO emissions from heating source
x
N
Y
Pol 03
Y
Y
Pol 04
Reduction of night time light pollution
Y
Y
Pol 05
Noise attenuation
N
Y
Y
Y
Pollution
Innovation
368
Appendices
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New
Construction simple building assessments
The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 version can be applied to both complex and less complex building projects. This
section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to less complex i.e. 'simple building'
projects.
A simple building is defined as one where the building services are predominantly of limited capacity and local in their delivery,
largely independent from other systems in the building fabric and avoid complex control systems.
Where the building includes complex services, systems or functions/facilities including, but not limited to those listed below, it
cannot be defined or assessed as a ‘simple building’ and a full BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment should be
carried out:
Air conditioning and refrigeration systems.
Mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, and complex passive ventilation.
Note: Buildings with small localised cooling or ventilation systems are eligible for assessment using the ‘simple
buildings’ criteria. See 'Building Services' section below for further guidance.
Renewable energy sources, with the exception of on-site microgeneration technologies
Renewable energy sources, with the exception of situations where connecting to an existing communal network
system
Laboratories and buildings that contain either fume cupboards and/or safety cabinets and/or containment areas
Major water-consuming plant or functions such as swimming / hydrotherapy / research pools and/or vehicle wash /
irrigation systems.
Cold storage plant and enclosures, with the exception of domestic scale refrigeration
Escalators and/or travelling walkways.
The list above is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the types of services and systems that describe a more complex
building solution and therefore would not be present within a simple building. Examples of buildings which could fall under the
BREEAM UK New Construction definition of ‘simple building’ (depending on the remit of the works) include; offices,
educational and community buildings, GP surgeries, basic industrial units, and extensions to existing buildings.
The following section describes some of the additional features a ‘simple building’ may have. These descriptions can be used
to support the classification of a building for the purpose of a BREEAM ‘simple building’ assessment:
Building type
The building can be classified within any of the building types categories listed in the scope section of this Technical Manual,
including mixed-use developments/building types.
Building services
1. Space and/or hot water heating is provided by simple systems only, e.g. systems with total capacity of less than 100kW2
or point of use heaters.
2. Predominately naturally ventilated, using simple cross-flow ventilation relying solely on openable windows and/or trickle
vents, except in areas where mechanical extract ventilation is required by the Building Regulations.
Note: Buildings with small local systems, such as local split cooling systems or ventilation systems (to service single
rooms or areas for occasional or seasonal use), with a total system capacity of less than 12kW and a total collective
refrigerant charge of less than 5kg can be assessed using the ‘simple buildings’ criteria.
369
Appendices
3. Domestic scale sanitary, kitchen and laundry facilities with only basic connections for hot and cold water provision and
drainage.
4. Building services commissioning required will be limited in complexity.
Typical profile of a simple building
The cost and size of a simple building is likely to differ, so BREEAM uses the complexity of the building function and its services
to determine whether it can be assessed using the BREEAM ‘simple buildings’ criteria.
If a particular building does not meet the profile described above, but exhibits features which suggest it could be classified as
a ‘simple building’, it may still be possible to assess the building as such. Please contact [email protected] for further advice
and classification.
. The table below summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues, credits and criteria applicable to an
assessment of a 'simple building'.
Table - 1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 issue applicability for simple building assessments
Issue ID
Criteria applicability to simple buildings
No
change
Simplified
Credits available
Exemplary credits
available
N/A
Management
Man 01
ü
2
2
Man 02
ü
1
0
Man 03
ü
4
0
Man 04
ü
4
0
3
0
(3-5) - building type dependent
1
0
N/A
N/A
3
0
N/A
N/A
2
0
Man 05
ü
Health and wellbeing
Hea 01
ü
Hea 02
ü
Hea 03
Hea 04
ü
ü
Hea 05
Hea 06
370
ü
ü
Issue ID
No
change
Simplified
Appendices
Credits available
Exemplary credits
available
N/A
Energy
Ene 01
ü
12
5
Ene 02
ü
(1-2) -building type dependent
0
Ene 03
ü
1
0
Ene 04
ü
3
0
N/A
N/A
2
0
N/A
N/A
Ene 05
Ene 06
ü
ü
Ene 07
ü
Ene 08
ü
2
0
Ene 09
ü
1
0
Tra 01
ü
(Up to 5) - building type
dependent
0
Tra 02
ü
0
Tra 03
ü
0
Transport
Tra 04
ü
N/A
N/A
Tra 05
ü
N/A
N/A
Water
Wat 01
ü
5
1
Wat 02
ü
1
0
2
0
N/A
N/A
Wat 03
Wat 04
ü
ü
371
Appendices
Issue ID
No
change
Simplified
Credits available
Exemplary credits
available
N/A
Materials
Mat 01
ü
(Up to 6) - building type
dependent
3
Mat 02
ü
1
0
Mat 03
ü
3
TBC
Mat 04
ü
1
0
Mat 05
ü
1
0
Mat 06
ü
1
0
3
1
Waste
Wst 01
ü
Wst 02
..ü
1
1
Wst 03
ü
1
0
Wst 04
ü
1
0
Wst 5
ü
1
1
Wst 6
ü
1
0
LE 01
ü
2
0
LE 02
ü
2
0
LE 03
ü
2
0
2
0
N/A
N/A
LE 04
LE 05
372
ü
ü
Issue ID
No
change
Simplified
Appendices
Credits available
Exemplary credits
available
N/A
N/A
0
5
1
1
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
Pollution
Pol 01
Pol 02
ü
ü
Pol 03
Pol 04
Pol 05
ü
ü
ü
373
Appendices
Appendix F – TBA
374
Appendix G – TBA
Appendices
Appendix G – TBA
375
Appendices
Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New
Construction certificates
Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates for the interim design stage and final post construction stage are
provided in Figure 3 and Figure 4 respectively.
Figure 3: Example of certificate at design stage
376
Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates
Appendices
Figure 4: Example of certificate at post construction stage
377
BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction
Index
Index
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator 228
BREEAM Mat 04 calculator 248
A
BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification
schemes 241
Accessibility Index 171
BREEAM related performance targets 35
Accessible Amenities 177
BREEAM Tra 01 Calculator 172
Accessible Meters 131
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator 204
Accredited energy assessor 121
Building 188
Acoustically 106
Building Emission Rate 122
Adequate 72
Building regulations 122
Adoptable highways 341
Building Regulations 107
Aggregates
Building User Guide 51
Secondary aggregates 271
Allowable solutions 125
Building Users 194
C
anchor tenant 277
Capital cost reporting 40
AP 35
Appropriate consultant 341
Appropriate food outlet 177
Appropriate statutory body 341
Approved building energy calculation software 122
Approved Innovation 357
Carbon negative building 122
Carbon neutral 122
Care Homes 189
Catchment 341
Chain of custody 241
CITES 242
Areas 83
ClassVent 83
Automatic 135
Average daylight factor 72
Average total taxon 305
Clinical 83, 205
CoC 241
Common areas 131
B
Communication strategy 35
Baler 277
Community space 177
BAPS 315
Complex systems 51, 56
Biodiversity 314
Compliant organisational, local or national considerate
construction schemes 45
Biodiversity Action Plan 314
Biodiversity Champion 314
biofuels 142
Compliant Test Body 107
Compliant transport node 171
Component level LCC plan 40
BRE Environmental Profile Methodology 229
BREEAM 241
Composite material 242
Computer simulation 72
BREEAM Accredited Professional 35
378
Index
Considerate Constructors Scheme 45
Effective flush volume 204
Considerate ConstructorsScheme 45
Elemental LCC Pplan 40
Construction processes 46
Energy 131
Construction Resource Management Plan 263
Energy demand 123
Construction zone 72, 135, 236, 291, 296, 305, 350
Energy meters 131
Consultation feedback 35
Energy monitoring and management system 131
Contaminant 291
Energy Performance Ratio 123
Contaminated land specialist 292
Energy Specialist 142
Control devices 342
Energy supply 131
Controlled service 122
Environmental Product Declaration 229
Convention on International Trade in Endangered
Species 242
Extract cabinet 89
Counterbalancing 151
F
Counterbalancing ratio 150
Factory gate 46
Current National planning guidance 342
Features 297
Fixed building service 123
D
Flagship tenant 277
Data centre 162
Daylight sensor 135
Dedicated non-obstructive position 276
DELC 321
Design flood event 342
Design flood level 342
Design storm event 342
Direct Effect Life Cycle - Carbon Dioxide
Equivalent 321
Discharge point 342
Domestic scale components 204
Durability 283
Dwelling Emission Rate 122
Dynamic Simulation Model 123
Flood defences 342
Flood event 342
Flood probability 342
Flood risk 342
Flood risk assessment 342
Flood storage 342
Flood zones 343
Free cooling 142
Fume 89
Fume cabinet 89
Fume cupboard 89
G
Global Warming Potential 322
Government’s Buying Standards 162
E
ECA Energy Technology Product List 147
Ecological recommendations 310
Ecology related subject 297
Ecopoint 229
Green Guide 229
Green Guide element number 229
Green Guide to Specification 229
Greenfield 343
379
Index
Greenfield run-off rate 343
Luminous 135
Greywater recycling 205
LZC 142
Groups 107
LZC feasibility study in regulations 142
GWP 322
M
H
Machine Room Less lift 150
Habitable rooms 107
Main building entrance 171
Hard surfaces 343
Material change of use 107
Material efficiency 256
I
Materials 253, 271
I.T-intensive areas 162
Materials optimisation 248
Idle condition 150
Microgeneration Certification Scheme 142
Illuminance 72
Moderately airtight enclosure 321
Independent third party 36
Modular boiler systems 131
Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions 147
MRL 150
Infiltration 343
Multiple occupancy offices 107
Insulation Index 248
N
K
National Calculation Method 123
Key design team meetings 36
Key phases 36
NCM 123
Near-site LZC 123, 142
Noise sensitive area 353
L
Non-habitable rooms 107
Laboratory 156
Laboratory containment devices 87
Legally harvested and traded timber 242
Level of pollution prevention treatment 343
Life cycle cost 40
Non-native invasive plant species 292
Non potable water 205
Notional building 123
Novel LZC technologies 142
NR curves 109
Lift car lighting 150
Limiting discharge 343
O
linical area 72
Occupied 83
Living-out personnel 189
Occupied space 72
Low and zero carbon 142
Occupied spaces 107
Low grade aggregate uses 271
Office equipment 162
Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies 123
On-site LZC 124, 142
Low risk areas 343
Online Green Guide calculator 229
380
Index
Openable 84
Refrigerant pump down 322
Operating Hours 172
Refrigerant recovery 322
Regulated energy 124, 162
P
Relevant 84
Patient areas 72
Relevant Building Areas 73
Payback period 142
Relevant third parties 37
Peak run-off rate 343
Remediation 292
Peer review 297
Renewables Obligation Certificate 124
Point daylight factor 72
Reporting protocols 47
Pollution linkages 292
Resilience 283
Post-consumer waste stream 243, 271
Responsible sourcing 243
Potable water 205
Reused materials 229, 243
Pre-consumer waste stream 243
Right 156
Pre-development 343
Risk assessment 89
Presence 135
Previously developed land 292
Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection
system 322
Primary energy consumption 124
Robust Details 107
Prison Service biodiversity action plan 315
ROC 124
Private wire arrangement 124
Room for residential purposes 107
Project delivery stakeholders 36
Run-off 343
Project execution plan 36
Rural location 172
Proposed development 292
Rural location sensitive buildings 172
Public 253
Public areas 73
S
SAP 124-125
Q
SBEM 124-125
Qbar 343
Scope of hard landscaping 236
Secondary aggregates 271
R
Secure space 165
Rainwater discharge 343
Separate 74
Rainwater recycling 205
Sewerage undertaker 344
Recyclable storage 277
Sheltered Housing 189
Recycled aggregates 271
Significant contamination 292
Recycled material 243
Simplified Building Energy Model 124
Refrigerant 322
Single occupancy offices 108
Refrigerant leak detection 321
Site Waste Management Plans 264
381
Index
Small 322
Types of Oil Separator 345
Soakaways 344
Typical day 172
Soft Landings Framework 56
U
Sources 84
Specialist Ccommissioning Mmanager 57
Uniformity 74
Specialist commissioning manager 51
Unoccupied 108
Specialist floor finishes 230
Unregulated energy 124, 162
Specified performance level 108
Unregulated water 217
Staff areas 74
V
Standard Assessment Procedure for Energy Rating of
Dwellings 124
View of sky 74
Standby condition 150
Volatile Organic Compound 85
Structural and fabric resilience 283
Volatile Organic Compounds 85
Structural robustness 283
Volume of run-off 345
Sub-meters 131
SuDS management train 344
W
Waste compactor 277
SuDS Techniques 344
Suitably qualified acoustician 108, 353
Suitably qualified ecologist 297, 305, 310, 315
Suitably qualified professionals 52
Waste hierarchy 264
Waste treatment 277
Watercourses and sewers 345
Weighted standardised impact sound pressure
level 108
Surface Water Run-off 344
Surrounding 74
Weighted standardized level differences 108
Sustainability Champion 46
Sustainability Champion (design) 37
White goods 162
Working plane 74
Sustainable Procurement Plan 243
Systems using refrigerants 322
Z
Zero net carbon (CO2) emissions 125
T
/docDetials
Target Emission Rate 124
The ILP Guidance notes 350
Pages: 1
Generation date: 11/02/2014 - 08:17
Tidal estuary 344
Tier levels 243
Time switch 135
Toxic fumes 89
Travel Plan 194
Treatment 344
382
383
384

BREEAM Manual 2014

Transcription

Similar documents

GREEN MOVEMENT IN TURKEY

GREEN MOVEMENT IN TURKEY

Delivering Sustainable Buildings

In accordance with BREEAM ENE 5

elco_Ref_Airport_Basel EN 4c RZ.indd

Passmores School, Sports Hall 0996

20.1.2015 Dr. Duygu Erten, PE LEED Faculty Member of

steel breaks the boundaries

BesNet Center - Professionals

Vizcaya Village